Revit 2009 Tutorial | Autodesk Revit | Autodesk

Revit MEP 2009

Imperial Tutorial

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Secondary Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System . Creating the Primary System Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Primary System Equipment . . . . . . . . . Inspecting and Color Coding the System . . . . . . . . . Creating Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Electrical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 26 . 31 . 35 . 39 . 45 . 47 . 47 . 57 . 60 . 63 . 72

Developing Your MEP Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

v

Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 77 . 88 . 94 . 95

Chapter 4

Mechanical Systems: Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . 101 . 108 . 112 . 136 . 141 . 148 . 153 . 156 . 160 . 162 . 168 . 185

Chapter 5

Mechanical Systems: Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 . 189 . 196 . 200 . 204 . 217 . 230 . 249 . 252 . 260 . 263

Chapter 6

Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . 269 . 274 . 280 . 281 . 284 . 284 . 291 . 296 . 303 . 304 . 309 . 314 . 320 . 325 . 331 . 338

Chapter 7

Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 . 344 . 345 . 346

vi | Contents

Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 346 . 352 . 359 . 371 . 376 . 382 . 390 . 398

Chapter 8

Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Placing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 . 406 . 410 . 432 . 445 . 451 . 458

Chapter 9

Creating Revit MEP Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Modifying Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Fan Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family . Modifying Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Water Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . Creating Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Light Fixture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol Family . . . . . . . . . . . . Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 . 470 . 474 . 483 . 488 . 491 . 493 . 498 . 498 . 507 . 518 . 555 . 561 . 561 . 568 . 568 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 571 . 571

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . 577 . 582 . 589 . 595 . 599 . 599 . 602 . 605 . 607 . 610 . 615 . 615

Contents | vii

Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Chapter 11

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 . 631 . 637 . 641 . 644 . 644 . 649 . 651 . 654 . 656 . 662 . 670 . 673 . 673 . 675 . 678 . 682 . 682 . 684 . 684

Chapter 12

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 . 688 . 692 . 692 . 702 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 713

Chapter 13

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 . 720 . 727 . 731 . 732 . 735 . 737 . 741 . 742 . 742 . 743 . 745

Chapter 14

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 . 761 . 767 . 767 . 769

viii | Contents

Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 769 . 773 . 779 . 779 . 781 . 783 . 784 . 790 . 791 . 791 . 792

Chapter 15

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Chapter 16 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 . 815 . 823 . 827 . 830 . 830 . 833 . 836 . 836

Chapter 17

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 . 840 . 840 . 844 . 848 . 851 . 856

Chapter 18

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . 862 . 872 . 879

Chapter 19

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 . 894 . 903 . 906

Contents | ix

Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 908 . 911 . 911 . 913 . 916 . 918 . 919

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Chapter 21 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 . 925 . 927 . 929 . 930 . 933 . 933 . 937 . 939 . 942 . 947 . 949 . 950 . 953 . 953 . 954 . 959 . 961 . 964 . 965 . 967

x | Contents

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.

3

■ ■

Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. 10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2009?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

Understanding the Basics | 5

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2009 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows, doors, and cabinets are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You

Understanding the Basics | 7

create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

click (New). Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. you type the required key combination to perform the command. This creates a new project based on the default template. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. In addition. By default. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. which are listed on the menu. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. While working in the drawing area. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. For example. and View. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Edit. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar.

You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. When you select the Door tool. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. a door type is specified. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.

8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. In the drawing area. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. when you add a door. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 9 In the Type Selector. ■ The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. For example. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available.

Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . 11 Click OK.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. containing buttons grouped by function. click the tab in the Design Bar. The respective commands display on the Design Bar.

sheets. and groups of your current project: ■ Right-click in the browser to add. select Views (all). You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. In the Project Browser. reports. schedules. delete. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. and rename views. families. and groups. families.TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu.

15 In the Browser Organization dialog. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. elevations. click Cancel. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. and group name. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Navigating the User Interface | 15 .■ The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. The cursor displays as a pencil. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. After creating a browser organization scheme. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. family category (doors. To open a view. 3D). scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. The browser is dockable. walls. Do not click. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. click Wall. windows). double-click its name.

16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . find a keyword on the Index tab. 20 Press TAB. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). You can use this tri-pane. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. The status bar also provides information. In this case. Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. In the status bar. Revit MEP 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2009 Help. It highlights when the cursor is over it. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view.In the bottom left corner of the window. When you place the cursor over an element. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. in conjunction with tooltips. 18 On the Design Bar. regarding selected elements in a view. There are several tools that help you find information. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. click Modify to end the Wall command. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab.

click on the Standard toolbar. press F1 for help. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.rvt. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. Toolbar: From the toolbar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Click the Help button. press F1 for context-sensitive help. In the following steps. For example. click Training Files. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Tooltips: To see tooltips. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. If no Help button displays. After you are familiar with these tasks. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.In addition. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. You can also press SHIFT+F1. There are several ways to access zoom options. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 17 . Windows: From any window. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options.

4 Click Zoom Out (2x).The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. In the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. 7 Click in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. the view zooms in on the selected area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. the view zooms out from the building model. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 5 On the View toolbar. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. and click Help. 15 To exit the wheel. To modify or add snap increments. . click Settings menu ➤ Options. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. To define settings for SteeringWheels. As you move the mouse. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. press ESC. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. moving the wheel to the desired location. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 19 . and click the SteeringWheels tab. on the View toolbar. and then using the Zoom tool again. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. 10 To display SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.

Small blue dots. click (Move). 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. These are the drag controls. 18 Click and drag the left control. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Cnst. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. and on the Tools toolbar. referred to as shape handles. expand Floor Plans. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. called drag controls.Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and select the wall. bottoms. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. display along the ends. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Similar controls. expand Views (all). and double-click 2nd Flr. to lengthen the wall. 17 Type ZR. When drawing or modifying a building model. as shown. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views.

24 Select the plant. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 21 . such as Move and Copy. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. and drag it on top of the table. you want to move the table closer to the wall. click to specify the starting position. In this case. The table moves down. for example. as shown.Some commands. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. and click again to specify the ending position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 23 Click next to the lower wall. After selecting the element to move.

such as the Lines command. click the Undo command. and click again to end it.Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 26 On the Undo menu. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Some commands. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. or press CTRL+Z. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. select the second item in the list. 29 To end the command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. click Modify. In this example. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Press ESC twice. On the Design Bar. click Lines. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Move.

Express Workshop 23 .

24 .

you will have a basic understanding of Revit MEP design and documentation tools. which is the physical representation of the system. you can create supply. You then create the main trunk line for Mechanical Supply Air 3 and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. In Revit MEP. secondary supply air systems and a primary. When you have finished these tutorials. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. The model you use in this lesson contains the secondary system Mechanical Supply Air 1. connect it to existing air terminals. an HVAC system is a logical connection between air terminals and HVAC mechanical equipment. After air terminals and mechanical equipment are placed in a model.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit MEP functionality and highlight powerful features that are integral to the most common MEP workflows. you place the variable air volume (VAV) box. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an MEP project. return. and to place and size ductwork. The systems are used to perform calculations and analysis. high pressure system. and size the ductwork. Creating a Supply Air System In this lesson. creating the primary supply system. Finally. you add and connect the air handler. you create a supply air system that consists of 2 low pressure. and exhaust systems using these components. To create Mechanical Supply Air 2. 25 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. VAV box in the model. 2 If the Mechanical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. scroll until the folder is displayed. the model contains one completed secondary supply air system. You then define a logical connection between the VAV box and 4 existing air terminals. In this exercise. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ Open the i Express Workshop Supply Air System.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. and click Mechanical. creating a secondary supply system. Display the Mechanical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. If necessary. click Training Files. you create the logical system shown above on the left.Creating a Secondary Supply Air System In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. At the beginning of this exercise. right-click the Design Bar. click the Mechanical tab. fan-powered. you place a parallel. The Mechanical commands are displayed.

The entire model displays on the screen. 4 Type ZR. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.In this tutorial. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. you can enter ZE to zoom out. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. click Mechanical Equipment. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. To pan. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. hold the wheel down and drag. you find the command at the far left of the screen. Add a VAV box 7 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. roll the wheel. The model zooms to the specified area. Then. In this tutorial. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 27 . To zoom in and out.

12 On the Design Bar.8 inch Inlet. The cursor displays as the VAV box outline. select Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 3 . the Type Selector displays the mechanical equipment that is pre-loaded in the model. 8 In the Type Selector. 10 Press SPACEBAR once to rotate the VAV box 90 degrees. on the Options Bar. but do not click. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 9 Move the cursor to the area near the interior door of the room between grid lines 3 and 4. 11 Click to place the VAV box in the location shown.Directly above the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.

16 Press ESC to clear the selection of the VAV box. You do not need to enter the units. verify that SupplyAirFlow is set to 900 CFM. ■ 15 Click OK.Airflow. After the system is created. This value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the Level 1 ceiling and the Level 2 floor. and click Element Properties. The air terminal turns red. 14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 18 Click to select the air terminal.) ■ Under Mechanical . Verify that the PrimaryToSupplyRatio is 0. enter 10' 0". indicating that it has been selected. or just 10.13 Right-click the VAV box. you can enter 10 0 without units. for Offset. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. Create the system 17 Move the cursor over the leftmost supply air terminal in the model to highlight it. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 29 . This value is built into the family type for the VAV box.200000 (20%). 19 Move the cursor off the air terminal. this value is automatically updated to reflect the supply airflow requirement.

select the 2 supply air terminals to the right. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected air terminals. click (Edit System).20 While pressing CTRL. move the cursor over the supply air terminal to the right. the air terminals display in red. 27 On the Options bar. 22 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and the number of elements that make up the system. 24 Select the VAV box you just placed. click Modify to end the command. the equipment supplying the system. Verify the elements of the system 26 Select an air terminal that is an element of the system you just created. and click to select it. The red sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components of the system. 25 On the Design Bar. The Options Bar displays system information such as the system name. (Create Supply Air System). You have created a secondary supply air system that includes 4 air terminals and a VAV box. indicating that they are selected. 21 While pressing CTRL. click 23 On the Options Bar. click (Select Equipment For System).

i Express Workshop Supply Air System. You could change the name by overwriting it. Specify the layout 1 Select an air terminal in the system you created. 30 Press TAB. 28 In the Supply Air : Mechanical Supply Air 2 dialog. you leave it unchanged. The sketch graphics highlight. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System The model now contains the logical connection for Mechanical Supply Air System 2. showing the logical connection between the components of the system. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 31 . the secondary supply air system shown below on the left. In this tutorial. click Finish. Next. Verify the connections between the system elements 29 Move the cursor over an air terminal in the system to highlight it. 31 Move the cursor off the air terminal. In this exercise.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Do not click. however. 2 On the Options Bar. the ductwork. for Solution Type. you complete the secondary system by adding ductwork.Revit MEP automatically named the system Mechanical Supply Air 2. select Network. click (Layout Path). you create the physical connection for the system.

plumbing. Configuring the layout path settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during the project. 8 In the right pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. click Finish Layout. select Branch. for Duct Type. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". click Settings. select Main.A network layout solution displays with main segments in blue and branch segments in green. Verify that Flex Duct Type is set to Flex Duct Round : Flex . and fire protection systems. Verify that the Maximum Flex Duct Length is 2’ 0”. (Show Next Solution) to display other suggested network 5 Click until the network solution shown below displays. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. 9 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. thus maintaining the consistency of these systems within the project.Round. click solutions. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". 7 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Duct Type. 10 Click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. which is located to the far left of the drawing area. The layout path settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. piping. 4 On the Options Bar. Specify the layout path settings 6 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air.

click Sizing. The branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and type SD. You will use TAB to examine the hierarchy of the system components. Check the connectivity of the system You can check the connectivity of ducts and fittings using the TAB key. 12 If the ductwork displays in wireframe instead of with shading. Velocity. Select Flex Ducts. or click in an empty part of the drawing area. fittings.08 in-wg/100ft. 22 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction. click View menu ➤ Shading with Edges. A disconnection will negatively impact calculations involving this system. the system has not been created properly. Select Duct Fittings. and Static Regain. 18 On the Options Bar. 17 Click to select the highlighted system. Size the duct system 21 On the Options Bar. and enter . 14 Press TAB. Do not click. Revit MEP supports 4 of the most common sizing methods: Friction. 20 Click OK. Equal Friction. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). and a disconnection exists at the point where the highlighting stops. Click Check None.Revit MEP automatically creates and initially sizes all of the ducts and fittings required to connect the components of the system. 16 Press TAB until the entire hierarchy of connected ducts. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 33 . If the entire network does not highlight. 13 Highlight a segment of the newly created ductwork by moving the cursor over it. and equipment is highlighted. Select Ducts. 15 Press TAB again to highlight the next level of connections.

click Modify to end the command. 37 Click OK. The ductwork is sized using the friction method at . 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties).08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.■ ■ Verify that Only is selected.Airflow. 23 Click OK. Verify the calculated airflow value for the VAV box. 33 Click OK.Airflow. scroll to Mechanical . 26 On the Options Bar. 30 Select the segment of duct shown. for Branch Sizing. 29 Press ESC to clear the selection. 38 Press ESC to clear the selection. The ductwork is automatically updated with all the necessary fittings. The Flow value of 150 CFM matches the required flow for the air terminal. the adjusted SupplyAirFlow value of 625 CFM for the VAV reflects the supply airflow values calculated for the system. you create the ductwork for the primary system and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 28 Click OK. click (Element Properties). 31 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties).Airflow. 34 Press ESC to clear the selection. The Flow value of 300 CFM is the sum of the 2 air terminals. 35 Select the VAV box in the system. scroll to Mechanical . 24 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. 36 On the Options Bar. Verify the sizing 25 In the system you created. select Calculated Size Only. Next. under Mechanical . select the segment of duct shown. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Constraints.

This specifies the duct diameter. select Round Duct : Taps. 4 Click in the location shown to end the first segment of ductwork. For D:. ■ The cursor displays as a pencil. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 35 . click Duct. you create the main trunk line for the primary system and connect the 2 secondary systems. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. click near the door in the room to the left of the secondary systems. select 10' 0".rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select 12". 3 To start the duct run. Create the primary air duct 1 On the Design Bar. in the location shown by the pencil.Creating the Primary System Ductwork In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. For Offset. 5 Move the cursor past the rightmost VAV. and click to place the second segment of ductwork and end the run.

select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. Add an end cap Before you size the ductwork for a system. 7 If your trunk line does not match the above illustration and you want to draw it again. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .6 Press ESC twice to end the command. ■ ■ Click again to undo to first section of duct. do the following: ■ On the toolbar above the Options Bar. Draw the main trunk line again. 8 Type ZR. This determines airflow direction and ensures accurate duct sizing. and specify a zoom region at the end of the trunk line. The model is zoomed to the end of the duct. 10 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Design Bar. as described above. click (Undo) to undo the last segment of duct. click Duct Fitting. you must place end caps on all open ends of the ductwork except for the end that connects to the air source. The ductwork and the proper fittings are automatically created. 11 Place the cursor over the end of the duct to display an endpoint snap point.

click Modify to end the command. 17 On the Options Bar. you use the Connect Into tool to automatically draw the duct. 16 Select the leftmost VAV. (Connect Into). Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 37 . 14 On the Design Bar. First. 15 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. 18 In the Select Connector dialog. This connects the end cap to the ductwork. Connect one secondary system You will use 2 methods of drawing a duct from a VAV box to the trunk line. In addition to the graphic at the cursor. 20 Select the primary air duct.12 Press TAB until the point snap graphic shown below displays. 13 Click to place the end cap. closing the right end of the duct run. click 19 Click OK. the type of snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bat at the lower-left corner of the screen. select Connector 0 : Supply Air: Round : 8" Primary Air Connector.

you manually draw the connecting duct. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and zoom in on the rightmost VAV box. and click Draw Duct.Ductwork is automatically created to connect the VAV to the primary air flow supply with a tap connection. 23 Right-click the 8” inlet supply connector. 21 Type ZR. 22 Select the VAV box. Connect the other secondary system Next.

you add and connect the air handler for the primary system. select Air Handler : 10 ton. The ductwork is created with a tap connection. click Mechanical Equipment. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 39 . Adding the Primary System Equipment In this exercise.rvt. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. 2 In the Type Selector. Next. click Modify to end the command. you place an air handler and connect it to the main trunk line to complete the high pressure. 25 On the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor to the location shown.24 Click on the center of the primary duct in the location where the intersection snap (an X) displays. Do not click. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. primary system. 26 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Place the air handler 1 On the Design Bar.

6 Click to place the air handler. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. Do not click. Create a vertical section of duct 8 Move the cursor over an edge of the air handler to highlight it. 4 Press SPACE BAR as needed to rotate the air handler 90 degrees. 5 Move the air handler to the location shown. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .The cursor displays as the air handler outline.

and click Draw Duct. return. 10 Move the cursor over the 24" x 24" supply connector. The connectors on the front of the unit. and exhaust. intake. On the Options Bar. 11 Right-click the connector. click (Apply Current Offset). Under Offset. for the hydronic supply and return.9 Click to select the air handler. ■ Adding the Primary System Equipment | 41 . select Rectangular Duct/Radius Elbows Tees. These are the connectors for the air handler supply. The connectors on the top of the unit are displayed. are also visible. select 10' 0". 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector.

which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. 16 Close the 3D HVAC view. past the end of the primary duct. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. 18 Right-click the center point of the duct. The vertical section of duct you just created is visible. 15 Double-click 3D HVAC. Attach a rectangular duct 17 Select the vertical duct you just created.A vertical section of duct is created. 13 Press ESC. 14 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct. 19 Move the cursor to the right. and click. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

25 Select the air handler. The sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components. ■ 23 Select the air handler. 24 Press ESC. select the leftmost VAV box. 26 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options bar: ■ Click Click (Create Supply Air System). Adding the Primary System Equipment | 43 . and then select the rightmost VAV box.20 Press ESC twice to end the command. Create the main system logical connection 21 While pressing CTRL. (Select Equipment for System). click (Element Properties).

815 CFM. under Mechanical . click System Browser. The ducts are trimmed and connected with the proper fittings. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 36 Click OK. 28 Click in an empty part of the drawing area to clear the selection. click (Element Properties). Connect the ductwork 29 On the Tools toolbar located above the Options Bar. 34 Select the air handler.Airflow. 35 On the Options Bar.In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Select the 24" x 24" rectangular supply duct by clicking a point on the duct between the air handler and the primary trunk line. View the system components 38 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify to end the command. 30 On the Options Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. 32 Select the primary 12" round duct. notice that the value for SupplyAirFlow is 32. This is the capacity of the air handler. 37 Press ESC to clear the selection. verify that (Trim/Extend to Corner) is selected. under Mechanical . click (Trim/Extend). the value for SupplyAirFlow has been updated based upon the primary to supply ratio you specified in the element properties of the 2 VAV boxes.Airflow. 27 Click OK.

41 When you are done. You then add a legend to automatically color code the ductwork based on specific calculated values. click (System Inspect). expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. 2 Select a section of a secondary system. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. close the System Browser.The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. and the secondary system that was already in the model when you opened it. Inspect the completed supply air system 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Next. 3 On the Options Bar. you inspect the system and color code the ductwork. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model.rvt. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. expand Mechanical (3 systems). the secondary system that you created in an earlier exercise. 39 In the System Browser. and double-click 3D HVAC. you inspect part of the system you created. 40 Expand any Supply Air system to view its HVAC components. The browser displays 3 mechanical systems: the primary system that you just created. Inspecting and Color Coding the System | 45 . Inspecting and Color Coding the System In this exercise.

46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . the red arrows indicate critical flow path. 4 On the Design Bar. under Color Scheme. select Duct Color Fill .The selected system maintains its appearance. including flow. and pressure loss. 5 Move the cursor over a section of the system. The flow arrows indicate flow direction. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. Place a legend and color code the ductwork Color coding the ductwork provides a quick.Flow. the other systems are displayed in half tone. visual indication of a system’s air flow. static pressure. 8 On the Design Bar. The legend is added and the ductwork is automatically color coded based on the actual flow values. 7 Close the 3D HVAC view. 9 Click in the drawing area to place the legend to the left of the air handler. Delete the legend and remove color coding from the ductwork 12 Select the legend. 6 On the Design Bar. click Inspect. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Cancel Inspector. The inspection tag describes the section that is being inspected. 11 Click OK.

distribution systems. select none. under Schemes. Creating Lighting Circuits In this exercise. As you create circuits. (Delete) to delete the legend. Creating a Supply Air System. click 15 Click OK. junction boxes. and demand factors have been defined. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. and insulation type). and the color scheme is removed from the legend. . One circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on one side of a room in the model. Creating Electrical Systems | 47 . You then automatically balance the electrical loads on a panelboard. You use the System Browser to view the created circuits. you create the physical connections between the components: the wiring. 14 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. junction boxes. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. you create 2 lighting circuits using lighting fixtures. click No. Revit MEP ensures that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. temperature rating. Wiring types (including material. 16 On the Standard toolbar at the top of the window. power circuits. Electrical settings have already been specified for the model. The legend remains selected. click 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. The color is removed from the ductwork. and switches. the other circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on the other side of the room. Creating Electrical Systems In this lesson. and a 480V panelboard that have already been placed in the model. voltage definitions. receptacles.13 On the Options Bar. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. lighting fixtures. After creating the logical connections. including power panels. The model already contains the electrical components you use to create the systems. 18 When prompted to save the model.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll until the folder is displayed. Display the Electrical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. and click Electrical. click the Electrical tab. In this tutorial. you find the command at the far left of the screen. right-click the Design Bar. If necessary. 2 If the Electrical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. The Electrical commands are displayed.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

The entire model displays on the screen. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. In this tutorial. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. you can enter ZE to zoom out. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. Create a lighting circuit 7 Move the cursor over the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the large room in the model. Then. To zoom in and out. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. roll the wheel. The model zooms to the specified area.Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. To pan. hold the wheel down and drag. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. 4 Type ZR. Creating Lighting Circuits | 49 . The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.

11 While pressing CTRL. select the 2 lighting fixtures that are located immediately to the right of the previously selected 2 lighting fixtures. they display in red. The lighting fixture turns red. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 9 Move the cursor off the lighting fixture. 10 While pressing CTRL. indicating that they are selected. indicating that it has been selected. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected lighting fixtures. move the cursor over the lighting fixture below the selected lighting fixture.The lighting fixture highlights. 8 Click to select the lighting fixture. and click to select it.

which is the logical connection between the elements. (Select a Panel for the Circuit).12 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. 13 On the Options Bar. click 14 Select lighting panel LP-1. Creating Lighting Circuits | 51 . click (Create Power Circuit). The red sketch graphics show the created circuit. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 17 When you release the mouse button. Create a second lighting circuit 16 Place the cursor above and to the left of the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room.15 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. all the elements within the window are selected. and then drag diagonally to create a selection window that includes all 4 lighting fixtures as shown.

20 While pressing CTRL. which is the logical connection between the elements. click the junction box located among the lighting fixtures to select it. Click Check None. The sketch graphics show the created circuit. 22 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click (Create Power Circuit). click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). click 23 Select lighting panel LP-1. The lighting fixtures remain selected. Creating Lighting Circuits | 53 . 21 On the Options Bar. (Select a Panel for the Circuit).18 On the Options Bar. Select Lighting Fixtures.

26 Press TAB to display the circuit.The sketch graphics show the logical circuit with a home run. 24 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. you have created 2 lighting circuits. 25 Move the cursor over a lighting fixture in the leftmost circuit so that the lighting fixture highlights. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Modify a circuit At this point. The components include the 4 lighting fixtures and the junction box. Do not click.

click (Add To Circuit). 31 In the Power : 1 dialog. 29 In the Power : 1 dialog.The circuit includes 4 lighting fixtures. 30 Select the junction box located among the lighting fixtures. click Finish. Verify the modified circuit 32 Highlight the junction box in the circuit and press TAB. 28 On the Options Bar. 27 Click to select the highlighted circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits | 55 . click (Edit Circuit).

Next. The circuits become visible when the physical connections. close the System Browser. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. are created. Display the electrical systems The lighting circuits you created are called electrical systems in Revit MEP. click System Browser. At this point. and you can view the system components using the System Browser. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. the wiring. 34 Select lighting panel LP-1. expand Electrical (7 Systems) ➤ Power ➤ LP-1. 33 Move the cursor away from the circuit to remove the highlighting. 36 In the System Browser.The modified circuit is highlighted. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 38 When you are done. you assign switches to control the lighting fixtures. The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. 37 Expand the 2 circuits to view their electrical components. 35 On the Design Bar. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. You can display the logical connections using the TAB key. only the logical connections between the elements exist.

4 In the Switch System dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. (Select Switch).Creating Switch Systems In this exercise. All elements in the drawing except the selected lighting fixture display in halftone. Creating Switch Systems | 57 . 2 On the Options Bar. click 5 Select the switch as shown. and the 4 lighting fixtures on the right are controlled by another switch. you create switch systems to define switching behavior. Create a switch system 1 Select the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the room. The switches have already been placed in the model.rvt. The sketch graphics show the only currently selected component of the system. click (Create Switch System). The 4 lighting fixtures on the left of the room are controlled by one switch. click (Edit Switch System). i Express Workshop Electrical Systems.

the Number of Fixtures count on the Options Bar is updated. click (Switch Properties). click (Add to System). As you select each lighting fixture. The identifier A is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. The switch system highlights. for Switch ID. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Switch System (A) dialog. Assign an identifier to the switch 8 In the Switch System dialog. 13 Press TAB. Verify the switch system 12 Move the cursor over the switch to highlight it. select the 3 remaining lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. 6 In the Switch System dialog. under Electrical . and the lighting fixture displays in full tone in the drawing area.Lighting. 7 One by one. click Finish.The Options Bar displays the selected switch and the number of lighting fixtures currently selected (1). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. enter A. 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

Assign an identifier to the switch 22 In the Switch System dialog. for Switch ID.Lighting. click 21 Select the switch as shown. 25 In the Switch System (B) dialog. Create a second switch system 15 Drag to draw a selection window that includes the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. (Select Switch). Creating Switch Systems | 59 . click (Switch Properties). 24 Click OK. click (Create Switch System). under Electrical . Click OK. click 17 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). enter B. Click Check None. (Edit Switch System). The selection is filtered.14 Move the cursor away from the switch system to remove the highlighting. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The 4 lighting fixtures remain selected. 16 On the Options Bar. Select Lighting Fixtures. click 19 On the Options Bar. The identifier B is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. 18 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 20 In the Switch System dialog.

Tag the lighting fixtures 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add a tag to each lighting fixture that identifies its type and the switch that controls it. Tagging Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Then.rvt. so each side of the room requires a different lighting fixture type. you define the lighting fixture types for the room. The lighting fixture is labeled with an automatically generated tag. clear Leader. 3 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. click Tag ➤ By Category. you define lighting fixture types and tag the lighting fixtures. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. Next. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The lighting requirements for the left side of the room are different from the lighting requirements for the right side of the room.Verify the switch system 26 Move the cursor over the switch and press TAB to highlight the switch system.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new lighting fixture type 6 Select the upper-left lighting fixture.The bottom part of the tag displays the identifier (A) for the switch that controls the lighting fixture. 7 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Press ESC to clear the selection. click OK. under Identity Data. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog: ■ ■ Enter 2x4 3Lamp A. enter A. Click OK. 12 Click OK. 5 Press ESC to end the command. select the remaining 7 lighting fixtures in the room. for Type Mark. 4 One by one. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. The top part of the tag displays the identifier for the lighting fixture type. The selected lighting fixtures are tagged. click Duplicate. which you have not yet defined. click Edit/New. select (Element Properties). Tagging Lighting Fixtures | 61 .

Change the type for some lighting fixtures 15 On the Tools toolbar. The 4 selected lighting fixtures are changed to the specified type. 18 Press ESC twice to end the command. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp A) is automatically updated to display type mark A. 20 On the Options Bar. For each lighting fixture.The top part of the tag for the lighting fixture with the new type (Troffer Corner Insert . click (Match Type). The cursor displays as an eyedropper. select the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. 16 Select the lighting fixture shown to specify the lighting fixture type to be matched.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp B. Change the type for the remaining lighting fixtures 19 While pressing CTRL. in the Type Selector. 17 Select the other 3 lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. the type is changed. select Troffer Corner Insert . and the tag is updated. and their tags are automatically updated.

You then connect the 2 circuits to create a multi-circuit home run.rvt. on the Annotation Categories tab. Create a power circuit with wiring 1 While holding down CTRL.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. Creating Power Circuits | 63 . Next. The lighting fixture tags are no longer displayed in the model. 24 Clear Lighting Fixture Tags. 23 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. One circuit connects 2 electrical receptacles in a small room. while the other connects the 8 receptacles in the adjoining large room. select the 2 receptacles in the small room. you create electrical circuits with wiring. Turn off the tags 22 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. scroll to Lighting Fixture Tags. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you use electrical receptacles and a 208 volt panelboard that have already been placed in the model to create 2 electrical circuits with arc type wiring. Creating Power Circuits In this exercise. 25 Click OK. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems.

(Select a Panel for the Circuit). click (Create Power Circuit). click 4 Select power panel PP-1. The sketch graphics show the created circuit home run. The sketch graphics show the logical created circuit.2 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom to Region command. View conductor information 7 Type ZR. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. 6 Press ESC to clear the selection. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. click as shown to create arc type wiring.5 In the drawing area near the created circuit. You can also specify the zoom region by clicking in one corner and dragging to the other corner. Creating Power Circuits | 65 . 8 Click to specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the zoom region shown.

verify the number of conductors of each type (hot. Create a second circuit with wiring 15 In the large room. 14 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. 10 On the Options Bar.Loads. under Electrical . and ground). 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. neutral.9 Select the wire shown. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to clear the selection. select the receptacle as shown. click (Element Properties). The tick marks indicate the number of conductors (3) for the wire.

(Select a Panel for the Circuit). for a total of 8 receptacles. select the remaining receptacles in the large room. click (Create Power Circuit). The sketch graphics show the circuit and home run. Creating Power Circuits | 67 .16 While pressing CTRL. 18 On the Options Bar. click 19 Select power panel PP-1. 17 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the circuit.

68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .20 In the drawing area near the created circuit. The single arrow at the end of the home run wire indicates a single-circuit home run. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. click as shown to create arc type wiring.

and click Delete.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. 23 Right-click. Creating Power Circuits | 69 . The wire is deleted. Rewire a circuit 22 Select the home run wire for the small circuit. and zoom in on the region shown. click Wire. The cursor displays as a pencil with arc type wiring. 24 Type ZR. 25 On the Design Bar.

but the point snap graphic is not displayed. If the cursor is positioned as shown. click to place the end of the wire. If the cursor is positioned as shown. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . but the point snap graphic is not displayed.26 Move the cursor to the location shown. press TAB until the graphic displays. 28 Move the cursor to the location shown. 27 With the point snap graphic displayed. the displayed snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bar at the lower-left corner of the screen. In addition to the graphic in the drawing. click to place the end of the wire. 29 With the point snap graphic displayed. The cursor is correctly positioned when the point snap graphic displays. press TAB until the graphic displays.

click Modify to end the command. Creating Power Circuits | 71 . 34 Highlight a wire in the small circuit as shown. 30 On the Design Bar.The two circuits are automatically connected. The 2 arrows on the large circuit home run indicate that it is now a multi-circuit home run. select Leader. 33 On the Options Bar. creating a multi-circuit home run. Tag the wires 32 On the Design Bar. The wires in the circuit have been automatically resized to accommodate the demand created by the new multi-circuit home run. click Tag ➤ By Category. View the multi-circuit home run 31 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view.

35 Click to place the label. 2 On the Options Bar. 36 Highlight a wire in the large circuit as shown. 3 In the Project Browser. Next. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. 38 On the Design Bar. you view the panel schedule report for panelboard PP-1 and balance the electrical loads on this panel. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . scroll down as needed. you balance the electrical loads on panelboard PP-1. The Panel Schedule Report view opens. and expand Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Modify to end the command. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. click (Panel Schedule Report). Balancing Electrical Loads In this exercise. 37 Click to place the label. PP-1 is highlighted to show that it is the currently displayed view.rvt.The temporary label shows the circuit the circuit number (5) and the power panel name (PP-1). The temporary label shows the 2 circuits (5 and 6) and the power panel name (PP-1). View the panel schedule report 1 Select power panel PP-1.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. are shown. Balancing Electrical Loads | 73 . All the circuits connected to the panel are listed. and the circuit structure is automatically reorganized. 12 Click OK. A. click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. B. under Panel Schedule. 10 On the Options Bar. (Edit Circuits on Panel). 8 Close the Panel Schedule Report view. click Rebalance Loads. click Edit. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. under Other. and the current loads on phases. for Appearance on Sheet. The loads are balanced across each phase.4 In the Project Browser. Balance the loads on the panel 9 Select power panel PP-1. 6 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog. click OK. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. and C. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. right-click PP-1. click The Edit Circuits dialog displays. and click Properties.

You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Electrical Systems. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.The reorganized circuit structure is reflected in the wire labels. click No. 14 When prompted to save the model. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

Developing Your MEP Designs 75 .

76 .

you will understand the process. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded.Mechanical Systems 3 In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you plan the system by first placing spaces in the building. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. However. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. and contain information about the locations in which they are placed. After finishing each exercise. you first carefully plan the system. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spacial environment. you design a mechanical system for an office building. as most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. As you create the mechanical system. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you create a plenum level and place various types of spaces. By following the recommended workflow. In this exercise. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2009. you perform a heating and cooling load analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. In this lesson. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.autodesk. This system consists of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. 77 . If the tutorial datasets are not present. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. Then. After applying a color scheme to the zones. as with any design project. go to http://www. This information is used for heating and cooling load analysis. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. First. you can choose to save your work. you place spaces in the areas of the building model. At the end of this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you configure the linked architectural model. Planning Mechanical Systems To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. methodology.

The level 1 floor plan of the linked model displays. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. Open the i Spaces. 6 In the Project Browser. and after the linked model highlights. you add a level for plenums. In this section.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. These components are defined in the architectural dataset. Configure the linked model The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and double-click East . expand Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 4 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE When working with a linked file. The linked model is configured. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 1 Mech. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Edit/New. and click Element Properties.Mech. right-click. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. This makes the architectural components (such as walls and floors) room-bounding so that they are recognized as boundaries for spaces. and that the ceiling is defined as non room-bounding. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design bar. The Status Bar located below the Design Bar and a tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. make certain that the roof is defined as room-bounding. Next. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to achieve an accurate heating and cooling load analysis. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels to place spaces in the plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor) of the building. select Room Bounding. The elevation view opens. 78 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. click the Training Files icon. not in the MEP dataset.

In the View Range dialog. Scroll down to the Extents category. Placing Spaces | 79 . A new plenum floor plan view named Level 7 is created. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. enter an Offset of 1' 0" For Bottom. and its listed in the Project Browser under Mechanical ➤ ???. verify that Level : Plenum is selected. click Yes. and enter an Offset value of 0 0. If asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Click Plan View Types. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Draw) is selected. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. Under View Depth. and press ENTER. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. For Cut plane. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK twice. ■ 10 Draw a plenum level 8' 6" above Level 1. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Edit for View Range. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. enter Level 1 Plenum for View Name. 11 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. right-click Level 7. 8 In the Type Selector. verify that 0' 0" is specified. Under Identity Data. and click OK. for Top. for Level. For Offset. and in the Plan View Types dialog clear Ceiling Plan.7 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Level Above (Level 2). click Level.

18 On the Options Bar. New indicates that a new space is being placed. double-click 1 . The Space box contains all unplaced spaces (spaces that were placed in unbounded areas). and maximize the window. 17 Verify that Space Tag is selected in the Type Selector. 15 Use the mouse scroll wheel. Place a space in an office area and in an open area 13 In the Project Browser. For Upper Limit. verify that New is selected. For Offset. the 1 . Verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. and zoom the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building. click Space. This action specifies the vertical extent of the space. The Space tool is also on MEP-specific Design Bar tabs. Verify that Leader is cleared. under Floor Plans.Mech. If Close Hidden Windows is unavailable. 80 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the level is renamed in the elevation view. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. In the Space box. ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 Place the cursor in the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. 14 Click Windows menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows to close the elevation view. select Level 1 Plenum. 16 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar.Mech view is not maximized or the elevation view was closed.The Level 1 Plenum floor plan is now listed under HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. enter 0' 0" .

Later in the exercise. 21 With the Space tool open. 22 Move the cursor to the large open area in the center of the floor plan. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area.20 Click to place the space. Only the space tag displays because the visibility for the interior fill and reference lines is not activated. and click Zoom to Fit. TIP You can also right-click in the drawing area. click to place a space as shown. Placing Spaces | 81 . you will separate the open space near the entrance and place a space there. You activate this visibility later in this exercise. Make certain that you place the space to the center-right of the open space as shown. and after the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

you rename the 2 spaces. A text box appears. 24 Zoom in on the space tag in the upper left hand corner office. Next.23 Click Modify. 82 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 25 Click the space tag name.

26 Double-click the space tag number. Color Fill displays space color fill when it is applied. Open 104. enter 101 in the text box. Interior. 28 With the view active. You apply color fill to spaces in a later exercise.Enter Office. you activate spaces visibility. enter VG on the keyboard. The Interior option displays space shading. Next. Placing Spaces | 83 . expand Spaces. and rename the space in the open area. and select Color Fill. The 2 spaces display in the floor plan view. 27 Repeat this method. and press ENTER. and click in the drawing area. 29 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. and Reference. 30 Click OK. Reference displays space reference lines (cross hairs).

Mech view active. and click Mechanical. you need to make this area fully-bounded by drawing space separation lines. 84 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . verify that 0' 0" is specified. and draw a zoom region around the upper-corner of the radius wall as shown. To place a space in the entrance area. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Draw). click Space Separation. right-click the Design Bar. For Offset. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Place a space in the entrance area You need to place a space in the area next to the building entrance becaue this entrance area will be heated and cooled more often than the rest of the open space. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. The entrance area is bound only by the radius wall—this area is considered semi-bounded. Chain. 31 With the 1 . enter ZR. and (Line) are selected.

and click to specify the end point for the second line segment. click Move to Space. 39 Move the cursor to the left 4' 0" (which is located over the lower-end of the radius wall). The space separation line created a new fully-bounded area within the large open area. The Draw tool remains open. Placing Spaces | 85 . 34 Place the cursor over the upper-corner of the radius wall. If the space and space tag are inside the new area. 40 Press ESC twice to close the Draw tool. If you see a warning that the space tag is outside of its space. and press ENTER to specify the end point for the first line segment. and type 4' 0" (notice the text entry box called a dimension listener that pops up). select the space (reference line) or the space tag. select and drag both of them. Notice that the Open 104 space adjusted its boundaries so that it is not in the new area. click to specify the end point for the last line segment. and click to specify the end point of the third line segment. 38 Draw the line down 32' 0".■ Verify that Radius is cleared. 37 Move the cursor to the right to draw a horizontal line 32' 0". and after the end point snap displays. and drag it to the larger open area. NOTE If the space or the space tag is inside the smaller area. 36 Draw the line up. and after the end point snap displays. 35 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom out the view. click to specify the start point for the first space separation line segment.

verify that Leader is cleared. right-click and click Element Properties. 86 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . and verify that New is slected in the Space box. spaces can be placed in them.NOTE Space separation lines are MEP-specific room-bounding lines that separate areas where a wall is not desired or not possible. Although room separation lines are recognized in Revit MEP. after the space reference lines highlight. For Name. After the areas are separated. you place a space in the entrance area. enter 0 0 for Offset. select Level 1 Plenum for Upper Limit. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. space separation lines are not recognized in Revit Architecture. 43 Place a space in the entrance area. Next. 45 Place the cursor over the space. under Identity Data. 44 Click Modify. enter 121. 42 On the Options Bar. 41 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. click Space. do the following: ■ ■ For Number. enter Entrance.

53 Rename the space. click Space. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. 57 Place the cursor in the plenum area. The plenum space displays in the floor plan view. 60 Click OK. under Floor Plans. 55 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 56 On the Options Bar. and enter 2 0 for Offset. Roof is specified for the upper limit because the chase area spans multiple levels and ends at the roof level. 59 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. The space is renamed Entrance 121. 52 Press Esc. double-click Level 1 Plenum. 49 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.47 Click OK. Place a space in a plenum area 54 In the Project Browser. and enter 0 0 for Offset. select Roof for Upper Limit. Chase 118. expand Spaces. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. 58 With the Level 1 Plenum view active. select Level 2 for Upper Limit. 51 Place a space in the chase area. Notice that the plenum space is not in the mechanical room or in the stairwell. and select Interior and Reference. Placing Spaces | 87 . click Space. Place a space in a chase area 48 Zoom in on the chase that is located to the right of the Mechanical room. and click to place a space. This is because the walls prevent space placement. The offset places the space 2 feet above the roof. 50 On the Options Bar.

you assign spaces to zones in the building. and verify the zones in the System Browser. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click the Training Files icon.Mech to make it the active view. click System Browser. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. you add spaces to zones in order to control the spacial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. close the file. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You can click Reference under Spaces on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display space reference lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. Zones allow you to control the spacial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. that action removes the space from the Default zone. click File menu ➤ Save. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. Otherwise.61 If you want to save your work. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. In the next exercise. 88 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . enter Spaces Training for File name. However. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You used space separation lines to create a new fully-bounded area that was part of a larger area. 62 In the Save As dialog. Open the i Zones. and click Save. and double-click 1 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. When you add a space to a zone. In this exercise. Creating Zones After spaces are placed in the building. NOTE After finishing each exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. you modified the spaces visibility for the views. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you can choose to save your work. navigate to the folder of your choice. Finally.

and a new zone is created. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The Zone tool opens. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 3 Right-click in Systems Browser. verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. Next. the Zone toolbar displays. and modify the zone properties. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Assign a zone to spaces on the same level 5 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. and click View ➤ Zones. The title bar displays the name of the new zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. After a space is placed in an area. 7 In the drawing area. place the cursor on Office 101 located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space highlights. you assign spaces to a zone.NOTE You can also press F9 (with the drawing area active) or click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. Creating Zones | 89 . click Zone. You work with one zone until you click Finish. Using the Zone toolbar. As you do this. 6 On the Zone toolbar. This removes the space from the Default zone. This is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. NOTE The Zone toolbar provides zone tools and information.

click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. Notice that the zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.8 Click the space to add it to the zone. 14 Expand the 1 . you need to activate the zone visibility which you do next. In the System Browser. add the Office 102 and Office 103 spaces to the zone. expand HVAC Zones. The new zone displays. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. enter VG. 90 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .West Offices zone in the System Browser to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 10 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. for Name enter 1 . To view the zone in the drawing area. 9 With the drawing area active.West Offices. 11 With the Zone toolbar open. 12 On the Zone toolbar. Next. The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. you rename the zone. click (Zone Properties). and click OK. under Identity Data. expand the new zone and notice that the Office 101 space is added to it and removed from the Default zone. and click OK.

and double-click Level 1 Plenum to open the view. 25 With the Zone toolbar open. and click OK. Creating Zones | 91 . Assign a zone for spaces on different levels 16 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Zone toolbar. click Finish. you activate zones visibility for the view. 21 Zoom in on each floor plan.15 On the Zone toolbar. 24 On the 1 . click in the Level 1 Plenum view to make it active. click Zone. 20 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. 17 With the drawing area active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. enter VG. 27 On the Zone toolbar. 22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Finish. expand HVAC Zones. 26 Add the L1 Plenum 122 space to the zone.Mech to make it the active view. verify that ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. Next.Mech floor plan. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. add the following level 1 spaces to the zone: Open 104 Men’s Room 105 Mech/Elec 106 Ladies Room 107. 19 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan: 1 .

Next. The Zone tool opens. enter 1 . However. you cannot open the Zone tool as this will create a new zone. you edit the zone to rename it. and click OK. TIP You can also access zone properties by right-clicking the zone in the System Browser. click Edit Zone. 30 On the Zone toolbar. click (Zone Properties). 92 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 28 In either view. 31 In the Element Properties dialog.Open Offices. 29 On the Options Bar. for Name. under Identity Data. select the reference line to the zone that you created. Notice that the Zone toolbar displays the name of the zone that you are editing.You need to rename the zone. and click Properties.

Conference Room 2 . 119.Open Offices 2 . Elec/Mech 206. Elec/Mech 106. In this exercise. 212 Lounge 208. L1 Plenum 122 Offices 115. navigate to the folder of your choice. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and Creating Zones | 93 .Open Offices zone in the System Browser to view the 5 spaces in it.North Offices 2 . 110 Open 104. Otherwise. close the file. 213 Conference 214 Offices 210.Open Offices 1 .East Offices 1 . Spaces Offices 111.West Offices Chases 34 If you want to save your work. You can expand the 1 . 120 Zones 1 .Entrance 1 . Make certain that you verify the spaces in the floor plan views and in the System Browser If you prefer not to continue with this practice. click Finish.West Offices Stairwells 2 . 109. You activated zone visibility in the views. 116. Men’s Room 105. 203 Chases 118. 32 On the Zone toolbar. Ladies’ Room 107. 117 Offices 101.East Offices 2 .South Offices 2 .South Offices 1 . 102. 113 Entrance 121 Offices 108. 112. and click Save. L2 Plenum 217 Offices 215. 202. use the methods that you learned and assign zones for all the spaces in the building. 211. proceed to the next step. enter Zones Training for File name. Complete the zones for the building 33 For additional practice.The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. Office 209 Open 204. you assigned zones to the spaces that were on the same level and on different levels of the building. 35 In the Save As dialog. Ladies Room 207. 216 Offices 201.North Offices 1 . click File menu ➤ Save. The table below lists all spaces and the zones. 103 Stairwells 114. Men’s Room 205. All zones will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise.

Verify that Schema 1 is selected for Color Scheme. The zones are also listed in the System Browser. NOTE All zone reference lines and shading have been hidden in this dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Mech to make it the active view. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.in the System Browser. you assign a color scheme to these zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. You can click Reference Lines and Interior Fill under HVAC Zones on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display zone reference lines and shading. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. Apply the color scheme 5 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected. right-click the Design Bar. and click to place the legend. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select HVAC Zones for Space Type. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. you apply a color scheme to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. 94 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Click OK. The color scheme is applied to the zones in the 1 . click the Training Files icon. Open the i Zone Color Scheme. In the next exercise. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Color Scheme Legend. and double-click 1 . A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using space schedules or accessing element properties. 6 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Drafting.Mech view.

9 If you want to save your work.Mech. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Office is specified for Building Type. and zone information. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and view the loads report. and Level 2 Plenum floor plan views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you verify the building.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 2 In the Element Properties dialog under Energy Analysis. Specify Project Settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Open the i Energy Analysis. Level 1 Plenum. navigate to the folder of your choice. NH for City. select Manchester. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 95 . In the next exercise. use the method that you learned and add a color scheme for the zones on the 2 . click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. and on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click Save. enter Zone Color Scheme Training for File name. ■ Click for Location. and view the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 10 In the Save As dialog.8 For additional practice. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. All color schemes will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. enter 03101. click the Training Files icon. For Postal Code. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. In this exercise. click Edit for Energy Data. If you prefer not to continue with this practice. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis In this exercise. proceed to the next step. space. You then perform a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.

Verify area and volume setting 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that VAV . 7 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). Verify that <Building> is specified for Building Construction. NH is selected. A preview pane displays the model and 2 tabs contain heating and cooling information for the building. Verify that Shading surfaces is selected. You have verified the building information. (Building ■ ■ For Building Service (Default Space Service). For Building Construction. under Energy Analysis.Single Duct is selected. click Heating and Cooling Loads. Verify building information 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Verify that New Construction is selected for Project Phase. verify that Manchester. After opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. Next. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. verify that Office is selected. Verify that 1' 0" is specified for Sliver Space Tolerance. Then. 96 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Click OK twice. verify that VAV . click Edit for Energy Data.Single Duct is specified for Building Service. 5 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. if you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. select Level 1. For Ground Plane. and do the following: ■ ■ For Building Type. Default Space Construction. For Place and Location. verify that <Building> is selected. you need to select this option. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). and click OK.

and select Office 111. 10 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). The Spaces and Zones tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. verify that Wireframe is selected (default setting). The analytical volume is bounded by the center plane of walls and the top plane of roofs and floors. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 97 . 11 Expand the 1 . 12 Click (Highlight). 13 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. click the Spaces/Zones tab. and zoom the model to better view the space. The Highlight tool allows you to verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. while pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel.View a space 8 In the preview pane. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. NOTE Wireframe displays the analytical volume of a space. TIP You can use the View Cube mouse to spin. pan. 9 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. spin the model as shown.East Offices zone. Next. you isolate a space. The space for Office 111 highlights in red.

18 Next. select Office 111. highlight and isolate the space for Office 111 to view its inner volume. the space information displays for the selected space. roofs. 15 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. you view the volume of the space differently. floors. you verify space information. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces that normally would be obstructed by other spaces or by the architecture which would normally make it difficult to view. 17 Using the methods that you learned. 16 On the View Selector . Below the list of spaces and zones. click (Isolate). Office 111. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. and other room-bounding components. This space information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. Next. click Shading. 98 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .14 With Office 111 selected. Verify space information 19 On the Spaces/Zones tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space.

use the (Highlight) and volume of the spaces in the selected zone.East Offices. and dehumidification set point. and clicking Element Properties. This specifies the cooling set point. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. ■ ■ View a zone and zone information 21 On the View Selector . This zone information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the spaces in the zone.00 °F : N/A for Cooling Information.00 °F : 90. click Wireframe.East Offices zone: ■ ■ <Building> is specified for Service Type. respectively. This specified the number of people or the area per person for the space. N/A : N/A : N/A is specified for Outdoor Air Information. Next.East Offices. Revit MEP stores this space and zone information as space and zone properties. 70. (Isolate) tools to view the analytical 24 Click (Shading). View other spaces and zones 27 Using the methods that you learned. 25 Click 1 . outdoor air per area. This specifies the heating set point. The space and zone information is located under Energy Analysis in the Element Properties dialog. verify the following space information: ■ <Building> is specified for Space Type and Construction Type. select 1 . 23 As you did earlier. the zone information displays for the selected zone. including Office 111. and humidification set point.20 Under the list of spaces and zones. and repeat the above steps to view the inner volumes of the spaces in the 1 -East Offices zone. This specifies the outdoor air per person. Below the list of spaces and zones. right-clicking. <Default> is specified for People Data. 22 On the Spaces/Zones tab. and verify the space and zone information. Lighting Loads: <Default> : Power Loads: <Default> is specified for Electrical Data. 26 Verify the following zone information for the 1 . 1 . view other spaces and zones in the building model. ■ ■ IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains space and zone information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis.East Offices. and air changes per hour.00 °F : N/A for Heating Information. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 99 . heating air temperature. This displays the analytical volume of the spaces in the selected zone. You can also access the space and zone information by selecting a space or zone in the drawing area or System Browser.00 °F : 54. cooling air temperature. 74. You can also click (Zone Properties) on the Zone toolbar to access the zone information. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. you verify the zone information. This zone contains 3 spaces.

For example. space. 29 Review the loads report. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. and zone information for the building model. Revit MEP performs a heating and cooling loads analysis using the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool that was developed in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. NOTE If you select multiple spaces or zones that contain different information. that information does not display. or make any changes to the model. close the file. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. pan. if 2 spaces are selected each having different people data.You may need to spin. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. or by pressing SHIFT to select a range of spaces or zones. click File menu ➤ Save. You must have IES <VE> installed. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 28 On the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. weather. This product is not included with Revit MEP. the People Data option becomes blank. Otherwise. or zone information. navigate to the folder of your choice. 31 In the Save As dialog. In the next lesson. 100 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. or zoom the view to see the selected space or zone. space. click Calculate. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. and click Save. space. you verified building. building. TIP You can select multiple spaces or zones by pressing CTRL and selecting them. In this exercise. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and space information to the IES <Virtual Environment> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. space. 30 If you want to save your work. and a loads report displays. Now that the project. or import the IES model that has already been created. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. and zone information. and zone information has been verified. Various factors are analyzed including analytical and inner volumes of the spaces. You then performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. you can perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. this report includes project.

After system creation. adding AC units. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Open the i Air Terminals. sizing ductwork. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties).Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. and click View Properties. As you place the air terminals. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. You can also select the 1 . Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. you will create supply air systems. In this lesson. Then. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. modify air terminal parameters. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you create new views. 101 . and then you validate your air system design. Modify a ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. After completing the air systems lesson. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and double-click 1 . You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes.Mechanical Systems:Air 4 Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process.

do the following: ■ ■ Select Level 1 for Underlay. ■ ■ TIP When entering a value. 5 In the View Range dialog. and enter 8' 7" for Offset. select Supply Diffuser . click Air Terminal. and enter 8 7 for Offset. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. for the Level parameter. for the Cut plane parameter. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. 102 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 10 On the Options bar.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. separate the value with a space. 11 Click to place the supply air terminal in the upper left office as shown. NOTE The ceiling hosts the diffuser.3 In the Element Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. 9 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. make sure that Place on Face is selected. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. For example. Under View Depth. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". enter 0 for Offset.Ceiling Mech is the active view. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . Under Primary Range. 6 Click OK twice. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. under Graphics. for the Top parameter. You specify 8' 7" so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 8' 6") and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level.

14 On the Options Bar. the command in progress terminates. TIP When you click Modify. click Modify. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 13 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. You can also press Esc to accomplish this result. you may have to move it to center it -. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. and then click Modify. Since snaps are not available here. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. enter 300 CFM for Flow.12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 101 air terminal selected. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar.use the arrow keys for fine movement control. Move the diffuser so that it fits squarely inside a ceiling tile. Placing Air Terminals | 103 . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). 17 Move the air terminal to the location shown. 19 On the Options Bar. TIP To use the Move tool. and then click the midpoint of the Office 102 and then of the Office 103 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. then select Multiple. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. click to specify the move start point.

Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. Notice that after you specify the copy start point. listening dimensions display to aid placement. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. 104 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. click Air Terminal.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display midpoint snaps only. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). 22 In the Type Selector. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. select Exhaust Diffuser .

25 Using the same placement method. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 250 CFM. Placing Air Terminals | 105 .Before you copy the exhaust diffuser. place 3 return air terminals in the open space to the left of the restrooms. 24 In the Type Selector.Hosted: Workplane-based Return Diffuser. and specify a 325 CFM airflow for each of them. select Return Diffuser .

106 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . under Mechanical. and click Element Properties.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. clear the UpArrow check box. right-click. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 101 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. click Modify.

do the following for level 2: ■ Make 2 . click on the Edit toolbar. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. 30 Select the Office 101 air terminal. 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1.Ceiling Mech the active view. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. continue laying out the level 1 supply system. create the level 2 supply system. After you place the supply air terminals. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing.Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. Placing Air Terminals | 107 . Optional: Create the level 2 air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process.

108 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . More importantly. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. and click Save. 33 If you want to save your work. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. and learned a method for precise placement. and 250 CFM airflow for the exhaust diffusers. In this exercise. modified the air terminal parameters. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. 34 In the Save As dialog.■ In the Element Properties dialog. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. specify the same view parameters as 1 . ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You will be using different views to design the systems. you create the air systems. click the Training Files icon. Specify 325 CFM airflow for the supply and return diffusers. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. click File menu ➤ Save.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. In the next exercise. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser.

■ ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Flow. Select Air Flow for Type. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 109 . Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with spaces. Create a calculated value parameter 9 Click Calculated Value. 10 In the Calculated Value dialog. 5 Under Select available fields from. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Formula is selected. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. click Schedule/Quantities.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. 6 While pressing Ctrl. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow Space: Name Space: Number 7 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. under Available fields. 4 Add Mark and System Type. do the following: ■ Under Category. select Space. Click OK. select Air Terminals. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Actual Calculated Airflow for Name. select the field and click Remove.■ Open the i Air System Schedules. Select HVAC for Discipline. 8 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Number Space: Name Mark System Type Flow Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field.

■ ■ The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what rooms do not meet the design requirements as they are red in the schedule. On the Filter tab. Click OK twice. in the Fields list. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Space: Number for Sort by. Select Footer. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Click the Background Color and select Red in the Color dialog. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. and Itemize every instance is selected. 11 Click OK. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. equals. 13 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. select Actual Calculated Airflow. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Actual Calculated Airflow is selected for Field. Enter -35 CFM and 35 CFM for Value. Select Blank line. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use.Space: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. and click Conditional Format. 110 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. Organize the data 14 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Use the schedule as a design tool 15 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. The red values in the Actual Calculated Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room does not yet meet the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 CFM. Next. Click OK. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and Count and totals. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. Format the calculated value parameter 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.■ Use the button on the right to enter Space: Actual Supply Airflow . select System Type for Filter by. and select Supply Air. The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Select Not Between for Test. Verify that Ascending is selected.

click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. Tagging an Air Diffuser 21 Select Tag from the Mechanical tab on the Design bar.This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. TIP Editing diffuser tags in schedules. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. 20 Delete 300 CFM enter 250. click Leader to clear this option. the selected air terminal displays in red. 16 In the Project Browser. 18 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. double-click 1 Mech to make it the active view. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. speeds the design process. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. rather than one by one in a drawing. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. select the 300 CFM Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 101 air terminal. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If a different project is also open. 24 Click on a diffuser to add a tag. 22 Select By Category. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. and draw a zoom region around Office 101 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. 23 On the Options bar. 19 In the schedule. and press Tab. Optional: Modifying Other Parameters The drawing for the next exercise provides completed values. 17 Enter ZR. 25 Modify the other supply air terminal Flow parameters for both floors so that the airflow design requirements are met. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 111 . These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. The Actual Calculated Airflow value displays in white indicating that it now complies with the Office 101 airflow design requirements.

You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. This is the power of BIM. Unlike logical connections. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. navigate to the folder of your choice. and double-click 1 . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. all Actual Calculated Airflow parameters display in white. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. After creating the logical connection. click Edit for View Range. and then create the logical connection between the system components. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. During this exercise. enter an Offset value of 10 0. and click Save. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 28 In the Save As dialog. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing.Mech floor plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. click File menu ➤ Save. under Extents. and maximize the 1 . In the next exercise. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. After you modify the airflow parameters. and click View Properties. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. you are changing the air terminal connector size. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. Under Primary Range.NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. 26 Close the schedule view. 27 If you want to save your work. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. 4 In the View Range dialog. for the Top parameter. 112 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Open the i Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. enter Using Schedules Training for File name.Mech to make it the active view. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create air systems. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. In this exercise. However. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.

each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. uncheck Air Terminal tags. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and click OK. This assignment occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. As you assign diffusers to systems.5 Click OK twice. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. enter ZR. 7 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides window. after you placed the diffusers. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. right-click the title and select View ➤ Systems. if all system components are assigned. Explore the System Browser 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and sketch a zoom region around Office 101 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. So. If the System Browser does not respond. For now. Thus. air terminals. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 10 Expand the Unassigned systems folder.Mech view. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 113 . The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. click in the drawing area to make it active. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. 9 If the System Browser title says Zones. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. then press F9. click System Browser. 6 Type VG on the keyboard. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 11 With the view active. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 .

Modify VAV box parameters 15 Right-click the VAV box. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. This VAV box services only Office 101 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. Click OK. click (Create Supply Air System). 13 In the Type Selector. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 18 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. click Mechanical Equipment. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Select Equipment for System). You created a system that includes the air terminal. you add the VAV to this system. If desired. Note that the VAV will detect the downstream airflow when connected to diffusers. system specific tools display on the Options Bar. select VAV Unit . Next.TIP Although this view does not contain room tags.Parallel Fan Powered : Size 3 . 19 On the Options Bar. enter 9 6 for Offset. ■ The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). 114 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and select the VAV box. 14 Move the cursor to the right of the office door. and click Element Properties. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 17 Select the Office 101 rectangular diffuser. click to place the VAV box. do the following: ■ Under Constraints. and press Esc twice.8 inch Inlet. 12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). place the cursor over the Office 101 air terminal and press Tab. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path.Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 115 . select an air terminal that you added to the system. This display indicates that the new system is selected. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. and click Select to select the system. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. The organization is from upstream. They remain assign to their respective default systems. and cleared from the Options Bar. Create the ductwork 20 With the new system selected. and select the system. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned.

25 Under System Type: Supply Air. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. select Branch. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . Enter 9' 6" for Offset. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. select Main. do the following: 22 ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Verify that 6' 0" is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 116 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 21 On the Options Bar. click Finish Layout. 29 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 Under System Type: Supply Air.Round for Flex Duct Type. ■ Click (Next Solution). The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. For more information. 24 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog.The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. click Settings. 26 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Notice that Solutions is selected. refer to Help. 28 Click OK. and select solution 2.

For example. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. thus it is not part of the system. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. On the View Control Bar. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Change the geometry display 30 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. as was the elbow itself. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 117 . For example. Check duct connectivity 31 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. select Coarse detail level for single line. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. select Medium for Detail Level. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. and press Tab twice.

the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Under Constraints. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab.08 in-wg/100ft. under Sizing Method. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Verify that Only is selected. 118 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The first time you press Tab. ■ The Office 101 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . Click OK. click Sizing. Size the duct 32 Place the cursor over the duct. and enter . Rerouting usually correct this issue. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. 34 In the Duct Sizing dialog. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. and equipment. fittings. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. then you know that a disconnection exists. and click to select them. 33 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. If the entire network does not highlight.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 119 .8 inch Inlet. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. 40 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 102 door. enter ZR. and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 35 With the VAV selected. and click Element Properties. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Note that the airflow is set to 250 CFM . 39 In the Type Selector.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. 38 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. the required airflow for the space and the airflow assigned to the diffusers.IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 41 In the left column of the System Browser. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 102 and 103 (the offices immediately below Office 101). press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. click Mechanical Equipment. click to place the VAV box. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 37 Click in the drawing area. double-click the second VAV box listed. 36 Click Cancel. right-click and select Element Properties. select VAV Unit .

and click Select from the context menu. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. right-click. a new system is immediately created. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. and number of elements in the active being edited. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. system equipment. If not. 120 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. 44 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. NOTE After you select a system component. 46 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. right-click the component in the left column. 43 Select the Office 102 rectangular diffuser. The component highlights in the drawing area. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. under Constraints.IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. and click OK. 45 Click (Edit System). click Add To System. 47 Place the cursor over the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. enter 9' 6" for Offset. TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. This system includes the selected system component(s). the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

On the Options Bar. click (Select Equipment). The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. 51 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 102. 52 Select the VAV box.48 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 49 Select the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 121 . Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. 50 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. the number of elements has increased to 2.

122 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click Finish. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. 54 Place your cursor over the Office 102 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system.On the Options Bar. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. The system displays in red. 55 Click to select the system. If you leave the mouse stationary. 53 On the Edit System toolbar.

You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. and select solution 3. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 123 . 58 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. 59 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. 57 On the Options Bar. click Finish Layout. click Layout Path.Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 56 On the Options Bar. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed.

and after the end point snap displays. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. click Duct Fitting. If a warning occurs. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. 63 Move the cursor over the end of the main. 124 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. or modify the duct manually. So. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. 62 In the Type Selector. You can either relocate the VAV box. Add an endcap 60 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 102. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system.The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. This was the reason for the warning message. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. IMPORTANT When creating layouts. click to place the endcap. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. 61 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you can review it and take action if necessary.

■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 125 . 66 Click Cancel. Verify that Only is selected. 68 On the Options Bar. 65 With the VAV selected. 64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. Click OK. under Sizing Method. Under Constraints. Size the duct 67 Place the cursor over the duct. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.08 in-wg/100ft. and enter . right-click and select Element Properties. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. 69 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Notice the airflow value of 530 CFM. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Do not highlight or select the VAV box.Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. and click to select them. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. click Sizing.

and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and press Tab twice. Check duct connectivity 70 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. 126 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . air terminals.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 102 and 103 is sized using the Friction method at . The VAV box.

Mech view. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space). Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 127 . However. 74 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . 75 In the Type Selector. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 76 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. click Mechanical Equipment. and click to place the VAV box. select VAV Unit. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. 73 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. 72 In the 1 .Next. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it.8 inch Inlet. Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 71 Right-click in the drawing area.

select the 4 air terminals above and to the right of the VAV. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. click (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. The selected diffusers highlight in red (shown here as circled). click (Create Air Supply System). You will add this later. 79 In the Element Properties dialog. 80 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. 81 On the Options Bar. The new supply air system displays in red. 78 Select the VAV.77 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 128 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . under Constraints. and click again to deselect the VAV. enter 9' 6" for Offset.

and the red system display cleared. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. You have logically connected the air system components. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. The system displays in red and now includes the VAV.The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. and select solution 1. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. ■ 86 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Next. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 129 . The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. 85 On the Options Bar. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. Then. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click (Select Equipment for System). Click . 82 On the Options Bar. 83 Select the VAV to add it to the system. and press TAB once to highlight the system. click to select the system. click Modify. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 84 With the system selected. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path.

notice that drag controls display. 130 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and then snap and move down the right section of the main to create a straight main to the VAV. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. 90 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. After you select the branch. 89 Repeat this procedure and move the connection to the upper right branch.87 In the drawing area. 88 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the branch to the right until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. click Finish Layout. select the left section of the branch. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout.

and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. Next. and (Edit) on the Options Bar. click Finish. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. select a system component that is already part of a system. 93 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. click Add to System. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 91 Select the main duct. VAV. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. Notice that on the Options Bar. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. 92 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. 96 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 131 . you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. 94 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. The system components are now physically connected. the Number of Elements increased to 5. Then. A change has occurred in the air system design. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). This number verifies the added diffuser. mechanical equipment. 95 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection.The ductwork is created. The new system component is now part of the same system. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier.

101 On the Options Bar. Now that the duct work is in place. Click . select the flex duct and the transition on the diffuser. 132 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 98 With the duct work selected. 100 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. you need to check that all the parts are connected. and select solution 1. and working from the end of the main. click Finish Layout. ■ 102 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and press Tab twice. right-click and select Delete to remove the unwanted duct work. 99 Zoom out the view.97 While pressing CTRL. The new ductwork is created. Check duct connectivity 103 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.

and click to select them. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Verify that Only is selected.08 in-wg/100ft. and enter . 106 In the Duct Sizing dialog. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. click Sizing. Click OK. The selection displays in red. under Sizing Method. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. Under Constraints.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Size the duct 104 Place the cursor over the main duct. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 133 . 105 On the Options Bar. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout.

If you receive errors. modify the layout. If you receive errors.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. So. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. Next. 108 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. see the note below. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Reposition and rotate if necessary. under Mechanical. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at 0. Optional: Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems (See the next exercise for a completed drawing. You can either relocate the VAV box. or reinsert duct fittings. ■ ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct.) 107 In the Project Browser. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. see the note below. Verify that all Other options are cleared. modify the duct manually. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. 134 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. Do not change the duct conversion settings. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit .This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . double-click 1 .

Verify that all Other options are cleared.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. 110 On the Annotations tab of the Visibility Graphics window. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . specify the air terminal airflow. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . Next.The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 10' 0" and the Detail Level to Medium. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. see the note above. turn off Air Terminal tags. If you receive errors. Size the duct using the Friction method at 0. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. see the note above. If you receive errors. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 135 . specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow.Mech mechanical floor plan view. Optional: Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 109 Use the 2 . Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Do not change the duct conversion settings. For VAV airflow. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing.

In the next exercise. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. checked duct connectivity. and validated the systems in the System Browser. After creating each system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. click the Training Files icon. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. In this exercise. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. click File menu ➤ Save. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. 113 In the Save As dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 136 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . navigate to the folder of your choice. You also specified VAV airflow.The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. and double-click 1 . 112 If you want to save your work. 1 In the Project Browser. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. sized the ductwork. and click Save.Mech to make it the active view. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. Open the i Using Views for Duct Validation. Although you already checked duct connectivity.

and sketch a zoom region around Offices 101 103. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. After you add the section. and click OK. click the section. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 137 . you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. The selected section displays in red. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click Section 1. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 101 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. and click Properties. The first click specifies the section head. and click Zoom to Fit. enter ZR. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. 8 In the drawing area. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. click Section. and the second click specifies the section tail. 6 In the Project Browser. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. The section relocates under HVAC. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 103 air terminal to set the end point. under Graphics.

click Modify. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. The section head displays in blue. The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 102 and 103.You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. select Medium for Detail Level. 138 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. 10 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the View Control Bar. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. select Section Box.14 Continue to validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. under Extents. and click OK. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. 17 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. A section box displays around the building model. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 139 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. Notice that in the 3D view.

26 If you want to save your work. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. 21 In the drawing area. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. click File menu ➤ Save. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 24 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that you can verify that the Office 101. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls.NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. 22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. 140 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 102. and 103 duct geometry is as you expected. 25 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be.

2 Enter ZR. do the following. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. In the next exercise. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the approximate location shown. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space.Mech to make it the active view.27 In the Save As dialog. 4 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ Verify that 12" is selected for diameter (D:). enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and click to specify the start point. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. navigate to the folder of your choice. 5 On the Options Bar. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. select Round Duct : Taps. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duct. and double-click 1 . In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. Open the i Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 141 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts.

9 Click on the VAV.7 Draw duct as shown in the following image. 142 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you can select individual segments and use the arrow keys to adjust location. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 101. and click Draw Duct. After placing the duct. right-click on the air connection. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 8 Enter ZR.

TIP When drawing duct. 12 Move the cursor down and draw an approximate 8' 0" vertical second duct segment.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. and click or press Enter to specify the end point. When drawing duct. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. and click to specify the end point. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 143 . If you pause briefly. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 8" VAV primary connector diameter. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. 10 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. 11 Draw the first duct segment 2' 0" to the right.

TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. 144 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy.13 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. After you click to specify the end point. the duct run connecting the Office 101 VAV to the primary is complete. 14 With the Draw tool open. and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 102.

17 Connect the other three VAVs to the primary duct as shown. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 15 Place the cursor over the Office 102 VAV box supply air connection. and after the connector snap displays. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. 18 Using the draw duct methods that you learned.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. Check connectivity 19 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 145 . 16 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. click to specify the start point. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. On the View Control Bar. zoom the view to the right of the primary.

but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. 20 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D views. 22 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. On the Options Bar. You will size the primary in a later exercise.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. Check connectivity. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. Do not size the primary. and Angle is cleared. 146 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. specify a 9' 6" offset. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time.) 21 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. Optional: Complete the level 1 primary duct (See next exercise for a completed drawing. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you will do that in a later exercise. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. Finally.

■ ■ Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 147 . On the Options Bar. Check connectivity. Do not size the primary. You will size the primary in a later exercise. and double-click 2 . 24 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps.Mech to make it the active view. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. Optional: Draw the level 2 primary duct 23 In the Project Browser.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". and Angle is cleared. specify a 9' 6" offset.

The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Save. 26 In the Save As dialog. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes. but you have yet to size the primary. In this exercise. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. In the next exercise.Velocity. In this exercise. 148 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This determines the airflow direction. click File menu ➤ Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. However. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. While drawing duct. Before sizing the primary. 25 If you want to save your work. click the Training Files icon. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. Open the i Duct Sizing . You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork.

click Duct Fitting. right-click the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. and click Mechanical. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. and after the end point snap displays.Mech to make it the active view. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click 1 . select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 149 . click to place the endcap. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located near the wall between Offices 117 and 116. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

click Sizing. under Sizing Method. ■ 150 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The selected primary displays in red. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Verify that Only is selected. Click OK. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. and enter 2500 FPM. Under Constraints. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and click to select it. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.

You can either relocate the VAV box. and press TAB twice. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run.The sized left primary is shown below. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. Next. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 151 . or reinsert duct fittings. modify the layout. modify the duct manually. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 117. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. So. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly.

As in level 1.13 Using the process that you just learned. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. The sized right primary is shown below. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. 14 Using the method you have learned. the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit.) 15 In the Project Browser. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. and double-click 2 . and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. Optional: Size the level 2 primary duct run (See the next exercise for a completed dawing. 152 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run.Mech to make it the active view.

and click Save. In the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. 19 If you want to save your work. Open the i Duct Color Scheme. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. First. you sized the primary duct for the building.Mech Duct Classes for Name. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. 2 In the Project Browser. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Then. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method.Mech. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. Like room color scheme. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below.Mech is created and becomes the active view. enter 1 .Velocity Training for File name. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 153 . click File menu ➤ Save. navigate to the folder of your choice.Mech. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . enter Duct Sizing . 20 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click 1 . you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. right-click Copy of 1 .

Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical. 5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.

Next, you change the color scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. Select By range. In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 2000 FPM. In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter high velocity for the second row. In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.

154 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Click OK.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 15 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. Using the same color scheme allows you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 155

18 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. In the next exercise, you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method
In 2 previous exercises, you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. In this exercise, you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. First, you split the duct main into multiple pieces, and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally, you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder. TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).

156 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

3 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All. Every supply air system that you created is listed. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number, such as Mechanical Supply Air 6, and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system, such as a VAV box and diffusers. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3, and click Show. The 1 - Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system, and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. 5 In the Show Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To accomplish this reduction, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. Split the main

6 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Split).

7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. 8 Watch the listening dimensions, and split the main about 11' 0" from the end of the main.

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the right of the second branch as shown.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 157

10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

12 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:
■ ■

Select Equal Friction, and enter 0.08 in-wg/100ft. Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Click OK.

IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.

158 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 15 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader. Click Tags.

16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag. TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. 20 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Equal Friction Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First, you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 159

sizes. In the next exercise, you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.

Inspecting Air Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.

You will inspect this system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, select

(Inspect).

The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

160 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected, but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected to this system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment.

Inspecting Air Systems | 161

10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. 16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.

Placing Air Conditioning Units
In this exercise, you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units.

162 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new roof plan view 1 Click the View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 2 Select Roof and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Roof. 4 Right-click Roof, and click Rename. 5 Enter Roof Mech for Name, and click OK. 6 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. Ignore the warning about the name changing. 7 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. 9 Under Extents, click Edit for View Range and select Level 2 for View Depth: Level. Click OK twice. 10 Change the Graphics Style to Wireframe. 11 Set the Detail Level to Medium. This action specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2 12 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. 13 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 14 In the Type Selector, select Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 163

15 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room, and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 16 Place the unit in the approximate location shown below.

17 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.

Next, you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. Create a new section view 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 20 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 203 VAV box, and click to specify the section start point.

21 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.

164 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 22 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 24 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 25 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle.

The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. 26 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 27 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Medium for Detail Level. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. You may need to adjust the top border to see all of the AC unit.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 165

29 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface.

NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must relocate it.

30 Select the AC unit, and click

(Move) on the Edit toolbar.

31 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the move start point.

32 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface, (1' 0" directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.

166 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

This specifies the AC unit offset level of 1' 0" which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.

TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. Place the level 1 AC unit 33 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures (see the next exercise for approximate locations):

Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. TIP You can copy the first AC unit you placed. Copying eliminates the elevation adjustment. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.

34 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 35 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing AC Units Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 167

Completing the Supply Air Systems
In this exercise, you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. First, you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then, you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify the 3D view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click {3D} to make the view active. 2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

The entire building including the AC units display.

If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. 3 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that it displays as shown below.

168 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. Tile the views 4 With the 3D view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 5 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. 6 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 7 Zoom the view in both windows as shown.

You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 9 In the Type Selector, select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 10 In the Roof Mech view, place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection, the connector snap displays.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 169

11 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 12 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Enter 68" for W: (width), and 20" for H: (height). This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Enter -2 6 for Offset, and press Tab.

■ ■

The -2' 6" offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system, 9' 6". Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 13 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 3' 6" and press Enter to specify the end point.

The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 9' 6" from level 2, and then the duct continues horizontally for 3' 6".

Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 14 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

170 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.

16 Close the Roof Mech view. You now switch to the 2 - Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 17 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 18 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views, and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 - Mech view. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar, change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.

Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 - Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 171

19 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 20 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining elbow. The selected items display in red. 21 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow.

22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 23 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps. 24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter), select 9". Verify that Auto connect is selected. For Offset, verify that 9' 6" is specified.

25 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify the start point.

172 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

click to specify the end point. 28 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 173 . The left primary is connected to the AC unit. 27 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.26 Move the cursor over the primary. and after the centerline snap displays.

Mech view. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. 174 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 30 In the 2 .Next. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. 32 Drag the connector down and to the right. 29 Spin the 3D view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment. and place the cursor over the end connector. 31 Select the right primary duct.

draw a horizontal run and connect it to the midpoint snap of the riser . Completing the Supply Air Systems | 175 . right-click and select Draw Duct.33 Select the right primary duct. 37 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. 34 Draw a short run of duct with a downward 30 degree angle and click to set the endpoint. 35 With the draw tool still active. 36 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw Duct tool.

select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. Add endcaps 39 In the 2 . 40 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. zoom in on the duct riser. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. click Duct Fitting. 176 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Mech view. Check connectivity 38 In the 2 . place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.Mech view.You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. However. you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. 41 In the Type Selector.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 177 . after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays.. 42 Place your cursor over the top edge.Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. 43 With the Duct Fitting tool open. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. click to add the endcap. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. 44 In the Type Selector.

178 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 46 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. and then validate its geometry. 49 Using the 2 views. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap.45 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. click to add the endcap. Verify endcap placement 47 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. 48 In the 3D view. verify the duct riser endcap.

You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D view. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. 51 With the 2 views tiled. click in the 2 . 54 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. Create the high pressure supply air system. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. click Check None. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. and then select Mechanical Equipment. 52 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner.50 Press Tab to check connectivity. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of Completing the Supply Air Systems | 179 .Mech view to make it active. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. Next. 53 On the Options Bar.

only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. In this case. You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. 180 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Mech view range.the current view are selected. 55 On the Options Bar. However. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the selected VAV boxes to it. 58 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. all system components must be logically connected by a system. or even without ductwork. 57 Click the 3D view title bar to make the window active. 56 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. and select the level 2 AC unit. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector.

expand Mechanical. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. 69 Make the 3D view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 181 . the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. 68 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. click Inspect. 66 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. click Inspect. and click Select. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. 61 Expand Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton .Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 25 system listing. 67 Click a blank space in the 2 . right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25.Mech drawing area to make the view active. 63 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. 62 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 25 to view the VAV boxes. 65 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. you inspect the system. This is the system that you just created. In the Unassigned folder. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. and click Inspect. Inspect the primary supply air system 64 In the System Browser. diffuser. Next. duct fitting. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment.Validate the primary supply air system 59 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 60 In the System Browser. Supply Air. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. The System Inspector tool opens. The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child).

182 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Click the supply connector.70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D view. ■ ■ This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. 71 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. 9' 6". and enter 3' 6". and a 20" height. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 68" width. Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air system 72 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. move the cursor down. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. Next. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. Specify the offset to -14' 6". complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view.

Watch for the centerline snap as shown. release the mouse button. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. and tile it to the left of the 3D view.Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view.Mech view. select the left primary duct segment. ■ ■ Connect the primary to the AC. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser.Mech view (if open). The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. Instead of drawing duct. and after the edge highlights. select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 183 . and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct.Mech view. In the 1 . open the 1 .

The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it.Mech view. ■ 184 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and remember to zoom the view. Validate the system using the System Browser. Use Tab to check duct connectivity. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D view. ■ In the 1 . and inspect the system with the System Inspector. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. ■ ■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. Use Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard.

enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. you need to validate them. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project.The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. As you view the warnings. click the Training Files icon. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and validated these logical connections. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. Open the i Checking Air Systems. 74 In the Save As dialog. and for duct sizing. navigate to the folder of your choice. Revit MEP lists the system components Checking Air Systems | 185 . In this exercise. Using tiled windows. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and quickly target those systems that need attention. In this exercise. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. and click Save. click Check Duct Systems. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. 73 If you want to save your work. click File menu ➤ Save. you check the systems in your project.

that are associated with each warning. 186 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. and for duct sizing. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. as a tutorial exercise. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. For example. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. However. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. Then. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). After you assign the system components to a system. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. thus assigning the components to a system. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. the duct is now associated with that system. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. So. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. In the System Browser. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components.

You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. 11 In the Save As dialog. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder.The red lines represent the default logical connection. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. and click Select to view it and its assigned system components. otherwise click Close. navigate to the folder of your choice. 6 Using the same methods. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. click File menu ➤ Save. TIP If you have multiple views open. 10 If you want to save your work. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. In this exercise. Depending on your air systems design. and click Save. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. 8 Right-click Supply Air. Checking Air Systems | 187 . You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. You now confirm the systems that you created. 9 Right-click a system. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. In the next lesson. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system.

188 .

you create new views in which to design the piping system. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. click the Training Files icon.Mech. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. In this lesson. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. and inspecting the piping system. circulator pump. placing a circulator pump. A new view called Copy of 2 .Mech is created and becomes the active view. After completing the air systems lesson. a boiler. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. First. pipes. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. Open the i Creating Piping Views. and the systems to logically connect the system components. you create hydronic piping systems.Mechanical Systems: Piping 5 Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. 189 . right-click 2 . You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. Then.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler.

do the following: ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Edit for View Range. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. just separate the value with a space. The 2 . or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. scroll down to the Extents category. you do not need to type measurement symbols. and click OK. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. click view properties. 8 Click OK twice.Piping for Name. TIP When entering a value. For Bottom. 190 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . for Level. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. and enter -11 6 for Offset. Under View Depth. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". you change the view range. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. enter 2 .Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Also notice that 2 . This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. Enter -3 1 for Cut plane Offset. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . and enter -11' 6" for Offset. and click Rename.Piping view selected in the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. right-click Copy of 2 . Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems.2 In the Project Browser. 7 In the View Range dialog.Mech. For example. Next.

however. 10 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. 14 Under Categories. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. click in the drawing area to make the view active. under Filters. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. you can add and activate filters. and click OK. 11 Click Edit/New.You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. Next. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. type name. click 13 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. it will be best to create filters. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). click the Filters tab. 12 In the Filters dialog. Considering this. So. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. you may want to select each component type separately. On the Filters tab. Create and define filters 9 In the 2 . such as family name. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. Select VAV Unit . and enter VG. and verify that equals is selected. Depending on the filter criteria. Click Apply. In this lesson. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. system type. However. or even a description that you define. select Mechanical Equipment. they will not filter all system elements needed. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. However. To do this. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. the system filters are not used. you need a define common filter criteria. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views.Parallel Fan Powered for the family name. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. 15 Under Filter Rules. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. Creating Piping Views | 191 . (New). the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria.Piping view. Verify that none is selected for And. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type.

26 Click Apply. you will not see the Description type parameter. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. Because you already entered the description. By selecting each air terminal type separately. then the type parameters will not display. Next. For Type. 192 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click Edit/New. select Supply Diffuser . NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. and select Air Terminal. This is the same rule for using formulae.16 In the Filters dialog. This action adds a description for all Exhaust Diffuser air terminals. and verify that equals is selected. and click OK. So. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. .Hosted. Next. click 17 Enter Air Terminals for Name. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. otherwise the filter will not work. if differences exist in the selected elements. 31 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. 21 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Remember to click Apply. 18 Under Categories. under Filters. Remember. This is because the selected supply. 30 Click OK twice. click Air Terminal. click in the Value column for Description. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. return. you can select it. you continue to create and define the filters. 22 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. 19 Under Filter Rules. return. and enter VG. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. 28 Under Identity Data. and click OK twice. under Identity Data. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. enter Air Terminal for Description. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. select Exhaust Diffuser Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. you must spell both verbatim. click Air Terminals. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). 20 Enter Air Terminal for the description. click (Properties). 32 Click in the 2 . 25 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type.Piping view to make it active. you create a description as the common filter criteria. select Description for Filter by. and click Apply. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. 29 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the Return air diffusers. select Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. Next.

Category: Ducts. verify that equals is selected. click the Filters tab. Filter by: System Type. Round Ducts. If you did not click Apply. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. select all of the filters that you created. This is because you have not added them. And: Type Name.Duct Fittings.Supply and Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. you need to define the filter again. verify that equals is selected.33 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. create the following new filters according to the specifications. you activate the filters. click Edit/New. Category: Duct Fittings. and select Round Duct for the family name. verify that equals is selected. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. Category: Ducts. Filter by: Family Name. Filter by: Family Name. To filter multiple duct fitting types. 38 In the Add Filters dialog. 39 Under Visibility. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. So. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. and click OK. So. Filter by: Family Name. you filter duct fittings by system type. you add and activate the filters. Filter by: Family Name. verify that equals is selected. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. 34 On the Filters tab. Creating Piping Views | 193 . and select Rectangular Duct for the family name.Round. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. You used this duct to create the duct riser. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. ■ ■ ■ ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. and enter Supply Air for system type name. 40 Click OK twice. verify that equals is selected. 35 Using the methods that you just learned. Add and activate filters 37 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Category: Flex Ducts. you need a common filter criteria. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. Flex Ducts . 36 Click OK. you specify a family and a type name. Category: Ducts. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. clear all check boxes except for Mechanical . Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. Next. verify that equals is selected. click Add. verify that equals is selected. Next. And: Type Name. Next.

The 10 foot top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except 194 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 47 In the View Range dialog. right-click 1 . Create the level 1 piping view 41 In the Project Browser. A new view called Copy of 1 . 43 Enter 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Mech. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. The 1 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. 42 In the Project Browser. Next. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. and click Rename. under Graphics. 48 Click OK twice. and click Edit for View Range. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. right-click Copy of 1 . verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 10' 0" is specified for Top Offset. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline.Mech is created and becomes the active view. and click OK. and click View Properties. scroll down to the Extents category. Next. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. you change the view range.Piping for Name. You now define the view properties. 44 Right-click in the drawing area. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance.Piping view.Piping view displays the new view settings.All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline.Mech. under Primary Range. Unlike the 2 .

You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. Create the 3D Piping view 49 In the Project Browser. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog.for the boiler pipe connection). and fin-tub radiators from displaying. you will want to validate the geometry. If you turn off ducts visibility. and click OK. and click Rename. 52 Right-click in the drawing area. under Extents. you will be unable to view the duct riser. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Creating Piping Views | 195 . You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. under Graphics. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. and click View Properties. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. select all of the filters that you created. clear Section Box to turn it off. right-click 3D. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 51 Enter 3D Piping for Name. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. As you create the pipe runs. 59 In the Element Properties dialog. and to create the level 1 piping system. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. 55 On the Filters tab. click Add. 58 Click OK. 50 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 56 In the Add Filters dialog. You used this duct to create the duct riser. Next. click the Filters tab. such as halftone architecture. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. ducts. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. 57 Under Visibility.

select Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : 1" NPT. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. click File menu ➤ Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. You also created filters to display certain system components. 62 In the Save As dialog.60 Click OK. right-click the Design Bar. In the next exercise. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. 196 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The duct risers and AC units display in the view. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise. click Mechanical Equipment. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. you place the radiators and a boiler. and double-click 2 . you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 6 Zoom in on Office 201 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. 61 If you want to save your work. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 4 In the Type Selector. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Piping. Open the i Placing Radiators and Boiler. click the Training Files icon. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. and click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar.Piping to make it the active view.

Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 197 . and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. except for the windows on the radius wall. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown.7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. and notice that the connectors display. To place the radiator precisely under the window. 8 Click to place the radiator. select it and use the arrow keys to move it into position.

If the same type of component exists on another level. then these are different across the selected objects. click (Element Properties). The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. 14 Enter 4 for Flow. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 4 GPM for all fin-tube radiators in the building. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. and you do not want to include it. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. 13 In the resulting dialog. All level 2 radiators display in red. and click OK. double-click 1 . 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. for Flow. 198 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator.Piping to make this the active view. you modify the radiator flow rate. and click Select All Instances. under Mechanical Loads. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. If parameters are blank. drag the section tail. Next. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. you place the boiler. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. right-click a radiator. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. If so. verify that 20 GPM is specified for all of the selected radiators. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. 12 On the Options Bar. Next. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser.

18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. you verify the boiler flow rate. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. click Mechanical Equipment. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 199 .16 Enter ZR. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and select Boiler : Standard from the Type Selector. Notice that the connectors display after you place the boiler. Next. and click to place the boiler approximately as shown. watch the listening dimensions.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. you create the supply and return piping systems. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. right-click the boiler. 24 In the Save As dialog.20 In the drawing area. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. verify that 230 GPM is set for Max Flow. In this exercise. and double-click 2 . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. In the next exercise. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. click File menu ➤ Save. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. analyses cannot be performed. click in the drawing area to make it active. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. Open the i Creating Piping Systems. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. 1 In the Project Browser. Unlike logical connections (systems). It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. 22 Click OK. under Type Parameters. During this exercise. then press F9. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. After creating the logical connection. 200 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and click Save. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and click Element Properties. 23 If you want to save your work. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. If the System Browser does not respond.Piping to make it the active view. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. and then create the logical connection between these system components. click the Training Files icon. navigate to the folder of your choice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. click System Browser.

So. after you placed the radiators and boiler. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. All level 2 radiators display in red. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. 7 On the Options Bar. click it to the supply system. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. and click Select All Instances. As you assign radiators to systems. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. Thus. (Select Equipment for System). right-click. 6 On the Options Bar.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. if all system components are assigned. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. and select the boiler to assign Creating the Piping Systems | 201 . Notice that after you click .

202 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler.TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. Next. Thus. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. This display indicates that the new system is selected. Notice that you can select only valid system components. and click Select to select the system. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. press Tab. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. you create the return piping system. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. and select the system. The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. all other components are unavailable. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. The organization is from upstream. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays.

Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. 11 The return system displays in red. (Select Equipment for System). So. Notice that (Create Hydronic Supply System) does not display because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. and cleared from the Options Bar. expand Piping. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. right-click. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). Creating the Piping Systems | 203 . 13 Right-click each category. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. These listings represent the systems that you just created. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools.Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. 9 On the Options Bar. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. and select the boiler to assign TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. click it to the return system.

18 In the Save As dialog. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. 17 If you want to save your work. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. In a later exercise. and click Select. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. 204 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. in the next exercise. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. click File menu ➤ Save. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. and double-click 2 . Now that you logically connected the piping system components. 1 In the Project Browser. Open the i Creating Pipe Runs.Piping to make it the active view. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. navigate to the folder of your choice. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Save.15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. or even without pipe being drawn. In this exercise.

the boiler. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. Then. and then select Mechanical Equipment. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Notice that the radiators. Creating Pipe Runs | 205 . This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . and click OK. click Check None.Piping view range highlight.Piping view). press Tab to highlight the system and select it. 3 On the Options Bar. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. you can place the cursor over a radiator. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.Notice that all components that are in the 2 . you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 4 In the Filter dialog. click Layout Path. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. 5 On the Options Bar.

You can select each system in the dialog to view it. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 8 On the Options Bar. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. ■ Click (Next Solution). ■ Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. Enter 1 0 for Inset. select Hydronic Supply 1 and click OK. You will need to select a system to create the layout. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. ■ 206 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 7 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. It does not reference the architecture. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. verify that Solutions is selected.IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). then the Select a System dialog will open. and select solution 4 of 4. 6 In the Select a System dialog. The system displays in red. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools.

click Settings. 10 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you now modify the layout path. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). 13 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. 12 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. Enter -1 3 for Offset. structural beams.The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. For more information. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. and other obstacles. 14 Click OK. duct. Creating Pipe Runs | 207 . This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 10' 9" in the level 1 plenum space. refer to Help. you create the supply pipe run 1 foot from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). Using this inset. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Next. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. Later in this exercise. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that Main is selected. 11 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. Enter -1' 3" for Offset. or architecture. select Branch.

Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 15 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 17 Using the drag control. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. zoom the view. The layout path is located under the radiators. 16 In the drawing area. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as the layout path. A drag control displays. 208 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click Modify. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall.

TIP Use the Ctrl key to select both the main and the branch line. click Finish Layout. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. Ignore the no auto-route solution warning.18 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings Creating Pipe Runs | 209 . 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

or manually modify the pipe. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.are automatically inserted. or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. 210 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . select a different layout solution. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. and is not part of the system. Either relocate the system components. Change the geometry display 20 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 201. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. For example. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection.

Creating Pipe Runs | 211 . select Fine for Detail Level. This is caused by the hidden line setting. To turn off hidden lines. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). 21 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. If a pipe is hidden by an object. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. 22 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. In the Mechanical Settings dialog.Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry.

or Fine for 2-line pipe display. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. So. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. Modify the pipe run 23 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. Instead of moving the pipe. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. On the View Control Bar. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 1 inch diameter. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. Medium for 2-line duct display. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. Additionally. Next.TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. 212 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. 24 Place the cursor over the pipe. and click to select them. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. The design requires 2 zones. 25 Press Delete to delete the selection. select Coarse for single line display.

or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. 30 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. the diameter Creating Pipe Runs | 213 . 26 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 27 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). the logical connection (or system) is still intact. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. width. and click to select it. and click Modify on the Design Bar. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. The diameter of the main and branches change to 1 inch.Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. 28 On the Options Bar. If the pipes had different diameters. 29 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. select 1" for D: (diameter). you modify the supply pipe run diameter. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 1" indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. Next.

The first time you press Tab. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab.would not display. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. Check connectivity 31 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and equipment. Next. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. If the entire network does not highlight. 32 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. fittings. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. 214 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . then you know that a disconnect exists. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. press Tab 3 times.

you create the return pipe run. For pipe conversion settings. This allows you to better see disconnects. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. Select Perimeter solution 4. Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. you can click to select them. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Next. 33 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. Enter 2' 0" for Inset.Piping view. Creating Pipe Runs | 215 . Create the level 2 return pipe run 34 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. and enter -1' 9" for both the main and branch offsets. This places the pipes at a 10' 3" elevation in the level 1 plenum space.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system.

Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. click File menu ➤ Save. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. and click Save. 216 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 36 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 1". Remember.■ In the Layout Path tool. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. 35 If you want to save your work. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The level 2 return pipe run is as shown.

In the next exercise. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. converted fittings.In this exercise. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.Piping to make it the active view. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 2 . Open the i Resolving Pipe Interference. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. In this exercise. You checked connectivity. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Resolving Pipe Interference | 217 . corrected disconnects.

Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom in Region. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell and click to specify the section head location. After you add the section.Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. and the second click specifies the section tail. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. 5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. The first click specifies the section head. click Section. 218 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell.A new section view named Section 3 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Resolving Pipe Interference | 219 .

right-click Section 3. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). similar to the level heads in the elevation view. under Graphics. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. and click OK. 11 On the View Control Bar. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 3 view.The section head and tail display. select Piping for Sub Discipline. 220 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. 8 In the Project Browser. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. select Fine for Detail Level. and click Properties. The section relocates under Piping. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. and after the connectors display. and other aspects of your systems design. place the cursor over the top connector. mechanical equipment placement. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell.Piping to make it the active view. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. These connectors connect to the tee fittings. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. Next. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. Resolving Pipe Interference | 221 .The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run.

The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. click (Split). 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to the area outside the stairwell as shown. 19 Zoom out. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. Next. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. and after the fitting end point snap displays. always connect to pipe segments. If you split the pipe. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. you split the supply pipe segment. 222 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. release the mouse button to reconnect it. and select the return pipe segment again. 21 On the Edit toolbar. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. and click to split the pipe approximately as shown. NOTE When modifying pipe. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. fittings.

Next. you convert a tee fitting. 26 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. 25 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. Zoom out the view. 24 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. and press Delete to delete it. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. Resolving Pipe Interference | 223 . and draw the pipe around the stairs. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting.

On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. and move the cursor to the left. not vertical. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 33 Zoom out the view. 32 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. 31 In the Type Selector. and then click Modify. 224 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . right-click and select Delete. 29 Select the elbow and click on the upper plus (+) sign to convert the elbow to a tee.27 Select the tee. orientation. and then select the two adjacent pipes to add an elbow. The new tee has a horizontal. 28 Select Trim. 30 Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. and after the end point connector snap displays.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 225 . and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. click to specify the segment end point. click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. 35 Draw the pipe down. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. NOTE When drawing pipe. 36 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right.34 Draw the pipe 12’ 0" to the left outside the stairwell. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. and after the connector snap displays. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment.

The return pipe run is connected as shown. 226 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 37 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 38 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. 39 Right-click the lower connector.

draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. However. use the arrow keys to move pipes to the exact location required. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector.This activates the Draw tool. If necessary. or width and height. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. 41 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. The amount of movement that these keys provide depends upon the zoom factor. 40 In the Type Selector. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. 43 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. the pipe diameter. Resolving Pipe Interference | 227 . verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. The section displays in red. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. Optional: Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 42 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building).

48 Zoom in on the stairwell. 46 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. watch the listening dimensions. 52 Using the methods that you learned. 49 On the Edit toolbar. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section.Piping to make it the active view. 45 On the View Control Bar. click (Split).Although this section was used for air systems. 47 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . 50 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 51 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 5' 0" from its left connector. and double-click the section head to open the section view. you may get a false positive result. and split the supply pipe at 12' 0" from its left connector. 228 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Otherwise. select Fine for Detail Level. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. 44 Press ESC.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 229 . Remember to watch for connector snaps. 53 Again.You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. using the methods that you learned. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown.

In the next exercise. (2) Connect to a snap. the pipe type is also matched. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. 230 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. Remember that after you create pipe. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you used the Split. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. 56 In the Save As dialog. Open the i Connecting Boiler. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. and offset are automatically specified. 55 If you want to save your work. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). the start point. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). diameter (or width and height). and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar.rvtfile located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. click File menu ➤ Save. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise.54 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using these 2 methods. preferably a connector snap. click the Training Files icon. Then. In this exercise. and click Save. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. 1 In the Project Browser. Draw. Using Create Similar. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference.

Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. Connecting the Boiler | 231 . the active view is the only open window. the active view is tiled to the left. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.Piping to make it the active view. 3 In the Project Browser. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Note that if this option is unavailable.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. You will design in the 2 . You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs.Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. TIP When tiling 2 views. and double-click 2 .

and click to specify the pipe segment end point at approximately 1' 6" from the boiler connection. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 7 feet from level 1. 10 In the Type Selector. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.8 Zoom in on the boiler. 14 Move the cursor to the left. Enter -5 0 for Offset. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. watch the listening dimensions. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. click Pipe. and after the connector snap displays. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. 232 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active.) to separate snap increments. after listening dimensions display. 15 Draw the pipe up to 3’ 0". You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. Connecting the Boiler | 233 . you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. In a later exercise. 16 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the end point. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. 10' 9" from level 1. zoom the view and try again. TIP When drawing pipe. enter -1 3 for Offset.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser.

17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. click to specify the pipe segment end point. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The boiler supply connector pipe is created. and after the connector snap displays. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. 234 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. release the mouse button to connect to it.

Connecting the Boiler | 235 . 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected.The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 26 Use the selection tool to draw a box around the tee to select it. 24 With the windows tiled. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run. 236 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .Next. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler. 27 Click on the lower of the two plus (+) signs to convert the elbow to a horizontal tee.

and after listening dimensions display. enter 3 0 and press Enter. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected.28 In the 3D Piping view.Piping view to make it active. Verify that -5' 0" is specified for Offset. 32 On the Options Bar. 30 Zoom in on the tee. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 34 Draw the pipe up. and the start point is automatically specified. 33 Draw the pipe 2' 0" to the right and click to specify the segment end point. The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. right-click the right connector. Connecting the Boiler | 237 . 29 Click in the 2 . select the tee to display the connectors. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. 31 In the Type Selector.

This creates a 1 foot pipe segment. 38 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. enter -1 3 for Offset. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. 36 With the Draw tool activated. 37 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. 238 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . connect the right supply pipe run. 35 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. In a later exercise. click to specify the end point. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run.

39 Check connectivity. 40 Validate the pipe geometry. Connecting the Boiler | 239 .The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler.

click the specify the end point. and click Draw Pipe. 46 On the Options Bar. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. Optional: Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 41 With the windows tiled. 47 Draw the pipe to the left. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and enter 0 4 and press Enter.Piping the active view. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. 240 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and that Auto Connect is selected. Next. enter -1 9 for Offset. and the 2 . verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter). zoom in on the boiler. This places the return connection 10 inches above level 1. 42 Select the boiler. you draw a 6 inch pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. 43 In the Type Selector. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -11' -2" from level 2. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 10' 3" from level 1.Next. 45 Move the cursor up. 44 On the Options Bar. and right-click the return connector.

and after the connector snap displays. click to connect to the left return pipe run.48 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. Connecting the Boiler | 241 .

53 Draw the pipe 1' 0" to the right. 49 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. right-click the right connector. 50 Zoom in on the boiler. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls.The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. 242 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. and click to specify the end point. 52 Select the tee fitting. 51 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. and click Draw Pipe.

click to specify the end point. Connecting the Boiler | 243 .54 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.

Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 57 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. 244 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 56 Click Modify on the Design Bar.55 Using the method that you learned. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe.

click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. If the Tools toolbar is not available. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. in the 2 . Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes.Piping view.58 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. click (Align). 61 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. 60 On the Tools toolbar. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. select the reference point where you want to align. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. Next. and after highlights. First. 59 With the 2 . and then you select the point to align.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. click to specify the alignment reference point. Connecting the Boiler | 245 .

246 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. and after the centerline highlights. click to specify the point to align. 62 Move the cursor over the left return pipe.

The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

63 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.

64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.

Connecting the Boiler | 247

The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also are parametrically adjusted. This situation results because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that you aligned.

65 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

66 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

248 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. 67 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 68 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods
You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Next, you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 249

The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

3 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 2.50 FT/100ft. Select And, and enter 8 FPS for Velocity. Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is cleared. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. Click OK.

The sized pipe runs are sized. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.

250 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.

8 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Save As dialog, enter Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 251

Placing Circulator Pumps
In this exercise, you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. 7 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).

8 Watch the listening dimensions, and make 2 splits on the left pipe 0' 3" from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.

252 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector, select In-line Circulator : Standard. 14 Place the cursor between the pipe openings and click to place the circulator pump. 15 Select the pump and click Rotate on the toolbar. 16 Flip the pump so that the motor is on the left. 17 Click Align on the toolbar and select the middle of the pipe above and the middle of the circulator connector. NOTE You must align the pump correctly in order to connect it to the pipes above and below.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 253

18 TIP If you need to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then move it over the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the cursor keys or the Move tool for precise placement. 19 Press ESC twice. 20 In the 3D Piping view, notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.

Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 In the 2 - Piping view, click the pump. The selected pump displays in red. 22 On the Options Bar, click .

You can also right-click the pump, and select Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -5 0 for Offset. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.

254 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

24 Click OK. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.

If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC. 25 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 26 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.

Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 27 Press ESC to clear the selection.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 255

28 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

After connecting the pump, you need to check connectivity. 29 Place the cursor over the pump, and press TAB. The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

30 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe, and check connectivity. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.

Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

256 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

31 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 32 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.

33 Click the left pump to display rotation controls.

34 Click the rotation control on the right.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 257

The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

35 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

Assign the pumps to the supply system 36 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser. You can also press F9. 37 In the System Browser, do the following:
■ ■

Expand the Unassigned folder. Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system. Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located

258 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. 38 In the 3D Piping view, select the left supply pipe riser.

System tools display on the Options Bar. TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar.

39 On the Options Bar, click

(Edit System).

The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. 40 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 41 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 259

Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. 42 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System. 43 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls. Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.

Inspecting Piping Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. 4 Select the boiler. System tools appear on the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click

(Inspect).

6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1, and click OK. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

260 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 261

11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps, click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.

Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.

262 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.

Checking Piping Systems
Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and for pipe sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. A warning appears, but does apply to the piping system. The piping system is logically and physically valid. However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems. Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”

Checking Piping Systems | 263

4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Next, you confirm the system component assignments. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.

264 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The red lines represent the default logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views, otherwise, click Close. 10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the piping system assignments. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All. The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number.

Checking Piping Systems | 265

Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. and fin-tube radiators.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. For additional practice. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe 266 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 15 Using the methods that you learned. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. 3D. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. specify 9' 9" for the supply and 9' 3" for the return pipe offset elevation. Finally. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. click File menu ➤ Save. In the lesson. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. Depending on your air systems design. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. circulator pumps. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. and click Save. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 17 In the Save As dialog. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. In this exercise. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. navigate to the folder of your choice. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. it is a valid system without problems. For pipe offset. a boiler. Design the system in the 1 . and section views. 16 If you want to save your work. In this tutorial. the creation and modification methods remained the same. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name.

connections and creating logical systems. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. Checking Piping Systems | 267 . The completed mechanical systems are included in the i Completed Mechanical Systems. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2009. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). parametrically modify those designs. Explore different system designs.

268 .

and select the component families that you will use in the plan. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. After finishing each exercise. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. In this tutorial. Planning Electrical Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems. go to http://www. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. However. In this lesson you specify electrical settings. 269 . click Reload From. If the tutorial datasets are not present. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. However. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. and create schedules that you will need to design the electrical systems for your project. and select i Office Building. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. you learn to create electrical systems using a linked architectural model of a building project.Electrical Systems 6 In this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model.autodesk. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. if the link is lost.rvt.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system.

power distribution systems.rvt. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. click Add (below the table). and ceiling plans for each have been prepared by duplicating architectural views. and demand factors that you will use in your project. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. and demand factors that are applied in the design. wiring. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Electrical Views. power. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. then applying the appropriate template to each plan: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. 3 Click Wiring Types. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in spaces are above the ceiling level. expand Wiring. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Insulation Max Size Value CU-THWN Copper 75 THWN 500 270 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. in the left pane. and in the right pane. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. For example. wiring. in the Element Properties dialog for Spaces.The electrical settings determine the voltages. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. distribution systems. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. Lighting. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. the Limit Offset. For this reason. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. Later. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. has been set to 10' 6" for the building used with these exercises.

00 V 250. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 240 277 480 Value 120.00 V 490.00 V Minimum 110.00 V 220.00 V Maximum 130.00 V 240.00 V 480. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.00V 280.00 V 460. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions.00 V 220.00 V 200.00 V 208.00V 260. For example. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 271 . click Voltage Definitions. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition.Parameter Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value 1. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view.00V 277. By specifying a range.

8 In the right pane. even though this is physically impossible. For example.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. 272 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. click Distribution Systems. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 120/240 Single 480/277 Wye Phase Three Single Three Configuration Wye None Wye Wires 4 3 4 L-L 208 240 480 L-G 120 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices.

Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that.000VA 10. or Other systems in your project based on their load. Red. Preparing the Electrical Plan | 273 .NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. For this exercise. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. 10 Click OK.000VA. HVAC. this type of system (High. 9 Click Demand Factors. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load.000VA 10. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA.000VA. leave the default settings as shown here. at any given time. For example. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. Power. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. More Than and Less Than values define the range for the associated Demand Factor: ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads.000VA 3.

Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and load the following families: ■ ■ Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles.208V MLO . In this case the key style is the type of space and. 17 Using the same method. A Lighting Devices ➤ Lighting Switches folder. 12 In the Open dialog. expand Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Devices. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of spaces (offices.rfa. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. containing several switch types.480V MCB .Load component families 11 NOTE The components used throughout this tutorial have been copied from the Imperial Library to the i families sub-folder. voltages. and demand factors. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. 13 Select Lighting Switches.rfa Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .NEMA Type 2. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Transformer folder.480-208Y120 . restrooms. has also been added under Lighting Device. As you loaded each of the component families. and established the parameters for your wiring. An Electrical Fixtures ➤ Duplex Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. In this exercise. 16 In the Project Browser. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. 19 Open the Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Fixtures folder and load the Troffer Corner Insert. Defining Required Lighting Levels on page 274. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). distribution systems. and click Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Surface.rfa. and so on).rfa 18 Using the same method.rfa. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.Surface. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. As an alternative. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 274 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . expand Families. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Later. and load Duplex Receptacle. you can load from the components from that location. and load Dry Type Transformer .rfa family. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Panelboard folder. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. 14 Using the same method. conference rooms. 15 Click Open. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. selected components for your electrical systems. in the Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise.

you can look at the properties for one of the spaces. click the Training Files icon. For Group. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as described below. and when the cross-hairs display. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 275 . 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. Under Categories. The new parameter you have just created applies to all spaces in the project.Lighting in the Space Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type.rvt. double-click 1 . Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Lighting Levels. For Discipline.Open the provided dataset. Under Parameter Data. select Electrical-Lighting. To verify this. 4 Click OK twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Electrical. For Type. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Spaces under Electrical .Lighting to make it the active view. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. click Add. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Select Instance. click to select the space. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the spaces within your project. select Spaces. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. move the cursor over the office in the upper-left corner. select Illuminance. enter Required Lighting Level for Name.

12 Click OK. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on space type. Click OK. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the space component. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . there are many spaces in this project that have similar lighting requirements. 8 Click Cancel. For Key Name. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each space type. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. click New 8 times to add 8 rows in the key schedule. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. Click Schedule keys. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. For Name. 276 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . enter Space Lighting Requirements. However. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each space. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Spaces for Category.Lighting category. ■ ■ ■ The Shedule Properties dialog displays. enter Lighting Levels. click (Properties). select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list.7 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can double-click column dividers to auto-fit column width to its content. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. one for each type of space in the building. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. The new rows are added with 1 through 8 as the default Key Names.

Assign space keys to the spaces in the project 15 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Space Lighting Requirements schedule. and select Open Office. under Instance Parameters. according to the values in the following table: Space Type Private Office Open Office Main Entrance Lounge Restroom Conference Elec/Mech Stair/Circulation Required Lighting Level (fc) 30 45 45 25 30 35 20 20 When completed. double-click the 1 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Move the cursor over the space until a cross-hair displays. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. 16 Zoom in on the large open area (not the main entrance) in the center of the floor plan. click . and for Lighting Levels parameter.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. then right-click. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 277 . under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. the Key Schedule should looks like this: TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. in the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Identity Data category. and click Element Properties.Enter a space type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of spaces in the project. click View Properties and.

Lighting 1 . then right-click one of the selections. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected spaces. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . select multiple spaces of the same type (for example.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting category.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Space Lighting Requirements key schedule. While pressing Ctrl.Lighting 1 . 21 Using the same method.Lighting 1 .Lighting Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Name Office 101 Office 102 Office 103 Open 104 Mens Room 105 Elec/Mech 106 Ladies Room 107 Office 108 Office 109 Office 110 Office 111 Office 112 Office 113 Stairwell 114 Office 115 Office 116 Office 117 Key Name Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 278 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Level 1 . 20 Click OK.Lighting 1 . Office).19 Scroll up to the Electrical .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting and apply Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple spaces of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog. the value that you entered for this space type in the key schedule. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 45 fc. then open 2 .Lighting 1 .Lighting.

For example.Lighting 2 . if required. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component.Lighting 2 . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels on page 280.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . 24 Proceed to the next exercise.Lighting 2 . and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Close.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting Number 121 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 Name Main Entrance 121 Office 201 Office 202 Office 203 Open 204 Mens Room 205 Elec/Mech 206 Ladies Room 207 Lounge 208 Office 209 Office 210 Office 211 Office 212 Stairwell 213 Conference Room 214 Office 215 Office 216 Key Name Main Entrance Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the spaces in your project.Lighting 2 . Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values Defining Required Lighting Levels | 279 . you could create a key schedule named Space Variables.Lighting 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Level 1 .

12 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 For Color. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. select Spaces.according to space type. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as described below.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. double-click the 1 . 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click OK. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. enter Required Lighting. In this exercise you will create a space color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. For Space Type. for Title. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. and click 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. selecting a space type for your new Space Variables parameter in a space’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. and click OK. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. click Edit/New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Required Lighting Levels. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. and place it in the drawing. 280 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select Underline. click the Training Files icon. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click Element Properties.rvt. for Name. Under Title Text. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. select Required Lighting Level. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. select Spaces for Category. select Show Title. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the space components. Space color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Color Fills. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ (Duplicate). Open the provided dataset. select Required Lighting 10 Click OK. 14 Click OK twice. For Color Scheme. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. click Color Scheme Legend. Consequently.

Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. 17 Using the same method. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. or for any parameter that you want to create for a space (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise). Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you create a space lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document.5 fc range specified in the schedule. you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/. activate the color scheme as you did for 1 . Open the provided dataset. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for spaces. but only one per view.Lighting floor plan the active view. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. as described below. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 281 . You can have more than one color scheme in the project.16 Make the 2 . Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each space against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise.Lighting. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project. 18 You can save the open file if you wish.

282 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . For Name. double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane Create a new schedule parameter 4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. scroll down the Available fields list. click Calculated Value. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Schedule Lighting Requirements. For Formula. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create space lighting analysis schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click the Training Files icon. 2 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. enter Lighting Delta. Click OK. select Illuminance. select Number.Required Lighting Level. enter Average Estimated Illumination . select Spaces. select Electrical. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list.rvt. enter Space Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Type. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Discipline.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 You can save the open file if you wish. and click Field Format. select 2 decimal places. 13 Click OK twice.8 On the Formatting tab. under fields. 9 Click Conditional Format. enter -5 fc and +5 fc in the text boxes. 11 Click the Background Color chip. 12 In the Color dialog. verify that Fixed is selected. 17 Using the same method. select Lighting Delta. For Rounding. specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. For Test. 15 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 16 Click OK. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Field. For Units. under Basic colors. click the red color chip. select Not Between. For Value. 14 On the Formatting tab. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 283 . 18 Click OK. select Lighting Delta. select Ceiling Reflectance. under Fields.

and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each space’s lighting requirement. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each of the occupied spaces. these spaces appear in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Floor Reflectance.20 Click File menu ➤ Close. Wall Reflectance. there is no required lighting level specified. As a result. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Adding Lighting Fixtures. NOTE Space components are placed in chases and plenums to permit reliable heating and cooling load analysis. click the Training Files icon. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the spaces as 0. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the spaces. and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red.5 fc range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column. and these areas will not be lighted. Once the equipment is in place. as described below. NOTE Right-click a heading. and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. Only the Number. expand Schedules/Quantities. and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. Adding Lighting Fixtures In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project. and double-click Space Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. As you select and place lighting fixtures. This is because the value is not within the +/. Designing the Electrical System on page 284. electrical equipment.rvt. Name. Average Estimated Lighting. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Designing the Electrical System In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices. Open the provided dataset. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Place the initial lighting fixture 1 In the Project Browser. and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. 284 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . However. and make connections to electrical equipment. you will create power and lighting circuits. In this exercise. you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project.

6 In the Project Browser. click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown.Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. 9 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. 10 In the Type Selector. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid. 11 With the cursor in the space in the upper-left corner of the plan. 7 On the Windows menu. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 285 . double-click 1 . and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 3 Lamp.4 On the Windows menu. click Close Hidden Windows. and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. click Lighting Fixture. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection. under Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. and arrange the windows as shown. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 8 In the 1 .Ceiling Elec view. click Tile.

and on the Toolbar. and when Endpoint displays. 15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture.12 Click Modify. click (Move). 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture. and click when Intersection displays. 286 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click to specify the start point. 14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture. select it.

This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of level 1.In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. the Lighting Delta for Office 101 is closer to the required +/. select Multiple. (Copy).5 fc. as shown. and on the toolbar. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 287 . 18 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point. Copy and place additional lighting fixtures 16 Select the lighting fixture. click 17 On the Options Bar.

you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each space with a 2-lamp fixture. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. select one of the lighting fixtures in each space. but is still not within the +/. If you select a component inadvertently. 102. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. The Average Estimated Illumination for Office 101. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 2Lamp.5 fc range.Check the illumination levels against the Space Lighting Analysis schedule 19 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.Ceiling Elec. and in the Type Selector. To adjust the illumination level downward. Change lighting fixture type 20 In 1 . so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these spaces. and 103 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 30 fc. 288 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. Point by point analysis is not currently supported.

The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset.Ceiling Elec and 2 .21 Again. Level 1 NOTE Lighting fixtures were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical spaces. Plenum and chase spaces will be blank. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 should appear similar to those shown below along with the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 289 .5 fc range. The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/. 22 Using the same method. Use the Space Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. When you are finished. only the Mechanical/Electrical spaces (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1 .Ceiling Elec views. placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. and go on to the next exercise.

right-click one of the headings. 290 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Level 2 23 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. and click Unhide All Columns.

Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Switches.With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces. 7 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. under Schemes for the Spaces Category. right-click 1 .Lighting. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. Open the provided dataset. Place switches in spaces 6 In the Project Browser. under Instance Parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to place the switch. Placing Lighting Switches on page 291. click Device. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 5 Using the same method. click in the Value column for Color Scheme.rvt. turn off the color scheme on level 2. click (none). verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. 10 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of space 101. 8 In the Type Selector. and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Placing Lighting Switches | 291 . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. Turn off the color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 24 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon. 11 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the space as shown. double-click 1 . and click Properties. In this exercise. as described below. 9 On the Options Bar. Placing Lighting Switches In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project.Lighting to make it the active view. your Lighting Delta column for all of the spaces should be white. 4 Click OK twice. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

click Device. select Lighting Switches : Three Way.12 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining spaces in the 1 . 14 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan.Lighting view as shown. 292 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown. and in the Type Selector. Level 1 13 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.

Placing Lighting Switches | 293 . 16 In the Type Selector. and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. select Lighting Switches : Four Way. 17 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown. as shown. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell.15 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan.

20 In the Project Browser. click Device. place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click 2 . and in the Type Selector. select Lighting Switches : Three Way.18 In the open office area. 19 Click Modify.Lighting to make it the active view. 294 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 22 Place a 3-way switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown.

as shown. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. click Device. and go on to the next exercise. Placing Lighting Switches | 295 . and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown. 24 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. in the Type Selector. On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.23 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset.

and double-click 1 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Power to make it the active view. Placing Power Receptacles on page 296.Level 2 25 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. as described below. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and click View Properties. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Receptacles. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. 296 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .rvt. Hide lighting components and specify view ranges 2 Right-click in the drawing area. 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Open the provided dataset. Placing Power Receptacles In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click the Training Files icon.

Placing Power Receptacles | 297 . 9 In the Project Browser. and edit the View Range to select Associated Level (Level 2). edit the Visibility/Graphics Overrides for the view to hide lighting fixtures and lighting devices. scroll down to View Range. 16 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 8 Click OK twice. 13 In the Type Selector. under Primary Range. 10 Using the same method.Power. scroll down and. click Edit. 7 In the View Range dialog. and click Edit. for Top. click Device. and specify the top of the view range as 10' 0". zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 4 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. clear Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 12 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. under Instance Properties. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. 5 Click OK. on the Model Categories tab. 15 In the left side of the plan. select Associated Level (Level 1). right-click 2 . and for Offset. place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown.3 In the Element Properties dialog. Place wall-hosted receptacles 11 In the 1 . verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. and click Properties. under Instance Parameters. including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.Power plan view. enter 10' 0". 14 On the Options Bar.

1-Power 298 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

2-Power Place floor-hosted receptacles 17 In the Project Browser. click for Plane. (Place on Work Plane). and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard.Power. click Device. Placing Power Receptacles | 299 . 19 In the Type Selector. 20 On the Options Bar. double-click 1 . 21 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office. The current level is selected by default. and place a receptacle on the floor as shown. 18 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.

This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures. click (Copy). it is important that the connector be within the space to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design.22 Click Modify. When placing a receptacle on a work plane. as shown. In the next steps. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles along the right side of the Level 1 open office. click . you will flip the work plane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the work plane. select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure. 23 Select the receptacle and click plane (within the space). 26 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point. its connector is located below the level of the work plane. and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor. 24 On the Toolbar. select Multiple. 27 Draw a pick box around the 4 floor-based receptacles. (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the work 25 On the Options Bar. 300 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . as shown.

28 Draw a pick box around the 2 floor-based receptacles. select Multiple 29 Using the previous procedure. as shown. . and to the left of the men’s restroom. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles below. as shown. and click on the Options Bar. Placing Power Receptacles | 301 .

302 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2 .Power view.Power floor receptacles.30 Using the same procedure. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. open 2 . 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Power as shown. then copy and paste them in the 2 . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports on page 303.Power. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Select all 1 . 33 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP You can select all of the floor-hosted receptacles in the 1 .Power view. and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View.

In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports | 303 . 4 Click OK. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. and for Name. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as described below. With the introduction of local energy codes. scroll down the Category list. the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. and select Spaces. Open the provided dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A schedule is created similar to the one shown. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Usage Reports. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components. select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area 6 Click OK. click the Training Files icon. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected. under Available Fields. you can refer to this report rather than having to measure spaces and count fixtures. because it is quite common in Revit MEP.rvt. enter Power & Lighting Usage. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces.

main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). and work toward the higher voltage. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).7 You can save the open file if you wish. Placing Electrical Equipment on page 304. 304 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model.

select 480/277 Wye. scroll down to the Electrical . Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Electrical Equipment. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. 11 In the Type Selector.Loads category. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. under Instance Parameters. for Distribution Sys. 4 In the Type Selector. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel.Surface : 250A. 9 Click OK. select Electrical Equipment. under Electrical .Loads. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 On the Options Bar. click . as described below.rvt.Open the provided dataset. select 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : 45kVA.Power. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. click Electrical Equipment. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. 3 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical space between the 2 restrooms. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical space to the right of the panel as shown. Right-click the panel. and double-click 1 . click Element Properties. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. Add a transformer 10 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. select 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Placing Electrical Equipment | 305 . and click to place the panel as shown. click the Training Files icon. and for Panel Name. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. select 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click . 20 Select the panel you just placed. Since this is a transformer. and on the Options Bar. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. scroll down to the Electrical . 18 In the Type Selector. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. 19 Click Modify. scroll down to the Electrical . select Electrical Equipment. For Panel Name. under Instance Parameters. 14 On the Options Bar. enter L-1. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and place the panel to the right of the transformer.Surface : 100A. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 21 On the Options Bar. and for Panel Name. 23 Click OK.Loads category. for Distribution Sys. 16 Click OK. enter T1. under Instance Parameters. and on the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye. select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution Sys.Loads category. 306 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. select 120/208 Wye.

The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. including the Secondary Distribution System for T2.Surface : 100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. 27 Click (Select Panel). 26 On the Options Bar. and click 30 On the Options Bar. . and select panel H-2 for Panel. 28 On the Options Bar. select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. The temporary circuit displays Placing Electrical Equipment | 307 . click (Create Power Circuit). add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical space in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . In this case you are going to select something other than a panel. Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view.Surface : 250A named H-2 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: 45kVA named T2 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click as shown. . select panel L-2. 29 Select the transformer T2. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit.

select the L-1 panel.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. 308 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . . The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. click . and on the Options Bar. select the H-2 panel. 34 In the 2-Power view. 38 On the Options Bar. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. and select the T1 transformer as the panel. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces side-by-side. 37 Close the 2-Power view. and select the MDP panel. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. click 35 On the Option Bar. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. . and click 39 Click .

Circuits are used for power. click . as described below. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Creating Power Circuitry | 309 . and select the MDP panel. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Open the provided dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and data systems. click the Training Files icon. lighting.40 Select the T1 transformer. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and click 41 On the Options Bar. . 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating Power Circuitry on page 309. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 42 You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project.

For now. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. 4 On the Options Bar. select all the receptacles in the corner office. and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1).Power to make it the active view. load (180 VA). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. 3 While pressing Ctrl. 310 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner office.■ Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Power Circuitry. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit.rvt. click . 1 In the Project Browser. and voltage (120 V). and double-click 1 .

6 Click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the office. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). click for this circuit. the Specify Circuit Information dialog is displayed. NOTE When all of the devices for the circuit have their distribution system specified as instance parameters. press Tab. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. and press Tab. and select panel L-1 as the panel NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. Creating Power Circuitry | 311 .A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner office so that it is highlighted. and click to select the circuit again. You use the Specify Circuit Information to specify the distribution system parameters for the circuit. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit.

1-#12. and ground wiring. 12 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. will be discussed in a later exercise. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. change the value from 20A to 50A. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar.10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. respectively for this circuit. which are the wire sizes for the load. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. 312 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 1-#12. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. neutral. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. The editable parameters. click (Circuit Properties). Wire Type and Rating. When editing a circuit. 1-#10. The currently specified values are 1-#12. click (Edit Circuit). 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. 1-#6. 11 On the Options Bar.

click . 16 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. 19 Close the warning message. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a space-by-space basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. These will be connected in a later exercise. Creating Power Circuitry | 313 . 21 In the Element Properties dialog. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. under Instance Parameters. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell.Loads category. click . 24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. and then select panel L-1. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. click Cancel. 26 Continue creating circuits. scroll down to the Electrical . 17 Continue selecting receptacles. and try to select panel L-1. and select panel L-1. creating power circuits. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. If you select L-1 in the drawing. and add it to panel L-1. 25 On the Options Bar. click . and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown.15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. 22 Click OK. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. . click The circuit is created. as previously described. click . and click Element Properties.

31 You can save the open file if you wish. create circuits in the 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 29 Select the L-1 panel. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). Adding wiring to a project is optional. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project.Power view and assign them to panel L-2. Increase the number of circuits on panel L-2 to 18. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Finally. As you saw in the previous exercise. you have assigned only 17. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. In the Edit Circuits dialog. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits.Power to make it the active view. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires on page 314. These will be connected in a later exercise. 28 Double-click 1 . NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. 314 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and on the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. 30 Click OK.27 Using the same procedures.

enter Electrical Lighting Plan. 4 In View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. and for Offset. Create lighting circuits 9 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Filter dialog. select Associated Level. as described below. and click OK. for Top. select Electrical Plan . enter 3' 0" Under View Depth. and for Offset. for Level. For Names. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. click the Training Files icon. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 7 In the Project Browser. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 315 . select Associated Level. select Lighting. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 8 In the Apply View Template dialog. under View Properties. Create an Electrical Lighting Plan template for Lighting Views 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. and click Apply View Template. 12 On the Options Bar. select Level Above. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. click Edit in the Value column. select Electrical Lighting Plan.Open the provided dataset. under Names. as shown.rvt. and in the New View Template dialog. Click 3 In the right pane. enter 3' 0" 5 Click OK. 2 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ For Show Type. 6 Scroll down to Sub-Discipline. 10 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. 11 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Lighting. and click OK. right-click 1 . and click OK. select <all>. for View Range. and for Offset. double-click 1 . in the Value column. enter -1' 0" For Bottom. click (Filter).Lighting to make it the active view.

316 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 16 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. click .14 On the Options Bar. This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. 15 Close the message window and.

you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. but with an additional vertex. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. ceilings. Splined wiring is similar to arc. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. press Tab. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. when you create wiring manually. ground) in the wire run. click circuit. 21 In the Filter dialog. Later. and click OK. you created arc type wiring. click Check None. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. as in this step. When creating wires. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. and click the switch to select the switches. click . and then select panel MDP as the panel for the . you can specify splined wiring. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 19 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall.17 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. In the next steps. 20 On the Options Bar. or floors. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. select Wires. In this step. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. lighting fixtures. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. neutral. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 317 . click . click (Filter).

change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 22. right-click the MDP panel. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 318 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Loads category. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. one neutral conductor. under Instance Parameters. click . add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the open office and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. and click Element Properties. scroll down to the Electrical . and click OK. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. 24 Using the same method.22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 28 Create permanent wiring for each circuit. under Instance Parameters. for Hot Conductors. and click OK. When this occurs. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2 as the value. 27 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. and one ground conductor). 25 In the Mech/Elec space. and assign each circuits to panel MDP. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. enter 2.

and restrooms in the 2 . under Instance Parameters.29 For more practice. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1 . 32 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. and click OK. and assign each circuit to panel H-2. lounge. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. and in the Element Properties dialog. then creating lighting circuits in 2 . conference room.Loads category. Otherwise.Lighting view. 31 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. Creating Switch Systems on page 320.Lighting. 30 Right-click panel H-2. scroll down to the Electrical . The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 319 . close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. These will be connected in a later exercise. assign the circuit to panel H-2.Lighting view.

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. but does not prevent you from doing so.33 You can save the open file if you wish. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. and panel information. Open the provided dataset. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.rvt. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. as described below. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 1 . assign lighting fixtures to switches. you will create a space schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. fixtures. 320 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2.Lighting to make it the active view. and specify switch IDs for switches. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Switch Systems. After creating the switch systems on Level 1.

and on the Options Bar. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. click (Filter) to select only the lighting fixtures. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. select The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. click Multiple. (Edit Switch System). Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding switches). After creating the switch system. click The Switch System toolbar is activated. TIP Because all of the lighting fixtures in the open office are part of the same lighting system. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. (Remove From System). press Tab. 4 Click (Select Switch for System). and click to select everything in the system. Then. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. click Finish to confirm your selections. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area.2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). 5 With the switch system still selected. ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. Creating Switch Systems | 321 . click (Create Switch System). 3 On the Options Bar. you can highlight one of the lighting fixtures. on the Options Bar. 6 On the Switch System toolbar.

The Switch ID is updated on the Options Bar. for Switch ID. enter Main Entrance . 15 Click 16 Click .West. 8 On the Options Bar. click . 322 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click OK. (Switch Properties). click outside the ladies’ restroom. and select the switch on the wall 14 On the Switch System toolbar. enter North Stairwell . 9 Click (Switch Properties). 17 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. click Finish. under Instance Properties. click Finish. under Instance Properties. (Select Switch). 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. 11 On the Switch System toolbar.1st Floor. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 27 fixtures remaining in the system. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Switch ID. and click OK.

Click OK.18 On the Switch System toolbar. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. stairwell.Lighting view. enter Switch Systems. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. click . For Name. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. and for Heading. Creating Switch Systems | 323 . create switch systems for the remaining private offices. select Spaces. and restrooms in the 1 . Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Number. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. scroll down the Available fields list. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Verify that Ascending is selected. 21 Using the same method. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. and on the Options Bar. 26 On the Formatting tab. 20 Click . select Number from the Fields list. enter Space Number. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Finish.

324 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting view. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. Specify Open Area . The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. continue creating switch systems in the 2 . conference room. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. restrooms. Otherwise. 30 For more practice. The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. Create separate systems for the lounge. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the space containing that system. and private offices. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. scroll down the Available fields list.28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.2nd Floor for the switch ID.

Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. and double-click 1 . and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. 3 In the corner office. 2 Zoom in on the office at the upper-left corner of the plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Power to make it the active view. 5 Using the same method.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. 4 On the Options Bar. Open the provided dataset. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining spaces along the left side of the plan. 1 In the Project Browser. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. as described below. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 325 . click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit.rvt. click the Training Files icon.

9 On the Options Bar. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. and delete both home runs. 8 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click Wire. 10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top office to specify the start point for the wire.6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper offices. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper offices are visible. 326 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle office to specify the endpoint for the wire.11 Click in the open area near the door for the office to specify the second point for the wire. as shown. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 327 .

when the wiring is completed. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower offices. and using the same method. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. your layout should look similar to the following: Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the 328 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The direction will be corrected. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower offices are visible. if necessary. When completed. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run.

and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. In the previous steps. a shared neutral. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower office as shown. 14 Click Modify. as the circuits in each office was added to the wiring run. 17 Right click the wire run. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower office.number of hot conductors. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. and click. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 329 . and a shared safety ground). select Insert Vertex.

Completed 1-Power 330 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. adjusting its shape according to the vertex location.Power views.Power and 2 . The wire behaves like a spline. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1 . or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise. 19 For additional practice.Vertices let you route wires in your project views.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Checking Your Design | 331 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. In this exercise. Open the provided dataset. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. as described below.rvt. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Checking Your Design. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.Power to make it the active view. and double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Checking Your Design on page 331.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish.

expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. release the mouse button. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. 6 Right-click a column heading in the System Browser. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. each with a load of 180VA.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner office is visible. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. and click Select. 4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. 8 In the System Browser. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. 5 Right-click a column heading. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. 7 In the System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. 332 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. 10 Open the 1 . and expand Unassigned.Lighting views and close any windows. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). collapse Power. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell.Power. 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. Checking Your Design | 333 .The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1 . 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area.Lighting and 2 . and 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 2.

and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell.Lighting view have not yet been connected. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. 18 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. and on the Options Bar. click . (Add to Circuit). click to select the circuit. 17 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. 13 In the 1 . clear Multiple. and on the Options Bar.The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2 . press Tab several times. click create permanent wiring. In the System Browser. click 15 On the Options Bar.Lighting view. to 334 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. click Finish. until the power circuit is previewed. 16 Click the title bar of the 2 .Lighting view. 14 On the Edit Circuits toolbar.

Checking Your Design | 335 . and click OK. 22 Click . click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. click 27 On the Options Bar. press Tab. 26 On the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters. 20 On the Options Bar. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click the title bar of the 2 . click Check None. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell.Lighting view. click . 21 In the Filter dialog. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches.Lighting view. 19 In the 1 . and in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 25 In the drawing area. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. select Wires. for Hot Conductors.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 24 In the Project Browser. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. and click OK. In the System Browser. select panel L-1. enter 2. . arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible.

28 Click to create permanent wiring. 336 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

Checking Your Design | 337 . click Check Circuits. 31 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. create a power circuit for the 6 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. Check Circuits 30 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.29 Using the same method. 32 Click to view details of the warning. 33 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category.

rvt. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. Open the provided dataset. In the Project Browser. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click the Training Files icon. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Finally. as described below. 34 Close the Warning dialog. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 35 You can save the open file if you wish.This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click 2 . Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Defining Circuit Loads on page 338. 338 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Circuit Loads. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits.Power. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise.

and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 5040 VA on Phase B. 3 On the Options Bar. while Phase A provides 4860 VA. Phase B 4860 VA. click . B.4320 VA). and Phase C provides 3780 VA. click Rebalance Loads. Defining Circuit Loads | 339 . and Phase C . The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Examination of the loads on Phase A. select panel L-2.2 In the Mechanical/Electrical space.4500 VA. 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 5 Click OK.

13 In the 1 . NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. Therefore. The 3 circuits that feed panel H-2 present a load of 18844 VA. 14 In the Type Selector.6 Select panel H-2. for panel H-2. and present a load 6496 VA. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. After the loads are balanced. The remaining circuits feed the lighting circuits on Level 1. 12 Click OK. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. and on the Options Bar. enter 40A for the Trip value.Power. enter 100A for the Trip value. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. the 3 circuits feed transformer T1. click . H-2 is a 100A panel. the H-2 panel. double-click 1 . click 8 In the Project Browser.Power view. Therefore. and the T1 transformer. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. and on the Options Bar. 7 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. you may see different values for the loads. and for T1. 9 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. so no further changes are required. the actual load connected to it (12960 VA) is less than 15kVA. select the T1 transformer. . This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. you can use a 30kVA transformer. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 10 Select panel MDP. 340 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. and present a load of 12960 VA. L-1 and MDP.

1-#8. Defining Circuit Loads | 341 .00A. enter 100A for Rating. in the Mechanical/Electrical space.Power to make it the active view. 20 Under Electrical-Loads. 26 Click OK. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. select panel H-2. 25 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 1-#12. 21 Scroll down. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. 18 With panel L-1 selected. 19 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. under Instance Parameters. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. on the Options Bar. select the T2 transformer. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click OK. 100. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category.Power view. 23 In the Project Browser. Verify/adjust wire sizes 15 Right-click panel L-1. 1-#12. 27 In the 2 . 24 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. Notice that it changes to 3-#1. for transformer T2. enter 40A for the Trip value. 1-#1. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100.Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. click (Circuit Properties). 28 In the Type Selector. double-click 2 . 22 Click OK.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. click . and on the Options Bar. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. and click Element Properties.

30 In the Element Properties dialog. Size the service entrance conductors 32 In the Project Browser. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. 29 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties.Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. 33 With the MDP panel selected. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100.00A. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. under Instance Parameters. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 You can save the open file if you wish. double-click 1 . Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. click . 34 Close the Warning. 31 Click OK.Power to make it the active view. 342 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . under Electrical Loads. 36 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. click .

if the link is lost. and sanitary piping. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. navigate to Training Files ➤ Architectural. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building.rvt. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. However. After finishing each exercise. In this tutorial. At the end of this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. hot and cold water piping. you can choose to save your work. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. As you create the plumbing system. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. and select i Office Building. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. methodology. If the tutorial datasets are not present.Plumbing Systems 7 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. By following this workflow. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2009. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. 343 . In this tutorial. you will understand the process. including plumbing fixtures. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. click Reload From. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient.autodesk. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. go to http://www. However.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. planning is critical to a successful design. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa 5 Click Open. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.rvt. 344 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click the Training Files icon. In this lesson. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems.Wall Hung.Floor Mounted. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Loading Plumbing Parts. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Water Closet . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa Urinal . 3 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. click the Training Files icon.Flush Valve .Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families.

Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Pipe Bend . 4 In the Type Properties dialog.DWV . 5 In the Rename dialog.rfa Pipe Reducing Short Tee .Sanitary . select Pipe Transition . click Rename. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures.Glued. enter PVC Sanitary. 2 Right-click PVC.rvt. click the Training Files icon.PVC: Standard For Preferred Junction Type. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. select Pipe Short Tee . Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser.Glued: Standard For Transition. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems on page 345. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them.PVC: Standard Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 345 . 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Floor Mounted and Urinal . All of the loaded families. for New.Flush Valve . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and click Properties.6 In the Project Browser. select Pipe Bend .Wall Hung. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. 6 Under Mechanical. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Configuring Plumbing and Pipe Systems. 12 You can save the open file if you wish. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Duplicate. 3 Right-click PVC 2.PVC: Standard For Tap. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: Water Closet .Sanitary . click the Training Files icon. select Tee For Tee.Glued.PVC .rfa 11 Click Open. and click OK. select Pipe Cross . The selected component families are loaded into the project. select None For Cross. In the left pane of the Open dialog. are added under Families in the Project Browser. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.■ For Union. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. ZR (Zoom Region). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures.PVC: Standard is selected 10 Click OK to close the Type Properties dialog. then click Duplicate. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. Finally.PVC . you add 2 toilets. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Adding Plumbing Fixtures.PVC: Standard is selected For Preferred Junction Type. 3 urinals. select None For Cross. verify that Pipe Cross . Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room.PVC: Standard is selected For Union. enter PVC Sanitary Vent. 9 Under Mechanical. You then modify the piping. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close.Vent . for Name. select Pipe Coupling . and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room.PVC: Standard 7 Click Apply. select Pipe Tee . verify that Pipe Transition . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 11 You can save the open file if you wish. verify that Pipe Coupling . 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 sinks. verify that Tee is selected For Tee. 346 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click the Training Files icon. 8 In the Name dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.Glued: Standard is selected For Transition.PVC: Standard For Tap. verify that Pipe Bend . Add Plumbing Fixtures on page 346. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. In this lesson.

and click to place the toilet in the approximate location shown. 6 Click Modify.6 gpf in the Type Selector. click Plumbing Fixture. click Dimension. a On the Design Bar. 4 Select Water Closet . and 3 sinks.The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. and 1' 6" from the right wall.Floor Mounted : Private 1. Position the first toilet 7 Position the toilet 6" from the upper wall. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.Flush Valve . Add Plumbing Fixtures | 347 . 5 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. 3 wall-mounted urinals.

h Click the value for the blue dimension below the toilet. and press Enter. f Click Modify. The toilet is placed 6" from the upper wall of the toilet stall. Clear Constrain Verify that Copy is selected Clear Multiple 348 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . The toilet is placed 1' 6" from the right wall. j Delete both dimension annotations. enter 1' 6". and click. and click to place the dimension annotation. place a dimension annotation between the upper wall and the back of the toilet. e Using the same method. move the cursor over the center of the toilet.b On the Options Bar. d Move the cursor down. enter 0' 6". c Click the face of the right wall. verify that (Aligned) is selected. and on the Edit toolbar. Add a second toilet 8 Select the toilet. Wall faces is selected for Prefer. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Copy). g Select the toilet. and Individual References is selected for Pick. click 9 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. i Click Modify. click the value for the blue dimension to the right.

19 Using the same method. select Wall centerlines Verify that Individual References is selected for Pick 17 Click the centerline of the left wall. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 349 . and click. click Plumbing Fixture. 14 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer.Wall Hung : 3/4 Flush Valve in the Type Selector. Place wall-mounted urinals 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. do the following. 13 Select Urinal . click Dimension. 11 Move the preview of the toilet 5' 0" to the left (into the left stall). 15 Click Modify.10 Click the center line of the toilet to establish a start point. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. 16 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click to place the toilet as shown. and on the Options Bar. and when the alignment snap displays and the preview is from the original toilet. and click to place the dimension annotation. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. 18 Move the cursor down. and place 3 urinals approximately as shown.

select Sink . 350 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 28 In the drawing area.20 Working from left to right. and in the Type Selector. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. 27 On the Options Bar click (Place on Face). click the value for the blue dimension. place the leftmost urinal 1' 8" from the left wall. and click to place the dimensions annotation. (Equal Control) 24 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. 21 Select the rightmost urinal. 23 Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. and click the blue above the dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. and press Delete. and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. click the centerline of each urinal in succession. 22 Using the same method. and enter 1' 8". then move the cursor up. click Plumbing Fixture. 25 While pressing Ctrl.Single : 18"x18".Island . Place sinks 26 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. The urinal is placed 1' 8" from the wall of the toilet stall. select the counter top.

Add Plumbing Fixtures | 351 . and in the Type selector. 33 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. 30 Place 3 sinks.29 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. then equalize the space between sinks. click Plumbing Fixture. specify the distance between the center line of the outer sinks and the center line of the walls as 1' 10". approximately as shown. 31 Click Modify. and for Plane. as shown. click Dimension. and click to place the floor drain. specify the distance between the drain center line and the lower wall as 1' 6". Place the floor drain 36 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 34 Using the same method specify the distance between the center line of the wall below the sinks and the center line of each sink. 35 Delete the dimension annotations. 38 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet.3" Drain. select Level : Level 2.Round : 5" Stainer . select Floor Drain . 37 On the Option Bar click (Place on Work Plane). 32 On the Design Bar.

Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. under Extents. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. 6 On the View Control Bar. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Level Offset 5 Click OK twice. click the Training Files icon. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view.39 Click Modify. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Starting the Sanitary Piping System. Begin Creating the Sanitary System on page 352. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. specify Fine for Detail Level. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View Properties. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and click Edit. and floor drain. 4 In the View Range dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. scroll down to View Range. 352 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .rvt. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. urinals. In this exercise. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Bottom Offset Under View Depth. verify the view range settings: ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

9 In the right panel. specify -1' 0" 11 In the left panel. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. toilets. click Branch. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Mechanical Settings. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 353 .The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. specify -1' 0" 13 Click OK. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. click View ➤ Piping. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. as shown. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. and click Main. click (Create Sanitary System). The urinals. Click Window ➤ System Browser. 18 Zoom in on the men’s room. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. select Sanitary from the System Type list. and floor drain. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. 16 Right-click in the system browser table heading. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 19 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut.

click (Layout Path). and click OK. 24 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. 25 Move the cursor over the chase. 23 In the Select a System dialog. enter 1/8" for Slope. 26 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. click Solutions. click Sanitary 1. 21 Click (Thin Lines) on the toolbar. and click to place the base approximately as shown. 28 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click Place Base. for Offset. select 4". 354 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 22 Select one of the components in the newly created sanitary system. 27 On the Design Bar.20 Zoom out to include the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room in the view. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. and a preview of the piping layout displays. specify -4' 0" and for D. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.

You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). 29 Select solution 1. It’s easier if each segment can be moved to a snap. Customize the layout 30 The alignment of segments is critical when customizing a layout. Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 355 .Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. click Modify. and on the Design Bar. to view them. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. as needed. Review the following steps prior to using them to customize the layout. and do the following: a Use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment down into the middle of the chase above the urinals.

31 Click Finish Layout. select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal.b Move the cursor to the left to the junction between the main and the branch to the rightmost toilet. Snap the main in the middle of the chase. d Move the cursor to the right to locate the snap above the center urinal. NOTE You press Ctrl to select multiple segments when you want to move more than one segment to the same location. and drag the segment down into the chase. c Using the same method. 356 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . This makes it easier to locate a snap. and click to align the branch to the main segment.

The third tab should highlight the entire system. The second tab highlights the fixture. as shown.32 Examine the piping that was automatically created. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. slope. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. c Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and orientation of fittings: a Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and check the slope control. checking for the proper connectivity. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 357 . and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. b Select each pipe segment in the system.

34 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. Enter the keyboard shortcut. and double-click 3D Plumbing. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. specify Fine for Detail Level. 35 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 358 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 37 On the View Control Bar. VG (Visibility/Graphics). and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 36 Click OK. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. click Show categories from all disciplines.33 In the Project Browser.

and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. adding the sinks in the men’s room. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System on page 359 to continue creating the sanitary system. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 359 . Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Connecting Sink Drain Lines.rvt.38 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close.

4 Select the tee. and on the Options Bar. right-click the connector on the open leg. 7 Click Modify. verify that 1/8" /12" is specified for the slope. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. When you press the space bar. enter 13. press the Space Bar once. and click Draw Pipe. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and press Enter. 360 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 6 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.

you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. click to place the fitting. and when the snap displays. click Pipe Fitting.If you select the pipe. and press Enter. click the blue size control for the wye leg. 10 Click Modify. enter 2". click Pipe Fitting. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 361 . 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and select Pipe Reducing Wye-DWV-Glued : Standard in the Type Selector. and when the extension snap displays. 11 Select the fitting. click to place the fitting. 9 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. and select Pipe Plug-PVC : Standard in the Type Selector.

19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 17 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. verify that Auto Connect is selected.14 Click Modify. click to specify the end of the pipe. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and that 1/8" /12" is specified for slope. highlight the wye. right-click the connector on the open leg. click to specify the end of the first segment of pipe. and on the Options Bar. 362 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and when the end of the pipe is even with wall centerline. 15 Using the method learned earlier. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down to a point approximately even with the centerline of the wall below the sinks. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. and click Draw Pipe. 16 Select the wye fitting.

25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. the vertical pipe extends above the level of the floor. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described in the previous exercise. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment.20 On the Options Bar. and click to place the fitting. 22 In the 3D view. 24 On the Plumbing tab. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. If necessary. press Space.DWV . 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Double Wye . 21 In the Project Browser. enter 0' 6" for Offset.Glued : Standard. In this case. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 363 . and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. click Apply. and click Modify. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. click Pipe Fitting.

place a section below the sinks as shown. For example.The double wye is added to the vertical segment. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 28 Double-click 2 . to orient the fitting. as 27 Select the double wye fitting. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. in this step you can enter 0 8 (zero space eight) to specify 8". If necessary. TIP When entering dimensions. for Detail Level. VG (Visibility/Graphics) to hide architectural components that will interfere with selecting plumbing components. specify Hidden Line. and on the Options Bar. 30 Double-click the head of the section to open the section view. 26 Click Modify. 29 On the View tab Design Bar. and in the drawing area.Plumbing to make it the active view. without having to enter ' and " symbols. 32 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 31 On the View Control Bar. click Section. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. specify 0' 8" for Offset. and for Model Graphics Style. 364 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . specify Fine. click shown above.

then clear the check from Lines e Click OK 34 NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the double-wye. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 1 0 and press Enter. The fitting moves to the left when pipe is connected to the left leg. 36 Click Modify. then to the right when pipe is connected to the right leg. it is necessary to restore the offset for the fitting. for Offset. 38 Click the connector snap on the center leg. click Pipe. 37 Using the same method. draw the pipe up to the left. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 365 . in line with the angle for the leg. draw the pipe up. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. 41 Click Modify. and click All again d Select any category. and on the Options Bar. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 0 6 and press Enter. and clear the check from any category c Clear Show categories from all disciplines.33 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click None. After adding the piping to the right and left leg. 40 Select the double-wye fitting again. draw a 1' pipe from the right leg of the double-wye. 39 Click Modify. specify 0' 6". do the following: a Click Show categories from all disciplines b Click All. On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

and double-click 2 . 43 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. 44 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. and on the Options Bar. and select the leftmost sink. 50 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. enter 1' 6". and in the Type Selector. connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks.42 In the Project Browser. 47 Click Modify.Plumbing. 366 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 48 Using the same method. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary. 49 In the Project Browser. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 45 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. and click to specify the end of the pipe. and click Apply Verify 1/8" /12" is specified for slope 46 Drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. double-click 3D Plumbing. do the following: ■ ■ For Offset.

Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. select the double-wye and the 3 short segments of pipe connected to it. 56 While pressing Ctrl. specify 1 1/2". 54 On the Options Bar. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. specify 2". and on the Options Bar. 59 Using the same method. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points).Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 51 Routing Solutions works best when the segments being routed are the same size. 57 Select solution 7of 7. 53 While pressing Ctrl. and on the Options Bar. for D. for D. 58 Click Modify. select the pipe from the left sink and the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 9 of 16. (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through 55 Select solution 9 of 16. and on the Options Bar. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. 61 Select the double-wye. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. You use the proposed solutions. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 367 . 52 Click Modify. and select a proposed solution. While pressing Ctrl. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. click Routing Solutions. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 60 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. click Routing Solutions.

and click Finish. This is to be expected. 63 Click Window ➤ Toolbar ➤ Routing Modify to place the Slope and Justify tool on the toolbar. 368 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. for Slope. 64 On the toolbar. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. Close the warning. A warning displays and the pipe from the leg of the double-wye is highlighted to indicate the segment where the slope could not be applied. enter 1/8" / 12". 65 On the Options Bar.

click 69 On the Edit System toolbar. select all 3 sinks. 72 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. there is a smaller movement. click Element Properties. expand Sanitary. This will set the elevation for the pipe’s reference end without changing the slope. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. and on the Options Bar. NOTE In applications where the elevation of a sloped pipe is critical. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Since the routing solution applied to the middle sink used the existing pipe (without adding a segment). right-click Sanitary 1. click to select the reference end of the pipe. 67 In the System Browser. right-click the pipe. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. and under Instance Parameters. specify the slope for the piping to the left sink. click (Edit System). then click Finish on the Edit System toolbar. You can move fixtures by dragging. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke is proportional to the zoom level. Then. click Multiple. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 71 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. click Finish on the Options Bar. and click Select.66 Using the same method. 70 In the drawing area. the piping to the middle sink is already sloped. (Add to System). you can specify the elevation of a pipe’s reference end in the Element Properties for the pipe. 68 On the Options Bar. modifying offset values. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 369 . while pressing Ctrl. When zoomed in close. you can make minor adjustments to the system. specify the exact Offset. If necessary.

75 Using the method learned earlier. highlight the leftmost sink. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. select Pipe Bend . (After the third tab.PVC : Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. you can change these to the more commonly used Pipe Bend . and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 73 While pressing Ctrl. Pipe Bend .Glued : Standard.DWV .When the piping was created for the sink drains. Now that the routing is completed. 74 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye.DWV .) 370 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and select Pipe Bend .DWV . the entire system should be highlighted. and in the Type Selector.Glued : Standard.Glued : Standard in the Type Selector.

skip the next 2 steps. 79 Proceed to the next exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Waste Stack Connection. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 77 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon.76 If you want to save your work. 1 In the Project Browser. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 371 . and carefully drag it away from the elbow.rvt. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. click File menu ➤ Save As. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. and select the horizontal pipe. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. while maintaining the same angle. adjusting the sanitary stack. otherwise. 78 Click File menu ➤ Close. Refining the Sanitary Stack on page 371 to continue creating the sanitary system.

and when the Extension snap displays. and on the Options Bar. Add a reducing wye to the stack 6 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and select Pipe Reducing Wye . 7 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe.DWV .Glued : Standard. specify 6" for D (diameter). 5 Select the vertical pipe segment. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). and press Delete. click Pipe Fitting. and click to place the fitting.4 Select the elbow. 372 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 10 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.8 Click Modify. click the value for the 45 degree leg. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. and click Modify. and press Enter. click Section. double-click 2 . enter 4 to change its size. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward 9 Select the wye. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 373 .Plumbing. If necessary. The wye is added to the vertical segment. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. and click the sanitary piping. 11 On the View tab on the Design Bar. select the wye.

for Detail Level. click Draw Pipe. enter -2' 6" for Offset. 15 On the Options Bar. click to specify the end of the pipe. and draw the pipe in line with 45 degree leg and when the center line for the main segment displays. specify Fine. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. and select the reducing wye fitting. press Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 16 Right-click the connector on the 45 degree leg. and press Enter. 13 On the View Control Bar. 374 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 14 Zoom in.12 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view.

when the location is critical. The fitting moves toward the pipe being added after the pipe is drawn.DWV . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 375 . and on the Options Bar. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. click Draw Pipe. 19 On the Options Bar. then enter 4 0 and press Enter to add a 4' 0" vertical vent pipe. 20 Select the bend created by the routing solution tool. select solution 3 of 3. 22 Move the cursor up and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the fitting. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. 24 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. 23 Click Modify. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). However. click Routing Solutions. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Bend . and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 18 While pressing Ctrl. 21 Right-click the open connector on the reducing wye.NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the reducing tee.Glued : Standard. and in the Type Selector. 17 Click Modify. it will be necessary to move the piping after making the connection. The exact position of the riser is not critical in this application.

27 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.25 You can save the open file if you wish. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. Refining the Urinal Lines on page 376 to continue creating the plumbing system.rvt. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. (If necessary. then down to connect with the sanitary main. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. running it inside the wall. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown.) 376 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . use the Filter tool to select only piping and fittings. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Urinal Waste Lines.

9 Continue drawing the pipe run to the left. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. and when the snap for the center line of the leftmost urinal displays. starting at the level of the original pipe. and click to specify the end of the pipe. press the Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and click OK. 12 In the Select Connector dialog. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. specify 2" Click (Auto Connect) ■ ■ For slope. click the connector snap. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify. for Offset. (Connect Into). click 13 In the drawing area. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. click Connector 2 : Sanitary Round : 2" Out. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 0' 6". specify 1/8" /12" 7 Drag the preview to the left approximately 8". click the pipe above the urinal. 8 On the Options Bar. click Draw Pipe. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector For D. click to specify the end of the pipe. and on the Options Bar. Refining the Urinal Lines | 377 . 11 Select the leftmost urinal.3 Press Delete. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. enter 0' 6" and press Tab.

14 Using the same method. 15 Draw a pick box around the 3 urinals and the horizontal 2" piping just added as shown. (Slope). and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. 18 On the Options Bar. Do not include the riser and fitting. click The slope is applied to the selected piping. 17 On the Routing Modify toolbar. clear Plumbing Fixtures and click OK. and on the Options Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and click Finish. 19 In the Project Browser. connect the remaining urinals to the sanitary main. 378 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Plumbing to make it the active view. double-click 3D. click (Filter Selection). 16 In the Filter dialog. verify that 1/8" /12" for Slope.

first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal.Plumbing to make it the active view. 21 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 4" segment) as shown.Resize pipes 20 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar. Refining the Urinal Lines | 379 . In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. However. double-click 2 . So. specify 3" for D (diameter).

27 Select the pipe to the urinal again.Plumbing to make it the active view. and in the Type Selector. 29 Select the 2" pipes connecting the urinal drains to the main. and on the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. 380 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click to place the plug on the tee. 26 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and on the Options Bar. for D. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. specify 2" for D. 32 Select the vertical pipe segment between the toilets and the urinals. 24 Select the elbow.Sanitary . then select 2". 30 In the Project Browser. Redefine fittings 28 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. and when the extension snap displays. click Pipe Fitting. and on the Options Bar. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. 25 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. double-click 3D.Add a cleanout 23 Select the pipe between the 3" elbow and the left urinal. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. select Pipe PVC Plug : Standard. verify that Pipe Reducing Short Tee .Glued : Standard is selected. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. select 3". 31 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ North. specify 3" for D (diameter).

34 Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe.DVW .This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.Glued : Standard. and select Pipe Bend . 35 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. Refining the Urinal Lines | 381 . and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal.

adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. 382 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described previously. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. If necessary. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog.36 You can save the open file if you wish. Adding Vents to the System on page 382 to continue creating the plumbing system.

do the following: a Click Edit/New. click Pipe. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Apply a filter to the vent piping 9 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 10 On the Filters tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. NOTE You must press Tab or move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. and specify 14' for Offset. 8 Click Modify. VG (Visibility/Graphics). and in the Type Selector. Adding Vents to the System | 383 . 7 Click Apply. specify 0" for Rise/12". select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. specify 2" for D (diameter).

specify Filter by as System Type ➤ contains ➤ Sanitary Vent. g For Sanitary Vent. click Section. and click Override. c Right-click Sanitary 1. e In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Rename.Plumbing to make it the active view. select Sanitary Vent. and in the Color dialog. i In the Line Graphics dialog. select (green). for Pattern. and click OK. and click OK. Vent piping throughout the plan appear as dashed green lines. click the Lines column. rename the filter Sanitary Vent.b In the Filters dialog. select IMPORT-DASHED (2) j Click OK twice. d Under the Filter Rules. and click OK. f In the Add Filters dialog. click Add. select Sanitary from the Filters list. Create additional vents 11 Double-click Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 2 . 384 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and zoom in to view the urinals and toilets. and click (Duplicate). click the Color button. and place a section above the urinals and toilets as shown. h In the Line Graphics dialog. 12 On the View tab on the Design Bar. and click OK.

16 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify Wireframe. 19 Begin drawing the vertical pipe. 20 At a point above the toilets. click to make the connection to the vent as shown. and enter 1/8" /12" for slope. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 On the View Control Bar. then drag the preview to the right and when the center snap for the previously created vent displays. and on the Options Bar. and for Model Graphics Style. click to specify the end of the first pipe section. verify the (Auto Connect) is selected. for Detail Level. clear unwanted architectural components from the view as described previously.13 Double-click the section symbol to open the section view. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. Adding Vents to the System | 385 . click Pipe. and enter the keyboard shortcut VG. specify Fine. specify 2" for D (diameter). 18 Click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. 17 On the Options Bar.

c For D. and click OK. and click the + control to update the tee to a cross. e If necessary. The vent is automatically created and connected with the earlier vent pipe. d When the snap for the center line for the cross displays. draw the pipe to the left to the open leg of the cross. for Offset. specify 2". 24 Select the tee that was inserted when you connected the vents.21 Click Modify. and click to make the connection. b Begin the vertical pipe. under Instance Parameters. 386 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. enter 9' 6" to specify the elevation for the reference end of the pipe. press Tab to display the connector. 22 Right-click the new horizontal pipe. 25 Place another vent between the two rightmost urinals: a Click the midpoint of the pipe between the urinals. f Click Modify.

Plumbing to make it the active view. Adding Vents to the System | 387 . 27 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping. use the Flip control to make the adjustment.26 Double-click 3D .

specify 2" for D (diameter). and begin drawing a vertical vent pipe. 388 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . move the cursor into the drawing area. 30 While pressing Ctrl. and specify 9' 6" for Offset. click Draw Pipe. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. 33 Click Modify. then click Apply. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. specify 2" for D (diameter). and on the Options Bar. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. 31 Right-click the tee. 29 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. 32 On the Options Bar.Add a vent to the sinks 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast.

A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. Adding Vents to the System | 389 . 38 Select the horizontal vent pipe. click Draw Pipe. and on the Routing Modify toolbar. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. and click Finish. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe.34 Zoom out to view the vents from the toilets and urinals and the new vent from the sinks. 36 On the Options Bar specify 0" /12" for slope. (Slope). 37 Drag the pipe preview. 35 Select the vent. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. right-click the connector at the open end. click 39 Enter 1/8" /12" for slope.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click Standard 1.40 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 42 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Duplicate. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Cold Water Piping. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. 41 You can save the open file if you wish. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. right-click Standard. 4 In the Rename dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Rename. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 390 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rvt. click Properties. click the Training Files icon. enter Cold Water. for New. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Create the Cold Water System on page 390 to continue creating the plumbing system.

specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and double-click 2 . click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. for Name. click Branch. specify Tee For Tee. then click Duplicate. and click OK. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. specify Pipe Transition : Standard For Union. Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 19 In the Filter dialog. Create the cold water system 15 In the Project Browser. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter Hot Water. 21 On the Options Bar. click Check None. specify Pipe Straight Coupling: Standard 6 Click Apply. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. Create the Cold Water System | 391 . click Main. specify Pipe Cross: Standard For Transition.Plumbing to make it the active view. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. click Main.5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Mechanical Settings. click the floor drain. then select Plumbing Fixtures. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. and in the Name dialog. 16 Press F9 to open the System Browser. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. 9 In the table. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. specify None For Cross. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. which places the piping above the ceiling. and click OK twice. The default fittings for the hot water pipe are the same as those specified for the cold water pipe. click Branch. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. 11 In the left pane. specify Pipe Elbow : Standard For Preferred Junction Type. 14 Click OK. in the right pane. 10 In the left pane. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. in the right pane. You now have the cold water piping at 9' 3" and the hot water piping at 9' 0". and avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. click View ➤ Piping. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. specify Pipe Tee: Standard For Tap. 20 While pressing Shift. 12 In the table. 13 In the left panel. 18 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. and on the Options Bar click (Filter Selection). and in the right pane. 17 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. and in the right pane.

clear Casework. click (Connect Into). 34 Zoom in on the area between the middle and rightmost sink. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. 26 On the Options Bar. 30 Enter the keyboard shortcut VG. and on the Options Bar. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. click Pipe. 32 Select the middle sink in the view. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and click OK.The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. Create piping for the cold water system 22 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. specify 0" /12" for Slope. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. Piping is added to connect the sink to the cold water system. and click to end the run as shown. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. 24 On the Option Bar. 31 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. and in the Type Selector. 392 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. click OK. select the domestic cold water connector. 29 Click Modify. click Show categories from all disciplines. 33 In the Select Connector dialog. 35 On the Plumbing tab. and click to specify the end the segment. specify 2' 6" for Offset. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. click Pipe. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 23 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

43 Drag the preview to the left. and click Apply. 42 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe in the chase. (If necessary. press Tab. Create the Cold Water System | 393 . press Tab to avoid connecting to the sanitary piping. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. 44 On the Options Bar. 37 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. select the cold water pipe. 40 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. and click to end that segment. drag the preview into the center of the wall behind the sinks. 38 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. 39 Click Modify. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. click to specify the end of the pipe. click the snap on the cold water pipe. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. specify 9' 3" for Offset.36 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the sinks. specify 1' 2" for Offset.) 41 On the Plumbing tab. just above the wall.

click Pipe. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. click to specify the endpoint as shown. click Draw Pipe. 50 On the Plumbing tab. and then click the vertical cold water pipe.Plumbing. 394 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and when the center line for the left toilet displays. and click the + control to change it to a tee. 49 Select the elbow behind the toilet. 52 Drag the preview to the left while maintaining the same angle. select the rightmost toilet. 51 Select the tee. double-click 3D. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 46 In the Project Browser. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. right-click the open connector. 48 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). 47 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets.45 Click Modify.

. .53 Click Modify. Create the Cold Water System | 395 . and on the Options Bar click pipe. 55 Select the rightmost urinal. and on the Options Bar click water pipe that you added to the tee. and click the vertical cold water Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. 56 Use the same method. and click the horizontal cold Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 54 Select the leftmost toilet.

Adjust cold water pipe sizes 57 Use the View Cube in the upper-right corner of the view to spin the 3D .All of the cold water piping is in place.Plumbing view as shown. as shown. 58 Select the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. and the horizontal segment to the sinks. The final steps in this exercise adjust the size of several sections of the piping. 396 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . the tee.

62 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. Create the Cold Water System | 397 . specify 2" for D (diameter). 61 On the Options Bar. but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). 60 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. feeding the toilets and urinals (including the tees.59 On the Options Bar. as shown. 63 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). specify 1 1/2" for D (diameter).

65 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. create the hot water system. 398 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. Create the Hot Water System on page 398. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.64 On the Options Bar.rvt. click the Training Files icon. specify 3/4" for D (diameter). double-click 2 . and zoom in on the sinks.Plumbing. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Hot Water Piping. 66 You can save the open file if you wish. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

(Add to System). 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. and on the Edit 17 In the System Browser. 5 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. click System toolbar. and click Select. 10 Double-click Water Heater. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. 12 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click the Training Files icon.rfa. 16 On the Edit System toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. to the left of the main cold water pipe. expand Domestic Cold Water. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. and on the Options Bar. Create the Hot Water System | 399 . and click to place the water heater as shown. and click OK.2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. click Mechanical Equipment. click the title bar for the browser. The Edit System toolbar is activated. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. 14 In the System Browser. select Water Heater : 40Gallon. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). and in the Type Selector. select Plumbing Fixtures. click the water heater. click (Filter Selection). and click Select. click Finish. and click View ➤ Piping. click (Edit System). expand Domestic Hot Water. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left.

22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. click OK. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. click Draw Pipe. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. right-click the connector. specify 8' 6" for Offset. click (Connect Into). and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. and click the main cold water pipe. 23 On the Plumbing tab. add the water heater to the cold water system. 19 Using the same method. 20 Select the water heater in the view. click when the hot water connector displays. and on the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. click (Edit System). and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. 400 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select the domestic cold water connector. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system.18 On the Options Bar. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. 25 On the Options Bar. click Pipe.

Create the Hot Water System | 401 .27 Click Modify. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. 28 On the Plumbing tab. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 33 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector. 31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. click Pipe. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. 30 On the Options Bar. specify 2' 8" for Offset. and click to specify the end of the segment. click to specify the starting point for the pipe.

39 Click Modify.34 Select the middle sink in the view. (Connect Into). 41 On the Plumbing tab. click Apply. 40 In the Project Browser. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. specify 2' 8" for Offset. click click the hot water pipe below the sinks. double-click 3D. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. and click to end that segment. 36 Right-click the open connector. and on the Options Bar. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. 402 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. click Pipe. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. 38 On the Options Bar.Plumbing. and In this case. click Draw Pipe. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.

44 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. double-click 2 . Create the Hot Water System | 403 .Plumbing.42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. 43 Click Modify. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. and click. 46 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close.

404 .

com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. 405 . you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. manually modify the pipes and fittings.autodesk. In this tutorial. you will understand the process.Fire Protection Systems 8 In this tutorial. Then. and select i Office Building. During the fire protection design process. and size and tag the pipes. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. As you create the systems. create schedules. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. However. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. if the link is lost. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model.rvt. go to http://www. methodology. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. However. and finally. insert fittings. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you create views and pipe types. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. By following the recommended workflow. If the tutorial datasets are not present. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2009. click Reload From. In this lesson. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. At the end of this tutorial. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you create a wet and dry fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. Designing Fire Protection Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. After finishing each exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. you can choose to save your work.

do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. 8 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. and click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Rename. Create new pipe types 1 In the Project Browser. Configure pipe conversion settings 10 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. click Mechanical Settings. 2 Right-click Standard. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. You create new pipe types. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 12 For System Type. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. for New. you create another pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. select Main. select Fire Protection Wet. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. click Duplicate. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. for Material. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter Fire Protection Wet. select Carbon Steel. and click Fire Protection. 5 In the Rename dialog. Next.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. you modify the pipe type properties. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. Next. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click the Design Bar. 11 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 406 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . including the new material property. 7 With the Type Properties dialog open. click the Training Files icon. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. Open the i Starting the Fire Protection Project. 13 Under System Type. Next. 9 In the Type Selector. and click Duplicate. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 3 Right-click the copy.

select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and specify Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry for the Main and Branch piping. select it. under Available fields. select Fire Protection Wet. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Create a Space Schedule 19 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under System Type. For Offset. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. or architectural components. select Spaces. 20 In the New Schedule dialog. 22 While pressing Ctrl. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. duct. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. for Offset verify 9' 0". Click OK. To remove a field. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 23 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. 15 For System Type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project.■ For Offset. 17 Using the same method. 18 Click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. verify that 9' 0" is selected. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 407 . for System Type Fire Protection Dry. ■ ■ Define columns 21 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. structural beams. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. However. and click Remove. So. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. verify that 9' 0" is specified. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. select Branch. select Area. and click Add. 14 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. do the following: ■ Under Category. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views.

verify that (none) is selected. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. 26 In the Calculated Value dialog. 30 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Type. 408 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select Minimum Sprinklers. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. For Formula. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For And. select Level 2. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. Verify that equals is selected.24 Select a field. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 130 square feet. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each space. 27 Click OK. enter Area/130. For Field formatting. 29 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. select Level. verify that Common is selected. Organize the data 28 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that Number is selected. verify that (none) is selected. Create a calculated value parameter 25 Click Calculated Value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Number. click Field Format. Under Level. Verify that Formula is selected. For Then by. For Discipline.

For Rounding. A new view called Space Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).31 In the Format dialog. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. For Units. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Finally. Notice that only the data for the level 2 spaces displays. 32 You can save the open file if you wish. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. Click OK twice. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. you created a Space Schedule for fire protection systems. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. In this exercise. you created new views and modified view properties. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. sorted according to space number. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 409 . Although you rounded the data to 2 decimal places. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per space data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 spaces. As a result. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. you place the wet system sprinklers. select Fixed. select 2 decimal places. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Next. In the next exercise. Placing Sprinklers on page 410.

When this happens. select Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 1/2" Pendent.Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Enter ZR. As you place the sprinklers.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. 5 On the Options Bar. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the spaces on level 2. After placing the initial sprinkler. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. click Sprinkler. 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. When there is a small misalignment. Open the i Placing Sprinklers. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. and double-click 2 . You will use the schedule that you created in the previous exercise to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. 410 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click the Training Files icon. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion or a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. and sketch a zoom region around Office 201 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). Place a sprinkler 1 In the Project Browser. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.

Placing Sprinklers | 411 . 7 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. and click to place the sprinkler. click (Copy). Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 10 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tile as shown. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. and that Copy is selected. You copy this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). Continue placing sprinklers 8 In the drawing area. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. The selected sprinkler displays in red. select the sprinkler that you placed. 11 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid.6 With the view zoomed. and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy start point.

Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection.12 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. click to specify the copy end point. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. 412 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and after the intersection snap displays. The copy selection border follows the cursor. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps).

17 In Office 201. and select Multiple.A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. click to specify the copy start point. Copy and array sprinklers 13 Zoom out to view the region around Office 201 and Office 202 (Office 202 is located immediately below Office 201). 16 On the Options Bar. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 202. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and after the intersection snap displays. Placing Sprinklers | 413 . 14 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 201. verify Constrain is cleared. 15 On the Edit toolbar. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. click (Copy). Copy is selected. Next.

18 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 202. 414 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays.

Placing Sprinklers | 415 . click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler.19 Move the cursor directly down. and after the intersection snap displays.

The sprinklers are placed. 416 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

you can use the Array tool to finish the job. For Move To. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. it is an ideal situation to use an array. Placing Sprinklers | 417 . click (Array). Next. 21 While pressing CTRL. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). Furthermore. 22 On the Edit toolbar. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 202. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. because all of the sprinklers in Office 202 are equally spaced. you array the other Office 202 sprinklers. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Verify that Constrain is cleared. Clear Group And Associate. select Last.20 On the Design Bar.

then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). An outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. click to specify the array start point. and after the intersection snap displays. 418 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. to specify array end point. You first specify an array start point. 24 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 202 sprinkler. creating an array is a 2-step process. click to specify the array end point as shown. 25 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. and after the intersection snap displays.

Placing Sprinklers | 419 .The Office 202 sprinklers are placed.

A border displays around the selected sprinklers indicating the copy selection. 28 On the Edit toolbar. click (Copy). 420 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . you place sprinklers in Office 203. 30 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. and after the mid point snap displays. 26 Zoom out to view all 3 offices along the left wall.Next. select both sprinklers in the corner office (Office 201). clear Multiple. click to specify the copy start point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 29 On the Options Bar.

click to specify the copy end point. and after the mid point snap displays.31 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 203. Placing Sprinklers | 421 .

enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps. 422 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap.

Open 204. you place sprinklers in the large common space. 34 Select the lower-right Office 203 sprinkler. 35 On the Edit toolbar. Placing Sprinklers | 423 .You have now placed the sprinklers for 3 offices. Open 204. 37 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. click (Copy). 32 Click Modify. 36 On the Options Bar. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 33 Zoom in to view Office 203 and part of the adjacent common area. verify that Multiple is cleared. Next. You copy this sprinkler to Open 204 and use it to create a sprinkler array.

41 On the Edit toolbar. 40 Select the sprinkler that you copied. 43 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. 42 On the Options Bar. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. select 2nd. enter 6 for the number of arrays. For Move To.38 Move the cursor to the right into Open 204 as shown. 424 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. click to place the sprinkler. Next. and after the intersection snap displays. The Office 203 sprinkler is copied to Open 204. You could copy sprinklers. but creating an array is quicker. 39 Click Modify. click (Array). you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 204. Verify that Constrain is cleared. For Number.

Placing Sprinklers | 425 . click to specify the array end point as shown.44 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. and after the intersection snap displays. The array is created. Zoom out to display the array.

you create multiple arrays based on this array. and after the intersection snap displays.IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. click to specify end point for the second array. Next. verify that 2nd is selected. enter 4 for number of arrays. click (Array). 426 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . undo the step and try again. 46 On the Edit toolbar. 47 On the Options Bar. 48 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler as shown. Verify that Constrain is cleared. 49 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. select all the sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler in the Open 204 space. 45 While pressing CTRL. If you make a mistake placing the array. For Number. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. For Move To.

and click Delete Checked to delete the 3 sprinklers. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles).The arrays are created. 51 Expand the 3 Warnings. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 204 is complete Placing Sprinklers | 427 . Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. click Expand. 50 In the Revit MEP 2009 dialog. click the check box associated with each warning. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors.

click Edit Family on the Options Bar. Place non-hosted sprinklers 55 In the Project Browser. click to place the sprinkler. The sprinkler family loads into the project. you need to load them in the project. 57 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. and double-click 2 . 428 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . To modify a family type. select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright. Load a new sprinkler family 52 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. 58 In the Type Selector. 59 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. Because this space does not have a ceiling. move the cursor to the approximate center of the space. However. 54 Open the Sprinkler -Upright. first. you will use a non-hosted sprinkler. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor.Next. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser.rfa file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder.Fire Prot to make it the active view. click Sprinkler. 56 Enter ZR. 53 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). and click Modify. you place a sprinkler in the Mechanical/Electrical space. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical space (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms).

do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. then click the wall face of the lower wall. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. click Dimension. and notice that the sprinkler displays in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 64 On the Design Bar. double-click 2 . and press Delete. Placing Sprinklers | 429 .The sprinkler is added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the 2 . and click Element Properties. Do not click the vertical line that displays as the reference. 60 Right-click the sprinkler. 66 Click to center the sprinkler between the upper and lower wall. as shown.Ceiling Fire Prot view. and when a dot displays click to specify the center. 67 Select the dimension. and because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. NOTE Click the center of the sprinkler. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. under Instance Parameters. select Wall Faces 65 Click the upper wall face. Unconstrain the sprinkler when deleting the dimension. Next you adjust the offset. and move the dimension to the left. 63 In the Project Browser. 62 Click OK. and on the Options Bar.Ceiling Fire Prot. enter 10' 6". for Offset. click the center of the sprinkler.

complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. Round decimals up to the next whole number. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. NOTE Do not place sprinklers in the stairwell or Server Room 215. You will create a Fire Protection Dry System in Server Room 215 in a later exercise. Use sprinkler type: Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 1/2" Pendent for all rooms. then click Modify. center the sprinkler between the right and left walls. Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 69 Using the placement methods that you have learned.68 Using the same method. Click to place the sprinklers on ceiling tile faces. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. 430 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

and click (Filter).70 In the Project Browser. then select Sprinklers. 73 You can save the open file if you wish. click Check None. double-click 2 . Placing Sprinklers | 431 . (Pin) 72 In the Filter dialog.Fire Prot. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click to prevent further movement of the sprinklers that would cause misalignment. and on the toolbar. 71 Draw a pick box around the entire model.

you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and physically with piping. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. 432 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. and double-click 2 . 75 Proceed to the next exercise. Unlike logical connections (systems). After creating the logical connection. Open the i Connecting Sprinklers. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Then you simplify the layout using tools from the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar to modify pipe branches after converting the initial layout to piping. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. In this exercise. Connecting the Sprinklers on page 432. However. 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise.74 Click File menu ➤ Close. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.Fire Prot to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click OK. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. then press F9. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. As you assign sprinklers to systems. click Check None. 7 In the Filter box. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. click in the drawing area to make it active. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. Connecting the Sprinklers | 433 . select Sprinklers. All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 203 and Office 211. If the System Browser does not respond.Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and display pinned and in red. 8 On the Options Bar. click System Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.

11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. right-click Fire Protection Wet. press Tab. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. and select the system or select the Fire Protection Wet 1 again in the System Browser. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. place the cursor over a sprinkler. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. expand Piping. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers.The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. all of the sprinklers in the system have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. In the System Browser. 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. select an initial piping layout. and click Select. Next. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. 434 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. and a piping layout preview displays. named Fire Protection Wet 1. The Layout Paths tools are activated on the Design Bar and Options Bar.

This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2.NOTE The is selected. enter -12' 0". click Settings. click Solutions. For Offset. verify that 6"150 mm is specified for D. and on the Options Bar. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 435 . 20 Zoom in on the stairway at the right side of the model. and for Offset. and click to place the base component as shown. select Branch. these settings will convert the base component to a 6" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. verify that Main is selected. 22 On the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. click Place Base. click Solutions. and on the Options Bar. 14 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. (Layout Path) button is available on the Options Bar whenever a system component 13 On the Design Bar. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 21 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the stairwell. 17 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 15 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. Click (Previous Solution). do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 23 On the Design Bar. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 18 Click OK. The layout path solution displays. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right keyboard arrow keys. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and select solution 4. When the layout is finished.

the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction.Next. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. click Modify. 26 Select the vertical layout path segment. 25 Zoom in on the vertical main. In general. A (parallel movement control) displays. 436 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. Modify the layout 24 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. you modify the selected layout.

and midway between the sprinklers above the office as shown. Connecting the Sprinklers | 437 . 28 Select the horizontal branch pipe to the lower sprinkler in Office 211.27 Drag the parallel movement control to the left to a point to the right of the doorway for Office 216.

(tee junction control) down to the intersection with the main piping just below 32 Scroll to the left. (elbow junction control) The piping for Office 203 is reconnected to the branch in the open area. as shown. select the horizontal branch again.29 Drag the parallel movement control down until the pipe merges with the horizontal piping to the left. and drag the down to merge it with the horizontal piping below. feeding the sprinkler in Office 203. 31 Drag the it. 30 Select the horizontal branch pipe. 438 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

as shown. 35 On the toolbar. 36 Select the horizontal branch feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. whenever there is a branch feeding a single sprinkler. click (Thin Lines). However. So far. Thin lines make it easier to see the various drag controls when using junction and elbow controls. You can make many of these modifications using the Layout Paths tools. In general. you have been using parallel movements to combine piping. Drag the lower branch piping up to merge it with the branch piping. Next you combine the piping for the sprinklers in Office 216 by dragging each end of the pipe separately. there are situations where you must make modifications outside of the Layout Paths. 34 Select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in the left office. 37 Drag the (tee junction control) up to the intersection of main and the branch above. Connecting the Sprinklers | 439 .33 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. it is an opportunity to merge the piping into a shared branch.

All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.38 Select the horizontal branch again. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. or manually modify the pipe. or that offset elevations are incorrect. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. (elbow junction control) up to combine 39 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout. 440 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and drag the the branch piping.

as shown. 41 On the Options Bar. then continue drawing the pipe up to connect the sprinkler. 43 Press Delete. and click the horizontal pipe feeding the sprinkler 47 Drag the open end of the main piping up to connect with the horizontal piping as shown. including the cross and transitions from the main piping. (Connect Into). click draw pipe. and verify that (Auto Connect) is selected on the Options Bar. click to specify the end point. clear Sprinklers. 42 In the Filter dialog. click in Office 211. 44 Select the horizontal pipe. draw a pick box to select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. click (Filter). on the Options Bar. right-click the connector at the open end. 45 Draw the pipe to the right and when the snap below the sprinkler in Office 211 displays.Continue combining piping 40 Zoom in on Office 211. as shown. 46 Select the sprinkler that was disconnected in the open area when the piping was deleted. and the sprinkler in the open area. Connecting the Sprinklers | 441 . and click OK.

Reconnect the sprinklers in Office 214 and 216 52 Select the vertical pipe in Office 216. 51 Press Delete. including the pipe and the tee as shown. as shown. and drag the connector to the right to connect with the vertical pipe as shown. 50 While pressing Ctrl. and drag the top connector up to connect with the horizontal piping in the open area. 49 Draw a pick box around the horizontal piping and fittings between the sprinklers in Office 216 and the main in Server Room 215. and press Delete. select all the piping to the 2 lower sprinklers in Office 214. 53 Select the horizontal pipe in Office 216.48 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. 442 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

Drag the preview down. and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the horizontal pipe. verify that (Auto Connect) is selected. ■ Continue dragging the preview down until aligned with the 2 lower sprinklers. 55 On the Design Bar.54 Zoom in on the office in the lower-right corner. Click Modify. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click to specify the end point for the pipe. and click to make the connection to the sprinkler. click Pipe. then drag the preview to the connector snap on the right-most sprinkler. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 443 . Click the horizontal pipe between the left wall of Office 214 and the upper-left sprinkler.

and on the toolbar click 57 Click each of the open-ended pipes. (Trim/Extend). click (Connect Into).■ Select the sprinkler to the left. On the Options Bar. ■ Reconnect the piping for Office 214 to the main 56 Zoom in on the open piping above Server Room 215. 444 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and click the horizontal pipe as shown.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and select the tee fitting connecting the main to the upper horizontal branch piping. The entire system should be highlighted. and double-click the 2 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. In this exercise. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 445 .Fire Prot view. you add the sprinklers in the upper half of the model to the existing wet system. Check pipe connectivity 59 Highlight a pipe in the main for the system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. 60 You can save the open file if you wish. Next. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 61 Click File menu ➤ Close. and then you create piping to physically connect them. 2 Zoom in. In the next exercise. checked connectivity. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System on page 445. click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. and press Tab twice. After creating the system. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. 58 Click Modify.An elbow is inserted to complete the connection. indicating connectivity throughout the system. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. you create the dry fire protection system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the i Completing the Wet System. and converted pipe fittings.

3 Click the plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a cross. select a pipe segment. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. The Edit System toolbar displays providing system editing tools. air terminals. and so on) are logically connected by a system. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. you can select the pipe or duct. radiators. and AC units. such as VAV boxes. mechanical equipment. fitting. boilers. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. system equipment. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. or sprinkler in the current wet system.Fire Prot view. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). 446 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 5 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. System tools display on the Options Bar. 4 In the 2 . The cross provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the upper half of the model. and number of elements in the system. and pipe or duct is created. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).

You cannot select them. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. verify that None is specified. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. 8 Place the cursor outside Office 201 in the upper-left corner of the building. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 447 . 9 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add To System).6 On the Edit System toolbar. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). click 7 On the Options Bar. For System Equipment. Select Multiple. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. verify that 30 is specified. For System Name. This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. For Number of Elements.

Number of Elements now displays as 65 (sprinklers) in the system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. On the Options Bar. solution 1 3. 10 NOTE When you use multiple selections. for Solution Type. click Finish to finish your selection of the sprinklers being added to the system. and click Modify. 11 On the Edit System toolbar. select Network. verify that Solutions is selected. 14 On the Options Bar. (Layout 448 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Paths). click Finish to finish editing the system. 13 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. you must click Finish on the Options bar to complete the selections. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay.The selected sprinklers display in red. 12 Select a sprinkler in the upper half of the model. On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. This is separate from the Finish for the System Editor.

16 Select the vertical pipe to the lower sprinkler in the corner office (201). and drag the tee junction control to the intersection to the left as shown. 17 Select the vertical branch again. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 449 .The layout automatically provides a path from the upper layout to the cross created earlier. and drag the elbow junction control to the left to combine the branch piping as shown. 15 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the model.

The piping for the upper half of the model displays. as shown. The tee junction control will stop at the junction of the tee from the main piping. 450 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Click the tee junction control again and continue the adjustment. 19 Using the same method. 20 On the Design Bar. drag each end of the branch to the left to combine it with the piping to the sprinkler just to above. click Finish Layout.18 Scroll to the right and select the branch to the lower-right sprinkler in Office 208.

Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. 22 You can save the open file if you wish. and the pipes for this system would not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. In this exercise. In an actual dry system. As with the wet system. you added the remaining wet system sprinklers and logically connected them to the existing system. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System on page 451. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. it is enough show how the system is created without adding a valve. and press Tab 3 times. The entire system should be highlighted. and checked connectivity. indicating connectivity throughout the system. In the next exercise. a valve would isolate the dry system from the wet system. After creating the system. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 215. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Check pipe connectivity 21 Highlight the pipe from the riser in the stairwell. you create the dry fire protection system. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. For this exercise. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 451 .

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. Open the i Creating the Dry System. 1 In the Project Browser. If necessary. and double-click 2 . 452 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place sprinklers 2 Zoom in to view the 3 spaces at the bottom of the model. click the Training Files icon.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. press Tab until the sprinkler displays on the status bar at the lower left corner of the window. Be careful to select only the sprinkler. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 216.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 453 . then move the cursor diagonally to the upper-right. click to specify the copy start point. 5 On the Options Bar. along the same horizontal ceiling grid. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. 8 Click Modify. and click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. as shown.4 On the Edit toolbar. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. 7 Move the cursor to the right into Server Room 215. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. Verify that Copy is selected. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. click (Copy). Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling.

This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. click Pipe. 454 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . verify that 1/2" is selected.Pendent . click System Browser. click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign the sprinklers to it. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. 17 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Create the dry system 9 While pressing CTRL. Confirm and validate the system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.Fire Prot to make it the active view. enter 1/8" / 12". 16 Zoom in on Server Room 215. double-click 2 . and click Select The selected system displays in red.Next. verify that 9' 0" is specified. For Offset. 18 In the Type Selector. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. Create the dry system piping 15 In the Project Browser. select Sprinkler .Hosted : 1/2" Dry Pendent. 19 On the Options Bar. you change the sprinkler type. select both Server Room 215 sprinklers. 11 On the Options Bar. The System Browser opens. 13 In the System Browser. 14 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category.Dry . 10 In the Type Selector. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. For Slope. The system is created and listed in the System Browser. Verify that Auto Connect is selected.

22 Continue to draw the pipe to the left and. when the snap for the lower-left sprinkler displays.20 Click the horizontal pipe directly above the upper-right sprinkler. to specify a starting point for the piping 21 Draw the pipe preview straight down to a point even with the lower-left sprinkler. Do not connect to the upper right sprinkler. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 455 . and click. as shown. click to connect the pipe.

and clear a check mark from any category. click All. on the Model Categories tab. 24 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show categories from all disciplines. and zoom in on the dry fire protection system.23 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. 28 Clear Show categories from all disciplines. 456 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. You can confirm this in the 3D view or by checking connectivity. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. and click View Properties. click Edit. select any category. All categories are selected except the Lines category. under Instance Parameters. The pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper-right sprinkler. and double-click 3D. Next. as shown. Only the sprinklers and piping are visible in the view. click None. 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Click OK twice. click All. expand Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 3D Views. All categories are cleared. 25 Right-click an empty area in the drawing area. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and clear the Lines category.

and all pipe fittings are automatically added. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. To follow good design practice. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. 32 Zoom the view. click . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 457 . and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. The slope value displays next to the slope control. 31 On the Options Bar. You can click the slope control to change the reference end for the slope. The sprinkler connects into the pipe.30 Select the unconnected sprinkler.

36 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You have completed the dry fire protection system. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. you placed dry system sprinklers. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. and double-click 2. Then. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. highlight a pipe segment in the dry system. and press TAB 3 times. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. First.Fire Prot to make the view active. TIP When you tile 2 views. Additionally. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. 2 If necessary. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows.Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 33 Zoom out to display the entire model. 3 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D to make the view active. Open the i Modifying Pipe Diameters. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. indicating that they are connected. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 458 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . the active view is tiled to the left. Modifying Pipe Diameters on page 458. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. checked pipe connectivity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 215. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

Fire Prot view. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 6 The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. width. 8 In the Filter dialog. In the 2. Changing the diameter. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. click . or height. NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 459 . or width. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. height. it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection piping. width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations.You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. and click OK. click Check None. 7 On the Options Bar.

460 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 11 Select any pipe segment and verify the 1 inch diameter on the Options Bar. for D: (diameter). select the supply pipe in the stairwell. zoom in on the supply pipe in the stairwell. All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 1 inch diameter except for the supply piping. select 1". verifying that it is connected. 10 On the Options Bar. and press TAB twice. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. the elbow and the horizontal pipe to the main piping to remove them from the selection. 12 Place the cursor over a main pipe segment. and while pressing SHIFT.9 Click in the 3D view to make it active.

NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments.Modify the diameter of the main 13 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection. TIP If you have difficulty selecting piping segments without moving the linked architectural model. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. select the model. click (Pin) to prevent the linked model from moving. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 461 . If branch segments are selected. and on the toolbar.

draw a pick box around the horizontal main. and the supply pipe. the pipe fittings.14 With the main selected. 462 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . while pressing CTRL.

17 In the 3D view.The main piping is selected and displays in red. select Fine. and for Model Graphics Style. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 463 . Sprinklers Serviced 1. 19 Validate the pipe run geometry. 18 On the Options Bar. use the pipes and pipe fittings. (Filter) to select only 16 Double-click the 3D view. The following table shows the pipe diameter that will be used for each branch in the fire protection systems. select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for D. 15 On the Options Bar. for Detail Level. and on the View Control Bar. Modify the diameter of branch pipes 20 The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select Shading with Edges. especially around the pipe fittings. for D: 6". NOTE If you select sprinklers with the pipes and pipe fittings. select the tee connecting the supply piping to the main. 2 3 4.

26 Select the next pipe segment and tee to the right. 24 Select the pipe segments and fittings that connect Office 214 and 215 directly to the main as shown. 23 On the View Control Bar. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. Be sure to include the tee at the right end of the pipe run in your selection. select Fine and for Model Graphics Style. for Detail. The pipe diameter is modified. for D:. 464 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select 2". and the 2 dry sprinklers in Office 215). 22 Enter ZR. You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the requirements. and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 offices in the building. select Shading with Edges. The specifications requires a diameter of 2" for this pipe segment.21 Click in the 2 .Fire Prot view to make it active. This piping services 6 sprinklers (4 in the corner office. 25 On the Options Bar.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 465 . select 1 1/2". It’s easier to select the fitting above the first sprinkler in this branch from a 3D view. Next. 29 Select the pipe and tee that connects the first sprinkler on the branch. you continue to modify the pipe branch. and on the Options Bar. for D: select 1 1/2".This segment services 4 sprinklers. zoom in on the piping to Office 216. for D:. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 Double-click 3D to make it the active view.

for Pipes. for D: select 1 1/4". They display only in the view in which they were placed. 35 Click OK. 466 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 33 On the Options Bar. click to place the tag. NOTE Tags are view specific. select Leader. 38 Place the cursor over the vertical supply pipe in the stairwell. zoom in on the branch that you modified in the preceding step. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. verify that Pipe Size Tag is loaded.30 Select the segment and fitting to the remaining sprinklers on this branch. 37 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tag the pipes 31 In the 2 Fire Prot view. under Category. Clear Leader. you place a tag and include a leader line. 32 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Next. press Tab until the pipe is highlighted place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. and after the segment highlights. 36 Place the cursor over the first pipe segment that connecting the branch to the main. Click Tags. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 34 In the Tag dialog.

5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 467 . Sprinklers Serviced 1. and finish tagging the pipes. Next. 2 3 4.39 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). and finish placing the pipe tags. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. 40 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 41 For more practice use the methods that you learned in this exercise to finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria.

The completed fire protection system is included in the i Completed Fire Protection System. For additional practice. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. You added tags the pipes. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. You can save the open file if you wish. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. In this tutorial. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. 468 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.42 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. In this exercise. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close.

you use the Family Editor to modify and create tags and annotation symbols. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Steam. including power. The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Revit MEP Content The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. In the third lesson. and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. In this tutorial. you create a new lighting fixture and 2 pipe fittings. it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline. you begin by modifying existing families to create new types. as after this selection is made. pipe fittings. Revit MEP operation and the behavior of your components depends to a great extent on how you create specific components. alarm systems and others. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family. Although the exercises in this tutorial describe settings that are specific to a particular 469 . Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections.Creating Revit MEP Content 9 This tutorial expands your knowledge of the Family Editor by introducing several unique features in Revit MEP. not only for the geometry. telephone. After learning to modify an existing family. Before using this tutorial. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. Pipe connectors are used for piping. ■ ■ NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. duct fittings. but also to understand how the settings in the Family Editor affect the family. medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Family Editor Creating a family requires careful thought. ■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids. you should have a working knowledge of Revit MEP and experience with the actual components that you will be modeling.

Create formulas for parameters. for Discipline. there are times when it is best to create a new family instead of attempting to create a single family with types to address every application. Modifying Families In this lesson. electrical. for Rounding. If you can find a component that is similar to the family that you want. You can create a component from scratch. and for Current. click the Training Files icon. For example. select 1 decimal place. and click OK. and then load it into the project. you may want to create multiple types within the existing family instead of creating a new family. open it in the Family Editor. select Electrical. it is easier to modify a component. modify it as needed.Downblast . 4 In the Project Units dialog. click the Format column. navigate to a folder of your choice. and save the family as Exhaust Ventilator . The process you use to create the family will determine how a part flexes as geometric parameters are modified. At times. Set project units 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 6 Click OK to close the Project Units window.Downblast. Place connectors. Save a copy of the family 1 Click File ➤ Save As. There are several ways to create a family with the Family Editor. If a family you are creating is very similar to an existing family. Finally. 5 In the Format dialog. Map parameters Create multiple types within a family. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the heat released by a light fixture affects the cooling requirements for a space. Modifying a Fan Family In this exercise you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modify an existing family. instead of creating a new one. Define shared parameters. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor Exhaust Ventilator . 7 Save the family. it is important to recognize how components interact to affect the overall design. 2 In the Save As dialog. although it may be easier to modify an existing family.rfa.rfa. In the left pane of the Open dialog.mechanical. you modify existing components to create new types and build custom component families. 470 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . You can modify an existing component. or plumbing component.

click New. and click OK. under Groups. and click Select. and click OK. enter Common For Type. 14 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click Select. you will be prompted to choose a file from another project or to create a new file. select the Electrical Engineering. 11 If you have not already created a shared parameter file. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click OK. 23 In the Family Types dialog. create additional shared parameters with the following properties: Name Voltage Motor FLA Power Phase Number of Poles Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Electrical Type Electrical Potential Current Power Integer Number of Poles 20 Click OK. NOTE The parameter values stored in the shared parameter file will remain after completing this tutorial. you must remove the shared parameter text file created in the previous step. enter Text 18 Click OK. Modifying a Fan Family | 471 . select Motor FLA. click Add. select the Shared parameter option. Shared_Parameters) for the shared parameter file. enter Motor HP For Discipline. click the Shared parameter option. click Add. To reuse this tutorial. and click Create. The new parameter is added to the Family Types dialog under the Electrical Engineering category. under Parameters. click New. 16 Under Parameters. select the Type option. Add shared parameters to the Family Type 21 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameters. 15 For Name. 24 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter MEP. 12 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 17 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 13 Browse to a folder. 19 Using the same method. enter a File name (for example. and click Save. Click Yes. under Parameters. for Group parameter under. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Family Types 9 In the Family Types dialog.Create Shared Parameters 8 On the Design Bar.

select Voltage. for Group parameter under. for Parameter Group.4 Motor HP = 1/6 The value for Power is calculated from the parameter values specified. enter the following formula: Voltage * Motor FLA * sqrt(if(Phase = 3. enter 1/6 HP . Create New Family Types 29 Under Family Types.3 Ph Voltage 208 208 460 Phase 1 3 3 Number of Poles Motor FLA 2 3 3 8. 32 Specify the following values for the shared parameters in the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage = 115 Phase = 1 Number of Poles = 1 Motor FLA = 4. select the Type option. 33 Using the same method.208 V . 31 Click OK.8 Motor HP 1 2 3 34 Click OK.8 7. 26 In the Parameter Properties. select Electrical Engineering.208 V . 35 Save the family. click New. under Parameters. 1)) NOTE Formulas are case sensitive… make sure you use the same case as the names of the parameters you created.1 Ph.1 Ph 2 HP . and click OK. create additional Family Types with the following parameter values: Name 1 HP .5 4. add the following shared parameters to the family type. 3. select MEP. 30 For Name.460 V .25 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 472 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .3 Ph 3 HP . under Parameter Data. 27 Using the same method.115 V . as defined below: Parameter Phase Number of Poles Motor HP Power Group Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Mechanical Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Type Type Type Type Create a parameter formula to calculate power 28 In the Formula column for Power. and click OK.

while pressing Shift. 38 On the Options Bar. system type. press Tab to cycle through the active faces until the narrow face at the base of the fan is highlighted. Connections between components in a power system must have connectors with the same.Balanced. click Electrical Connector. telephone.Add an electrical connector 36 Electrical connectors are used for a variety of electrical systems. including power. number of poles and the same voltage specified. TIP You can also hold the right mouse button. and dragging the cursor to spin a model. See Connectors on page 561. 40 Click Modify Modifying a Fan Family | 473 . 37 On the Design Bar. Click and drag the View Cube at the upper right corner of the view to spin the ventilator as shown. 39 Highlight the narrow face at the base of the fan housing and click to place the connector on the center of the face. Connectors can be placed on a Face or on a Work Plane. alarm systems and others. select Power . See Connector Placement on page 567. and verify that is selected. NOTE If necessary. The electrical connector that you add here will ultimately be used in a power system.

and on the Options Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. specify an associated family parameter for the following parameters: Parameter Number of Poles Apparent Load Associated (shared) Parameter Number of Poles Power 48 Under Electrical Loads. 53 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. click . and click OK. select Voltage. 59 Move the cursor into the drawing area and click to add the Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. It also demonstrates the use of shared parameters and parameter mapping. 44 On the Options Bar.rvt file. select 3 HP . 474 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The values should correspond to the values entered when you created the new family types.3 Ph. for Load Classification. click the Training Files icon. 54 Click Window menu ➤ Exhaust Ventilator . click Mechanical Equipment.) 60 Click Modify. Flex the part 51 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Load into Projects. 64 Save the family. and in the Type Selector.) Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family This exercise demonstrates using various settings on the electrical connector to define a fan powered box with variable power requirements for electric heat and motor size. in the = column. 58 On the Mechanical Design Bar. 56 The i Sample Project.rfa to make the family the active view. . click list.Map Parameter Values to Connector 41 On the Design Bar. 42 In the Family Types dialog.rvt. 55 On the Design Bar.Downblast. 52 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and observe the values in the Type Parameters 62 For Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 2 . 43 Select the Electrical connector created in the previous section. 50 Save the family. click Family Types. 49 Click OK. 57 In the Project Browser.Mech. for Voltage.rvt displays in the drawing area. select Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. (It is not necessary to save the i Sample Project. 63 Click OK.460 V . select 1 HP-208V-1 Ph. click 46 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. select HVAC. 61 Select the fan. for Name. and again observe the Type Parameter values. (The exact location is not important. 47 Using the same method.

For Type. and click Select. for Parameter group. 5 Click Family Types. select MEP. for Parameter group. 4 Click Yes when prompted to open the family for editing. 2 Select the VAV box. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog.Power. under Parameters. you will need to complete that exercise to create shared parameters that are used in this exercise. Open the family and create parameters 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. click New. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Electrical. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 475 . click the Training Files icon. See Modifying a Fan Family on page 470. select MEP. NOTE If you have not already completed the previous exercise. It this is not the case. 3 On the Options Bar. The MEP group was created in the Modifying a Fan Family exercise and the parameters created in that exercise are listed under Parameters. 6 In the Family Types dialog. 8 In the Shared Parameters dialog. For Discipline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Power. 9 Click Edit.rvt. go back and complete the previous Modifying a Fan Family exercise. select the Shared parameter option. and double-click 1 . click Edit Family. 10 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. enter Apparent Power Phase 1. 11 Under Parameters. click Add.

Instance parameters have (default) appended to the parameter name. and click OK 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Group parameter under. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Apparent Power Phase 2. 17 In the Family Types dialog. as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor FLA Motor HP Motor On Phase Number of Poles Phase Voltage Group parameter under Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Instance Instance Type Type Instance Type Type Type 22 In the Family Types dialog. click Add. select Electrical Engineering. 19 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameter Data. enter 480. Apparent Power Phase 1 is added as an instance parameter under the Electrical Engineering group in the Family Types dialog. verify that Size 2 . specify formulas for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Voltage. For Phase. for Group parameter under. select the Instance option. 15 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Apparent Power Phase 1. under Parameters.13 Using the same method.6 inch Inlet is selected for Name. 23 In the Formula column. 21 Using the same method. under Parameter Data. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. select the Shared parameter option. enter 3. and click OK. and click Select. add the following shared parameters to the family type. and click OK. 476 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select the Instance option. select Electrical Engineering. create the following additional shared parameters as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor On Phase Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Type Power Power Power Integer 14 Click OK.

enter 1. click new. enter 1. For Apparent Power Phase 3. Use the same case for the names in formulas as the names entered when you created the parameters. 28 Using the same method.2 5. For Motor HP.9 3. and specify the parameters for each size listed below: Name Number of Poles 3 3 3 Motor On Motor HP Phase (Default) 1 1 1 1/3 1/2 3/4 Motor FLA Size 4 – 10 inch Inlet Size 5 – 12 inch Inlet Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet 2. enter 1/6. and click OK. For Motor FLA. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 2.3.8 inch Inlet type: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. 27 In the Family Types dialog.rfa. 0 VA). 24 Under Electrical Engineering. enter Size 3 . Place connector and map parameters 31 Click and drag the view cube to spin the model around so you can see the controls box as shown.4 29 Click OK to close the Family Types dialog. 26 In the Name dialog. ■ ■ NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. 0 VA). enter 3. For Motor HP.6 inch Inlet VAV: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. enter 2. For Motor FLA. 30 Save the family as Parallel Fan Powered VAV. For Motor On Phase. 0 VA). specify the following parameter values for the Size 2 . enter 3. Motor FLA * 277 V. enter 1. Motor FLA * 277 V.■ For Apparent Power Phase 1. 25 Under Family Types. For Apparent Power Phase 2. in the Value column. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 3. For Motor On Phase. specify the following parameters for the Size 3 . enter 1/4. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 1.2. Motor FLA * 277 V.8 inch Inlet. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 477 . create additional types.

and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. ■ 478 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 33 On the Options Bar. specify values for the following parameters: ■ For Number of Poles. column. click in the column.Unbalanced. and click to add the connector on the face. click in the column. and click OK. For Apparent Load Phase 2. click in the Voltage. and click OK. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Number of Poles. select Power . click Electrical Connector. and click OK. 36 Select the connector. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and verify that is selected. click in the column. select ■ ■ For Apparent Load Phase 1. select Apparent Power Phase 1. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and on the Options Bar. click . 34 Highlight the large face on the controls box. select Apparent Power Phase 2.32 On the Design Bar. For Voltage. 35 Click Modify. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog.

click in the column.Unbalanced is selected. 43 Select the VAV box. For Load Classification. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. and double-click 1 . 48 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Select the VAV box. enter 3000. for Panel.■ For Apparent Load Phase 3. 49 Click OK. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ For Motor On Phase. select Apparent Power Phase 3. click (Edit Circuit on Panel). and 1000. .Power. verify that Power . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. for Type. ■ ■ 38 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog. 1000. and on the Options Bar. select Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet. and specify the following parameters: ■ For Motor On Phase. 51 Click OK. For System Type. enter HVAC.6 inch Inlet is selected in the Type Selector. enter 1. 52 Select the VAV box. and click . 42 In the Project Browser. The loads on phases A. click 44 Click (Create Power Circuit). 41 If prompted. 45 Click Modify. select panel HA. B. and C are 2512. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 479 . and on the Options Bar. For Electric Heat Power. 39 Save the family. Flex the family 40 On the Design Bar. 47 Verify that Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 2 . and click Yes. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. respectively. and click . enter 2. 50 Select panel HA. select Override parameter values of existing types.

60 Select the supply air connector. 57 Click OK. select Override parameter values of existing types. The loads on phases A. and in the drawing area. 64 If prompted. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. 54 Click OK. B. respectively. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Calculated is selected for Flow Configuration. and double-click 1 . and on the Options Bar click Supply Air System). under Mechanical. 62 Click OK. click . click the VAV box. and C have updated to 4819. Specify Flow Configuration for the VAV 58 Click Window menu ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV.Mech. click Load into Projects. When the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.rfa. click . as shown. 56 Select panel HA. and on the Options Bar. 63 On the Design Bar. Create a supply air system 65 In the Project Browser. (Create (Select Equipment for System). the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the aggregate air flow for the downstream components.■ For Electric Heat Power. 66 Select the 4 supply air terminals in the left room. 67 On the Options Bar. 4027. and click Yes. and 3667. and on the Options Bar. 55 Click Modify. select 480 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 11000. 59 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so you can see the air supply connector.

verify the following Main and Branch settings: Main ■ ■ For Duct Type. enter 6' 0". to select layout 6 of 6. click Design Bar. Ductwork is created for the selected solution.Round is selected. For Offset enter 9' 0". Branch ■ ■ ■ ■ For Duct Type. verify that Flex Duct Round : Flex . verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. 69 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. For Flex Duct Type. For Offset enter 9' 0". click Finish Layout.68 Click (Layout Paths). For Maximum Flex Duct Length. and click Settings. 70 Click OK 71 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. and on the Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 481 .

enter 300.4 specified for Flow and the other with 0.6 specified for Flow. and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is 600 CFM.72 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals—in this case 600 CFM (4 X 150 CFM). Using the combination of Preset and System settings on connectors lets you distribute flow according to the demands of a particular space. The Flow Factor parameter is specified as a value between 0 and 1.6 X 20 gpm). For example. and select Properties. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. a boiler may have its supply preset to 20 gpm (system supply = 20 gpm) and the connectors at 2 downstream zone valves set to System. and select Properties.4 X 20 gpm). The Preset and System settings for Flow Configuration are used together to allow specifying a percentage of the system flow to be allocated to each downstream component. 76 Click OK. 79 In the Element Properties dialog. and press Enter to modify the air flow for the air terminal. Because the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow. 74 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. 77 Double-click a tag associated with one of the air terminals supplied by the VAV. with the total for all downstream components equal to 1. 78 Again. the new sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is updated to 750 CFM. 482 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and the other would receive a flow of 12 gpm (0. In this case the first downstream zone would receive a flow of 8 gpm (0. 80 Click OK. When Flow Configuration is set to System the Flow Factor parameter is active. This allows specifying a different portion of the system flow to each downstream subsystem. 75 In the Element Properties dialog. 73 In the System Browser.6 inch Inlet VAV. but one with 0. expand Mechanical (1 systems) ➤ Supply Air ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV: Size 2 .

Surface. enter 240. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Electrical . insert. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 483 . 2 In the drawing area.Surface. enter 2. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorLighting and Appliance Panelboard . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view.Loads. The final section demonstrates how to load. Modifying Electrical Equipment In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the connector. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Number of Poles. click the Training Files icon.rfa. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. all instances of the family in a project will have the same factor. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .208V MCB . and then you use the new families in a project.rfa. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click OK.240V MCB . For Voltage. and in the following section you modify a 480V/3Ph primary transformer to create a 480V/1Ph to 240V/1Ph secondary transformer. you modify existing electrical equipment families to create new families. 81 Close the Family and Sample Project files. and connect components of the newly created families in a simple project. click . you must create 2 additional instance parameters for the component family. In the first section. 7 In the Save As dialog. Modify an existing panel family 1 In the Project Browser. you modify a 208V/3Ph panel to create a 240V/3Ph family. To create unequal percentages for several downstream subsystems.NOTE Because Flow Factor and Flow Configuration are properties of the connector. and then map the Flow Factor to the value specified for each instance of the component used in the project.

25 In the Save As dialog. enter 0' 10 1/2" For Width.rfa. 28 In the left pane of the Open dialog.8 Click File menu ➤ Close.NEMA Type 2.00 V. delete all of the remaining types. you create a new family type. Modify an existing transformer family 9 Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 3 kVA. enter 2. select 112. NOTE If the Electrical tab is not available on the Design Bar. for Name. 23 Click OK. click Electrical Equipment. verify that 15 kVA is selected. In the following sections. Next. Next. 19 Under Family Types. except for 15 kVA. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. 21 Under Electrical. and click OK. Notice that the new family type is selected for Name. 20 In the Name dialog. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Single Phase Transformer . and click Electrical.5 kVA. enter 0' 6 1/2" For Height. 11 Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorDry Type Transformers . enter 0' 8 5/8" NOTE You must enter 0 for the foot value. click Delete. Otherwise. 24 Click File ➤ Save As. 15 Using the same method. for Primary Number of Poles. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Length. 18 Click Apply. 17 Under Electrical.rvt. verify the following: ■ ■ Primary Voltage is 480. click New. click the Training Files icon. 484 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 12 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 16 In the Family Types dialog. you use the modified families in a project. you modify an existing family type.480-208-120V . for Name. click Family Types. Primary Number of Poles is 2. 14 Under Family Types.rfa.480V Primary. click the Training Files icon. 30 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the inch value will be applied to the foot value. Load the new panel and transformer families into a project 27 Click File menu ➤ Open. 13 For Name. right-click the Design Bar. 29 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. 22 Under Dimensions.

35 In the Type Selector.Surface.Power to make it the active view. 34 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. Test the new electrical equipment in a project 33 In the Project Browser. 36 Move the cursor over the wall. and click Open.240V MCB . click Electrical Equipment.rfa. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click Load. 32 In the Open dialog. NOTE The panel is a wall-hosted family—it can only be placed on a wall. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . TIP You can verify that the electrical families were loaded by expanding Families ➤ Electrical Equipment in the Project Browser. The new families are loaded into the project. and after panel snaps to the inside face of the wall.31 On the Options Bar.Surface : 100A. do the following: ■ Place a Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel on the wall to the right of the first panel. then while pressing CTRL. 37 Using the same method. and double-click 1 .240V MCB . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.rfa and Single Phase Transformer . click to place the panel on the wall as shown. navigate to the folder where you saved the new families.480V Primary. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 485 . You can also click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. TIP You can press Spacebar to rotate a family if placement seems difficult.

47 Click OK. Create a new distribution system 43 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. select 120/240 Single. For L-L Voltage. select 480.480V Primary : 15kVA transformer on the wall between the panels.Loads. verify that Single is selected. select 480 Wye. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. For Distribution System Types. 486 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . For Panel Name. Next. 44 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for Distribution Sys. select 480/277 Wye. For Wires. select 3. enter DP. A new row is added in the right pane. enter 480 Wye. for Panel Name. select the Single Phase Transformer. under Electrical . do the following: For Secondary Distribution System. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 46 In the right pane. 40 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 41 With the panel selected. select Distribution Systems.■ Place a Single Phase Transformer . you create a system to logically connect the panels to the transformer. click Electrical Settings.Loads. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Click Modify. Click OK. under Electrical . click ■ ■ ■ ■ . select 277. For Phase. enter T-LC. L-G Voltage. 45 Click Add. Create a system 39 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel. 48 In the drawing area. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 49 On the Options Bar.

click 60 On the Options Bar. For Panel.240V MCB . This indicates that the transformer is associated with that distribution system. ■ 57 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar.240V MCB . select DP. for Panel Name. do the following: ■ For Distribution Sys. under Electrical . select the transformer. enter LC. click to create a new circuit. Click . 61 Close the Simple Room without saving. This creates a logical circuit between the LC panel to the transformer.51 In the drawing area. 59 On the Options Bar. 52 With the transformer selected. Notice that 480 Wye is selected for Distribution Sys on the Options Bar. select 120/240 Single.Surface : 100A panel.Loads. 53 On the Options Bar. . click a new circuit. select T-LC. 55 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Modifying Electrical Equipment | 487 .Surface : 100A (LC) panel. 58 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 56 On the Options Bar. for Panel. do the following: ■ ■ (Create Power Circuit) to create Click (Select a Panel for the Circuit). and click OK. The DP panel is logically connected to the transformer 54 Click Modify.

(Model Graphics Style) ➤ Hidden Line.Toilet . and on the View Control Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 1 The toilet is a wall-hosted component. 5 On the Options Bar. click Pipe Connector. click (Temporary Hide/Isolate) ➤ Hide Element. select Sanitary.rfa. for System Type.Modifying a Water Closet This exercise demonstrates adding piping connectors to a water closet family and setting typical connector properties for domestic cold water and sanitary systems. click the Training Files icon. 488 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . so you must hide the wall in the view. click 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so it is oriented as shown.Wall Mount Flush Valve. However. and verify that is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the extrusion that represents the wall is visible in the view. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorCommercial . you will be working at the back of the toilet. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Select the wall.

6 Zoom in. highlight the round face. 9 If the arrow is pointing in toward the toilet bowl. 7 Click Modify. and move the cursor over the larger of the 2 round extrusions at the back of the toilet as shown. not the flow direction. 10 Click . 8 Select the connector. Modifying a Water Closet | 489 . click pointing away from the bowl. The connector direction determines the direction from which it will accept connections from other components. so that the connector direction is The arrow indicates the connector direction. and click to add the connector.

and click Modify. Select Allow Slope Adjustments For Fixture Units. enter 0 3/4".11 In the Element Properties dialog. . add a Domestic Cold Water system Piping Connector. 14 Select the connector. select In. 13 Using the same method. enter 0' 1 1/2". For Flow Direction. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Radius. click 15 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ to specify connector direction. Clear Allow Slope Adjustments 490 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 12 Click OK. select Out. in the location shown. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. For Flow Configuration. specify values for the following parameters: For Radius. select Fixture Units. enter 4. For Flow Direction.

■ ■ For Flow Configuration.Ceiling Mech. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 17 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. and in the Save As dialog. select a diffuser tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Toilet . click the Training Files icon. 2 In the drawing area. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family | 491 . For Fixture Units. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. enter 2. you modify a diffuser tag family to provide a type mark instead of the default instance mark. select Fixture Units.rvt. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.rfa. and double-click 1 . 18 Click File ➤ Save As.5.Commercial Wall Mount Flush Valve.

click Edit Family. select Mark. The sample text changes to 1t. and on the Options Bar. 492 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 6 Under Category Parameters. and click from label). and click Yes when asked to open the diffuser tag for editing. Each label is associated with a parameter. The Family Editor opens. click Edit Label. The diffuser tag is composed of two labels separated by a horizontal line. select Type Mark. under Label Parameters. 4 Select the top label (1i). 5 In the Edit Label dialog.3 On the Options Bar. and click 7 Click OK. (Remove parameter (Add parameter to label).

Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. and the return air diffuser type. S-1. you modify a light fixture tag family to include panel and circuit information. click Load into Projects.rvt. and click OK. 9 When prompted to overwrite the existing Diffuser Tag. in the Load into Projects dialog. select i Sample Project. The project becomes active and the diffuser tag updates to display the supply air terminal type.8 On the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. R-1. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. without saving. click Yes. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 493 . 10 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. If more than one project is open.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

2 In the drawing area. click Edit Family. and after listening dimensions display. 3 On the Options Bar. click Multiple. 8 Move the cursor straight down. 494 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 6 On the Options Bar. and double-click 1 .1 In the Project Browser. select the 1i label. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. The light fixture tag is composed of a label that is associated with a parameter. select a light fixture tag. click (Copy). and press Enter to specify the copy end point. 7 Click the midpoint of the label to specify the copy start point. 5 On the Edit toolbar. and click Yes when asked to open the light fixture tag for editing. enter 0 1/8".Lighting. 4 In the drawing area. The Family Editor opens.

The label is copied. 9 Repeat the previous steps to create a second copy of the label. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 495 .

Notice that the bounding box contains only the first label. 11 Select the bottom line of the box. Next. you modify 2 labels. and on the Options Bar. 496 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Edit Label. You need to modify this box. (Remove 15 Under Label Parameters. The sample value is the text that identifies this label in the Family Editor. The middle label text changes to PNL and the label is associated with the Panel parameter.10 Click Modify. 14 Under Category Parameters. 16 Click OK. select Panel. and drag it down so that the box contains all 3 labels. and click (Add parameter to label). under Label Parameters. select Type Mark. enter PNL in the Sample Value column. for the Panel parameter. 12 Select the middle label. and click parameter from label). 13 In the Edit Label dialog.

19 If prompted.17 Using the same method. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing are. modify the bottom label with the following Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Label Parameters. select i Sample Project. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 497 . enter CKT in the Sample Value column The 3 light fixture labels are as shown. Load the light fixture tag family into a project 18 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ Under Category Parameters. and click OK. and click (Remove parameter from label) (Add parameter to label).rvt. If more than one project is open. select Type Mark. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Load into Projects. and the light fixture tags update to display the panel and circuit information. and click For the Circuit Number parameter. in the Load into Projects dialog. and click Yes. select Circuit Number.

Creating Families In this lesson you learn how features of the Family Editor allow you to build custom component families. The hosting of a component is defined by the template used when the family is originally created. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. The process of creating a component family includes the following steps: 1 Select the appropriate family template. Templates also define the type of family (annotation. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. If you expect to render your lighting designs. without saving. or profile). 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. model. as they have reference 498 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. it is important that you start your lighting family with one of these templates. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. There are various light fixture family templates available in Revit MEP.20 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. For example. titleblock. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. In some cases. you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture. Creating a Light Fixture Family In this exercise you create an 8” ceiling hosted recessed downlight. the template also defines characteristics of how the family works. You cannot change these characteristics after you have created the family. 9 Save the newly-defined family.

select the Normal option Clear the Shared option NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. Spot Spread Angle. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. you may use a non-lighting family template.rft) lighting templates. The Linear template contains a model line representing the light source along the F/B axis.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. Tilt Plane. For generic (Lighting Fixture*. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. Create a new lighting family 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Lighting manufacturers often allow you to download . 6 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the Always Vertical option Select Light Source For Part Type. The . When you use a spot light template. select Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based.ies file. Light Source Axis (L/R). and double-click Front.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder).planes that define the location of the light source. select Lighting Fixtures.ies file. these planes are Light Source Axis (F/B).rft). and click Open. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. This file contains engineering data that can be used to calculate the coefficient of utilization of the fixture.rft) and linear (Linear Lighting Fixture*. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). and Light Source Elevation. such as Generic Model face based. 5 Under Family Category. you can also specify a . 3 In the New dialog. objects in the linked file. Spot Tilt Angle. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 499 . and move with. Locate IES data file 1 Using Windows Explorer. a spot fixture.rft. For spot light templates (Spot Lighting Fixture*. Using this face hosted family provides the ability for the fixture to be hosted by. the family will have the additional parameters: Spot Beam Angle.ies files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. Each family has additional parameters depending on whether it is a linear fixture. and wall hosted objects. (This is the location from which the .ies file is not used for rendering. This can be shortened or lengthened as necessary to model the linear lighting fixture. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.ies files from the Web for their fixtures. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\IES folder. 8 In the Project Browser. you must determine the correct path to the IES file as defined by the IESFileLocation parameter in the Revit. and Light Source Elevation. When working in a linked file environment. these planes are Light Source Axis (L/R). 7 Click OK. there are lighting templates for non-hosted. and copy the Ltl9815. ceiling hosted. Using the generic face hosted and non-hosted lighting fixtures has the limitation that the hosting geometry cannot be cut. or a generic fixture.rft. When creating a lighting family. Additionally.

and click OK. 500 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Define the fixture geometry 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Zoom in on the Light Source Elevation. and sketch the shape of the fixture as shown. 13 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. 11 In the Save As dialog. and drag it up to a point 4" above the Basic Ceiling and Ceiling Plane as shown. click . then draw a vertical line segment down to the ceiling (8"). 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 14 On the Options Bar.rfa. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and Chain. for File name. . enter 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. 9 Select the Light Source Elevation Plane.0" and zoom in very close to create the Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. specify 0' 0".TIP You may want set the scale to 6" = 1' . 4" above the Light Source reference plane. Start at the Center (Left/Right) vertical reference plane. click Lines. and finish with a 1" horizontal line segment to the left. and draw a 4" horizontal line to the left of the center. and for Offset.

NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the short horizontal line at the base. click just to the left of the vertical line and just above the lower horizontal line to define the thickness for the fixture as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. then click just above the line.Next you will duplicate the original outline. offset by 1/16" to define the thickness of the light fixture housing. 18 Click just above the upper horizontal line to add a line 1/16" above the existing line as shown. enter 1/16". 16 Click Lines. 19 Using the same method. move the cursor over the line. click . Creating a Light Fixture Family | 501 . press Tab to highlight the short line.

enter 0' 0". 22 Draw lines to close the outline at the top right and lower left as shown. and for Offset. clear Chain. click Lines. click and . 502 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 21 On the Options Bar.20 On the Design Bar.

and clean up the inside corner as shown. and sketch the axis line for the revolve as indicated below by the dark line. click (Trim). 24 On the toolbar. 25 On the Design Bar. click Axis. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 503 . The length of the line and its exact location are not important. 26 Click Finish Sketch.23 Click Modify. but make sure it is coincident with the vertical plane.

for Emit from Shape. and click OK. click Light Source Definition. click (Point).Lighting ■ For Calculate Coefficient of Utilization. click Family Types. 31 In the Family Types dialog. not grey) 504 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 29 In the Light Source Definition dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. click (Photometric Web). Define family and connector properties 28 In the drawing area. for Light distribution. select the (yellow) Light Source.27 Save the family. select true (green check. specify values for the following parameters: Under Electrical . and on the Options Bar.

and in the Initial Color dialog. and click OK. and click OK.Balanced. for Color Preset. Lighting objects in a space contribute to the room’s Average Estimated Illumination. and verify that (Place on Face) is selected. click the Value column. click Simple for Method. For Initial Color. This illumination is based on the lumen method using the total lumen output of the lighting fixtures in the room. For Initial Intensity. enter 3000 K and click OK. expand View (All) ➤ 3D Views. 34 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model to view the top of the fixture. click Electrical Connector. enter 3200. or a static value may be entered. and double-click View 1.Under Electrical Loads ■ For Apparent Load. enter 0. and is affected by the following fixture properties: ■ ■ ■ Coefficient of Utilization (Instance) Initial Intensity (Type) Light Loss Factor (Type) 32 Click OK. enter 44. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 505 .21 VA Under Electrical ■ For Lamp. and in the Initial Intensity dialog. click the Value column. enter 90 For Photometric Web File. enter CF42TRT Under Photometrics ■ ■ For Tilt Angle. and in the Light Loss Factor dialog.ies in the ■ For Light Loss Factor. select Power . for Color Temperature. and select Ltl9815.85 for Value. select <Custom>. click file browser . click Luminous Flux. 33 In the Project Browser. click the Value column. click the Value column. ■ ■ A fixture’s Coefficient of Utilization may be calculated based on the geometry of the space. 35 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.

it permits light to function as expected in renderings.Balanced is specified For Apparent Load. and click ■ ■ ■ . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. and click OK.) In the Project Browser. and double-click View 1. 44 On the Design Bar. enter Lighting ■ ■ 39 Click OK. . 40 Save the family Cut a hole in the ceiling 41 Next you cut a hole in the ceiling. (Light at the intersection of planes is able to pass through the ceiling. click ring as shown. 42 Spin the model to view the bottom of the ceiling. specify values for the following parameters: For Power Factor. 45 On the Options Bar. click in the column. enter 277 For Load Classification. verify that Power .95 For System Type. Although the hole is not necessary for construction documents. select Apparent Load from the list.36 Highlight the face at the top of the fixture. 506 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click and select Hide Element. select the connector. 37 Click Modify. click Opening. and on the View Control Bar. and select the 2 arcs that make up the outside edge of the trim (Temporary Hide/Isolate). enter 0. 38 In the Element Properties dialog. and in the Associated Family Parameter dialog. 43 Select the yellow Light Source. and click to place the connector on the top of the fixture. For Voltage.

52 In the Project Browser. The space tag indicates 22 fc and 135 W. and the wattage increases to 168. Flex the light fixture 49 Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit MEP provides a Flange Family | 507 . 51 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room.csv file. you learned: ■ ■ ■ (Temporary Hide/Isolate). and double-click 1 . 53 Click Window menu ➤ 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external . 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 55 Select the 4 downlights in the room. 48 Save the family. you will create a flange connector to model pipe flanges for model coordination. The flange will be based on a 150 pound pressure class slip on flange.rfa to make the family the active view. and in the Type Selector.On the View Control Bar. click Load into Projects.46 Click Finish Sketch. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. 54 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. select 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. and select Reset Temporary The basics of how lighting families work How to create a lighting family from a template Where to place IES files for use by lighting families Flange Family In this exercise.rvt. The new lighting fixture is loaded into the project. click Hide/Isolate. click the Training Files icon. and use a Lookup Table to define several sizes for the flange. click 47 On the View Control Bar. The lighting level increases to 33 fc.Ceiling Elec.

csv file defines multiple sizes for this flange.rfa. select Pipe Fittings. Create parameters 9 Click Family Types.csv file. and click OK. 4 Under Family Category. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. and in the Save As dialog.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. Clear the Shared option. When installed in the default path. select Generic Model. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. 7 Click File ➤ Save. select the Transition option.csv) file. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). (This is the location from which the LookupTable files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. and copy the Generic 150 psi Slip Flange.text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. For Part Type. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. verify that Family parameter is selected for Parameter Type and specify the following parameter data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Piping For Type. The Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. 8 Using Windows Explorer. enter NR For Discipline. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. Revit MEP looks in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables to retrieve size information. select Pipe Size For Group parameter under. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.ini file. 2 In the New dialog. select Dimensions Select Type 508 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 6 Click OK. See Lookup Tables on page 568 and CSV File Structure on page 569. 10 Under Parameters.rft. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Select the Always Vertical option. click Add. 5 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear the Work Plane-Based option.

"LenA2". ND) For D2. 15 Specify formulae for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ND. Level.12 Click OK.csv Click Apply. select Dimensions. and for Offset. LenA1. 0’. 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Click to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the right of the center line. enter LenA2 – LenA1 For D1. enter 0' 2". Select the Instance option 14 In the Family Types dialog. "D1". 0’. enter D1 / 2 For R2. D2. R1. LenA2. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. Flange Family | 509 . ND) For LenA1. "LenA1". ND) For LenA2. enter D2 / 2 For LenA3. enter 2" For Lookup Table Name = Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. and select 3” = 1'. LenA3. 23 Click again to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the left of the center line as shown.0". and double-click Ref. R2 and specify the following parameters for each one: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ For NR. ND. 19 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. For Type. select Piping. enter NR * 2 For R1. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. 0’. 13 Using the same method. ND) 16 Click OK. click . For Group parameter under. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. "D2". click Ref Plane. 21 On the Options Bar. create Instance parameters named D1. 17 Save the family. 0’. select the Family parameter option For Discipline. select Pipe Size. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. Define work planes 18 In the Project Browser.

510 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 28 On the Design Bar. 30 Create another dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Pipe (left) plane.24 Click Modify 25 Select the left plane and. enter Connector for the Name of the right plane. click Dimension. for Name. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Click Modify. click . enter Pipe. 27 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. click (Aligned). under Identity Data. 29 Create a dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Connector (right) plane.

click the Value column for Label. and on the Options Bar. and select 33 In the Element Properties. and select Not a Reference. click Model Lines. 48 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click . select the dimension between the left (Pipe) plane and Center (Left/Right) plane.32 Select the dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and right plane (Connector) and click . for Is Reference. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Save the family. click the Value column. 34 Using the same method. This option disables grips at the intersection of reference planes and specifies that the reference plane cannot be dimensioned to when you place a family into a project. Flange Family | 511 . and click OK. and on the Options Bar. under Other. 38 Click OK. click Object Styles. 47 Select the 3 model lines. and set the Projection Line weight of each category to 5. clear Fine. 36 Click . 42 Click OK twice. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane and the 3 vertical reference planes. 45 Draw a horizontal line on the horizontal plane. 41 On the Model Categories tab. under Other. click Visibility. 46 Click Modify. between the intersections with the right and left vertical planes as shown. clear Chain. and label it LenA2. click LenA1 from the list. The length is not important. 43 On the Design Bar. and 44 Draw a vertical line on both the left (Pipe) and the right (Connector) vertical reference planes. . but be careful to sketch them on the reference planes. Define geometry 40 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

create dimensions for the overall length of each vertical line. click Dimension. 52 On the Design Bar. 49 With all 3 lines still selected. press Tab to highlight the endpoint. move the cursor to the left. 57 On the Design Bar. 51 Click OK. create dimensions for the right vertical line.NOTE Piping objects generally show as linework in Coarse and Medium view. click . under Other. we shut off the linework in Fine view. 55 Click . 54 Select the horizontal reference plane. and on the Options Bar. click . click . 56 Using the same method. 512 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . from endpoint to endpoint. click Dimension. click the Value column. 53 Move the cursor over an endpoint on the left vertical line. for Reference. 58 Using the same method. and in Fine view the solid model elements are shown. and click to place the dimension. then select the other endpoint. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. and select Not a Reference. Thus. and click to specify the endpoint for the dimension.

click Radius. expand Elevations (Elevation 1). and enter 0' 5". and click OK.59 Click Modify. click and . 70 Click Modify. click 72 Select the dimension line. and in the drawing area. 64 On the Design Bar. click the Value column. 65 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. 67 Click Lines. and on the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 66 In the Work Plane dialog. under Other. for Label. 69 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. 71 Select the circle. 60 Select the dimension for the overall length of the left line. 68 On the Options Bar. . and select D2. under Other. select the dimension for the right line and label it D1. Create the first extrusion 63 In the Project Browser. 62 Using the same method. for Label. and double-click Left. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. click Set Work Plane. click . and select R2. specify Reference Plane : Pipe. click the Value column. Flange Family | 513 . and click .

and enter 0' 10". 76 In the Element Properties dialog. Create the second extrusion 81 On the Design Bar. 83 In the Work Plane dialog. under Constraints. clear Coarse and Medium. in the 86 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. for Visibility/Graphics.74 Click OK. 87 Click Modify. specify Reference Plane : Center (Left/Right). 79 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click OK twice. under Other. 77 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and in the drawing area. 84 Click Lines. 75 Click Extrusion Properties. select LenA2. . click the Value column. and click OK. 80 Click Finish Sketch. for Label. click Edit. 82 On the Sketch Editor tab on the Design Bar. 514 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click and . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click 91 Click OK. 88 Select the circle. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. click 89 Select the dimension line. 90 In the Element Properties. 85 On the Options Bar. for Extrusion End. click Radius. click column. . 78 Under Graphics. and select R1.

98 Save the family.92 Click Extrusion Properties. 97 Click Finish Sketch. Add connectors 99 In the Project Browser. verify that is selected.0". 96 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 105 Highlight the large diameter face of the flange. 103 On the Design Bar. where the 2 extrusions meet. for Visibility. and for System Type. click column. clear Coarse and Medium. (Model Graphics Style). click Edit. 95 Under Graphics. click Pipe Connector. under Constraints. Flange Family | 515 . for Extrusion End. expand 3D Views. 101 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 104 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. 100 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. click extrusions. select LenA1. 94 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Fitting. and double-click View 1. 93 In the Element Properties dialog. and select 6” = 1'. and select Wireframe to view both in the 102 Spin the flange to view the face of both extrusions as shown.

for Radius. click . enter 5". 110 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click and. 107 Click Modify. if necessary. 516 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . under Dimensions. 109 With the connector selected. 108 Select the connector. to change the direction of flow.106 Click to add the connector. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face.

Flange Family | 517 . add a connector to the larger extrusion. 112 Click Pipe Connector.111 Spin the flange to view the back of the larger extrusion. and using the same method.

click . under Dimensions. to change the direction of flow. You then create single line geometry for the elbow. 114 Select the connector. 120 Save the family Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family In this exercise. test the fitting geometry. you create an elbow pipe fitting family. select NR. and set the object visibility. and by defining fitting size parameters. click Link Connector on the Options Bar. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. and click OK twice. 118 In the Element Properties dialog. and click the second connector. you create the physical fitting geometry by using reference planes and lines. After completing the pipe fitting family.113 Click Modify. if necessary. click and. First. for Radius. 115 Select the first connector. in the column. 116 Click Modify. you can use the same method to create a duct fitting family for air systems. and on the Options Bar. 117 Select both connectors. click 119 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 518 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

click the current scale value. and verify that both reference planes have been pinned. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Verify that Always vertical is selected. creating system families typically takes more time to complete. 8 In the Save As dialog. and save the family as Threaded Generic Elbow. verify that Imperial Templates is selected. on the Edit toolbar. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. select Elbow. It may take a longer to complete this exercise as compared to other exercises in this tutorial. Configure the elbow pipe fitting family 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. navigate to a folder of your choice. However. 6 Click OK. 7 Click File ➤ Save. Close Hidden Windows closes all of the hidden windows for a project. and double-click Ref. and select 6" = 1'-0". They are not displayed when the family is used in a building model. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Select Generic Model. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 519 .NOTE Fittings are among the most complex families to create. You can also press CTRL+S. select Pipe Fittings: 5 Under Family Parameters. Define reference planes Reference planes are used to define relationships between the geometric components within the Family Editor. Level floor plan window. 13 On the View Control Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Work Plane-Based is cleared. one window for each open project remains open. Level to make it the active view. 10 Maximize the Ref. It is recommended that you methodically follow the steps and periodically check your work against the exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans.rft. Click Open. Verify that Shared is cleared. Even if you have created parametric families before. 9 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New dialog. A new family file is created and new views open. 14 Select the 2 reference planes. For Part Type. if you have other projects open during a session. If necessary. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. click . under Family Category.

and on the Options Bar. 18 Click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. for Name. 22 Select the horizontal Center (Front/Back) reference plane. add another vertical plane 2" to the left of the left (Fitting) plane. click . TIP You can identify an object in the drawing area by placing the cursor over the object. for Name. under Identity Data. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Ref Plane. 15 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter Fitting. click . enter Coupling. A tooltip and the Status Bar (which is located below the Design Bar) displays the object’s name. and for Offset. 520 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 17 Click to the left the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane to place a new reference line to the left of the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 23 Add new reference plane 2" above the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. and in the Element Properties dialog. 21 Using the same method.Pinning prevents accidentally moving the reference planes. 19 Select the left plane. and click OK. enter 0' 1".

25 Right-click the new reference plane. For Offset. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. (Line) is selected.24 Click Modify. and click Element Properties. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. 29 On the Options Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 521 . Verify that Radius is cleared. They are not displayed when the family is used in a project. enter Radius. click Reference Lines. for Name. and click OK. You create reference lines in order to create sweeps for the fitting geometry. Create reference lines and dimension them Reference lines are used to define the basic geometry of the family. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected.

30 In the drawing area. 35 Align and lock the reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 38 Align and lock the right reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 32 Select the middle vertical reference plane (Fitting). 31 On the Edit toolbar. 37 Align and lock the left end of the right reference line to the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. draw another reference line to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane as shown. and click the right end of the reference line to align the right end of the reference line to the Fitting reference plane. 36 Using the same method. click (Align). 522 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . you draw an arced reference line. 33 Click to lock the end of the reference line to the Fitting plane. Next. align and lock the left end of the reference line to the left vertical reference plane (Coupling). 34 Using the same method. draw a horizontal line of the approximate length and location as shown.

and zoom out to view 2 dimension controls ( ). 43 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing the arc. 41 In the drawing area.39 On the Design Bar. ■ You may need to click ■ ■ For Offset. click the intersection of the Fitting and the Radius reference planes to specify the center of the arc. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 523 . 45 Select the arc reference line. 44 Click Modify. and after the endpoint snap displays. Verify that Radius is cleared. click the right end of the left reference line to specify the first endpoint of the arc. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. select this sketching option from the list. enter 45. click Reference Lines. and press Enter to specify a 45 degree radius for the arc. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 42 Move the cursor directly down. 40 On the Options Bar. (Arc from center and endpoints). and.

Next. you draw a diagonal reference line. Verify that Radius is cleared. 46 Click the dimension control that controls the overall dimension (located to the lower-right of the arc). and click to specify the reference line end point at an approximate line length as shown. (Line) is selected. 48 On the Design Bar. The dimension control that is located perpendicular to the line being dimensioned represents the overall length of that line. By default. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. dimensions are temporary—they only display when selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. For Offset. 49 On the Options Bar. 524 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Reference Lines. and adjust the length of the witness lines as shown. The dimension control located near the reference plane represents the projected length of that line relative to the reference plane. 50 Click the right end of the arced reference line to specify the diagonal reference line start point. 51 Draw a diagonal reference line to extend the arc at a 45 degree angle toward the Radius reference plane.NOTE Temporary dimensions have two dimension controls that allow you to convert the temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 47 Drag the permanent dimension annotation away from the arc reference line.

52 Click Modify. convert the temporary dimension for the overall length of the diagonal reference line to a permanent dimension. 56 On the Design Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 525 .While drawing the diagonal reference line. 59 Add the following aligned dimensions: Between the Radius and the Center (Front/Back) horizontal reference planes. on the Options Bar. 57 In the Type Selector. zoom the view to display the 2 dimension controls. Between the Coupling and the Fitting vertical reference planes. 58 On the Options Bar. the Tangent Extension tooltip may display to indicate that the diagonal reference line is tangent to the arced reference line. click Dimension. 60 With the Dimension tool active. and clean up the witness lines as necessary. and add an angular dimension between the diagonal reference line and the right horizontal reference line (which is located below the diagonal reference line). Between the Fitting and the Center vertical reference planes. 61 Position the dimension annotations and witness lines as shown. click (Angular). verify that ■ ■ ■ (Aligned) is selected. 54 Using the same method. 53 Select the diagonal reference line. 55 Drag the dimension line down and to the right to move it out of the way. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Default linear style is selected.

select Dimensions. The new family parameter. 64 In the Family Types dialog. select Pipe Size. For Group parameter under. create the following family parameters: Name Discipline Type of Parameter Group parameter under Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Angle Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Instance/Type Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance LenA2 BdyRad CplRad NomDia NomRad Ang Piping Piping Piping Piping Piping Common 526 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. under Parameter Type. under Parameters. is listed under Dimensions in the Family Types dialog. Select Instance to create an Instance Parameter. select Piping. LenA1. verify that Family parameter is selected. Create family parameters and assign them to dimensions 63 On the Design Bar. enter LenA1. 68 Using the same method. 65 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Family Types. click Add. 66 Under Parameter Data. 67 Click OK. For Type of Parameter.62 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. For Discipline.

for Label. select the (left) dimension that is dimensioning the Center (Front/Back) and Radius reference planes. enter NomRad * 2. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. NOTE Associate each dimension separately. Lookup tables are not used to determine pipe sizes as a result of using the Pipe Sizing tool—these pipe sizes are determined by various project-specific factors. enter 2". specify that following values and formulae: ■ ■ ■ ■ For CplRad. For NomRad. 73 Using the same method. 72 On the Options Bar. enter LenA1 * tan(Ang / 2). NomDia. 69 In the Family Types dialog. select each dimension and associate it to a family parameter as shown. 74 Press CTRL+S. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. 75 Using Windows Explorer. 71 In the drawing area.25". in the Value column. you specify values and formulae for the family parameters that you added. 70 Click OK. Do not select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter as this will cause errors. and copy the Threaded Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 527 . in the Formula column. in the Value column. select the LenA1 family parameter. Fittings must have their connectors (which you place later in this exercise) on lines that intersect the Center (Left/Right) and Center (Front/Back) reference planes. For LenA2. enter 1. the calculated length defines the geometry. NOTE When specifying formulae. Revit MEP uses this pipe size information to define pipe fitting size after you specify a pipe diameter.Next. The dimension is associated and controlled by the LenA1 family parameter. Use a lookup table file to define multiple sizes A lookup table file is a CSV (comma separated value) text file that contains pipe size information. in the Formula column.

This sweep uses the profile and the reference lines to create the elbow fitting geometry. If the file is saved in a proprietary format. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. For CplRad. 0.csv and click Apply. enter Threaded Generic Elbow. 528 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . For BdyRad. "CplRad". 82 In the New dialog. in the Value column. If you encounter this type of issue. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 0. 77 In the Family Types dialog. 78 In the Formula column. 76 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Revit MEP may not be able to read it and any family type parameter formulae that refer to that lookup table will most likely return a value of 0 and errors will occur. NomDia). Level floor plan is the active view. select Profile. for Lookup Table Name. 81 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 83 In the Project Browser. The formulae are applied and the dimensions are adjusted. NomDia). However. NomDia). you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. enter the following formulae: ■ ■ ■ For LenA1.csv lookup table file. Next. 0. verify that the Ref. RELATED During fitting creation. you must save the lookup table file in a plain text format. if specific pipe sizes that you need are not present in the lookup table file by default. click Family Types. 80 Press CTRL+S to save the family. This is the default path.Generic Elbow. you begin creating the fitting geometry. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. Next. and click Open.rft. Save the text file with the file name including the . Create a fitting profile You create a fitting profile in order to provide a geometrical shape for the sweep extrusion. you specify formulae that use the lookup table file to determine pipe size. copy the lookup table data from the problematic lookup table file and paste it into a new text file. you can add them according to manufacturers’ specifications.csv file extension and copy it to the LookupTables folder.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). "BdyRad". "LenA1". 79 Click OK.

97 On the View Control Bar. verify that Profiles is selected. 96 Click the dimension value. click (Align). click the current scale. zoom out. Verify that Radius is cleared. enter 1". 87 In the drawing area. align and lock the circle vertically. 89 Select the circle. verify that 0' 0" is specified. draw a circle with any radius in the approximate location as shown. 86 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. 92 Click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. 93 Click to lock the circle to the horizontally. For Offset. ■ (Circle). 88 Click Modify. 91 On the Edit toolbar. 85 In the Type Selector. and then click the circle center mark to align the circle horizontally. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 529 . and press ENTER.84 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. ). click . The center mark displays allowing you to align the circle to the reference planes. and on the Options Bar. and select 6" = 1'. 90 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.0". You may need to click ■ ■ and select this sketching option from the list. 94 Using the same method. select Center Mark Visible. under Graphics. 98 Zoom in to view the sketch. 95 Select the circle. click Lines. and click the dimension control ( The temporary dimension converts to a permanent dimension.

select the dimension. select Piping. you create a new family type. The new family type is listed in the Name list. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Verify that the Type option is selected to create a Type parameter. 103 Name the new family type. Click OK. create a family type named Coupling. For Group parameter under. under Family Types. click Family Types. Fitting. 530 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select Pipe Size. 100 In the Family Types dialog.99 On the Design Bar. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. Next. click OK. under Parameter Data. and click OK. 105 In the Family Types dialog. 102 In the Family Types dialog. enter Rad. click Add. For Discipline. under Parameters. 104 Using the same method. select Dimensions. 101 In the Parameter Properties dialog. The new family parameter is listed under Dimensions. 106 In the drawing area. 107 On the Options Bar. The dimension is now associated to and controlled by the Rad family parameter. For Type of Parameter. for Label. click New. select Rad.

115 Under Dimensions. an object must be fully contained when using a pick box (drag left to right). 111 In the Type Properties dialog.108 Click File ➤ Save. click . and click OK. This allows for parametric changes in the fitting geometry to occur. 110 In the Project Browser. 117 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. The object does not need to be fully contained within the border. Next. 114 For Type. select Fitting. click Load into Projects to load the Threaded Pipe Profile into the Threaded – Generic Elbow family. and click Properties. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. click . Create sweeps using reference lines The elbow fitting geometry consists of 2 couplings connected by the fitting body. click Apply. Each sweep is based on the profile that you created and loaded into the project. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 531 . TIP Remember that when you use cross-picking (drag right to left) to select an object. select CplRad. In contrast. Next. Notice that the Threaded . Associate family parameters to a profile parameter You associate family parameters to the Rad profile parameter for each family type in order to control the radius of the elbow fitting geometry. you load the fitting profile into the project. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Threaded Pipe Profile. you create the fitting geometry. and click OK twice. You create sweeps using the reference lines as sweep paths to create the fitting geometry.Generic Elbow project becomes active. select BdyRad. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. 116 In the Associate Family Parameter. for Rad. the cross-picking border only needs to intersect an object in order to select it. 118 In the drawing area. 112 In the Associate Family Parameter. for Rad. under Dimensions. and save the family as Threaded Pipe Profile. 109 On the Design Bar.rfa. right click Coupling. 113 In the Type Properties dialog.

122 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 126 In the drawing area. 125 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. Verify that the X. 123 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 124 In the drawing area. clear Reference Lines and Reference Planes. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.119 On the Options Bar. Only the reference lines and reference planes display. 127 On the Options Bar. click Pick Path. 532 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 128 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 121 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Path. Y. 120 In the Filter dialog. click Finish Sweep. select the left horizontal reference line. and Angle options are specified at 0. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list. click the red dot on the horizontal reference line.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 134 On the Options Bar. 133 In the drawing area. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 533 . 131 In the drawing area. and Angle options are specified at 0. click the red dot on the arced reference line. click Finish Sweep. click Finish Path. Verify that the X. 135 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 129 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Next. 130 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 132 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. Y. you create the geometry for the fitting body. click Pick Path. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Fitting from the profile list.The geometry for the left coupling is created. select the arced reference line.

534 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. add a solid sweep. you create the right coupling geometry for the elbow fitting. Next. 136 Using the same method. enter VG. 139 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. and click OK. and select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list to the right reference line to create the geometry for the right coupling. 138 With the 3D view active. The fitting geometry displays. The elbow fitting geometry is created. you verify the fitting geometry. clear all annotation categories. Next.The geometry for the fitting body is created. 137 In the Project Browser.

This fitting geometry displays when the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are used. click The 3 sweeps are selected. (Filter Selection). The Fine detail level displays pipe and pipe fittings as double line. First. Create detail level geometry Detail level geometry is the geometry that displays when you select a detail level. double-click Floor Plans ➤ Ref. select Other.140 While pressing SHIFT and the middle mouse button. In this section. 141 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 143 In the drawing area. drag the cursor to spin the model. and verify the fitting geometry. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. you need to hide some of the geometry in the family to make it easier to create model lines for the single-line display. you draw model lines to create the single line fitting geometry. 142 Press CTRL+S to save the family. click Check None. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 144 On the Options Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 535 . 146 On the View Control Bar. Coarse and Medium detail levels display pipe and pipe fittings as single line. In Revit MEP. 145 In the Filter dialog. Level to make it the active view.

select the left horizontal reference line. Select (Pick Lines). verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Lock is cleared. 149 On the Options Bar. 147 On the Design Bar.Only the reference planes and reference lines display. click Model Lines. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. 148 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. 150 In the drawing area. 536 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. do the following: ■ For Plane.

select the arced reference line to create an arced model line. and click the dimension control ( ) that is located at the lower-right. you highlight through the vertical hierarchy of objects (from top to bottom). TIP You can identify objects that are located under other objects by placing the cursor over an object and press Tab. 156 Click Modify. 153 Click Modify. 152 With the Model Lines tool active and using the same method. for Label. 155 Zoom out. 154 Select the arced model line to display its temporary dimension. and on the Options Bar. Each time you press Tab. click to lock the model line to the reference line. and lock the model line to the arced reference line. select Ang.A model line is created over the reference line. A tooltip and the Status Bar display the name of the object. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 537 . This associates the angle dimension of the arced model line to the Ang family parameter. 157 Select the permanent dimension. This converts the overall angle temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 151 With the model line selected.

then click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. NOTE Make certain that you select the model line and not the reference line. 169 Relocate the dimension annotations. 164 On the Options Bar. 160 Click Modify. 163 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 165 In the Type Selector. If necessary. 167 Click Modify. click Dimension. press Tab to locate the model line. you dimension the diagonal model line.158 Relocate the dimension annotation. click (Angular). If you lock it. 162 Using the same method. Next. 161 Select the diagonal model line. and finally move the cursor and click to place the dimension. 168 Using the same method. click the diagonal model line. 159 Using the same method. verify that Angular Dimension Style : Linear angular style is selected. and modify the witness lines as shown. and modify the witness lines as shown. 166 In the drawing area. associate the new angular dimension to the Ang family parameter. and associate it to the LenA1 family parameter. create a diagonal model line by picking the diagonal reference line (located at the right end of the arced model line). convert the diagonal model line overall length temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 538 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Revit MEP warns you that locking the alignment would over constrain the sketch. NOTE Do not lock the diagonal model line.

Next. 171 Press CTRL+S. click Family Types.170 On the View Control Bar. Flex the part 172 On the Design Bar. enter 90. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 173 In the Family Types dialog. under Dimensions. for Ang. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 539 . The part flexes to become a 90 degree elbow fitting. you flex the part to validate the design. and click Apply.

174 Restore the Ang parameter to 45. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). 176 On the Options Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Next. 175 In the drawing area. clear Lines (Pipe Fitting) and Reference Planes. and click OK. 540 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Everything except for model lines and reference planes are selected. 177 In the Filter dialog. Check all constraints and verify that model lines were created and properly constrained. this is usually caused by a constraint issue. 178 On the View Control Bar. Add tick marks and dimension them You create tick marks to indicate the end of the fitting when viewing the fitting in either the Coarse or Medium (single line) detail level. Lines (Pipe Fittings) are the model lines.NOTE If the part does not flex and errors occur. you create tick marks. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in view.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 541 . verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. 179 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. 181 On the Options Bar. Verify that Radius is cleared. 183 At the right end of the fitting. TIP You draw this model line on top of the Coupling reference plane. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. click Model Lines. draw another model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the diagonal model line as shown.Only model lines and reference planes display. 180 In the Type Selector. 182 At the left end of the fitting. Line length is approximate. draw a model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the horizontal model line as shown. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. do the following: ■ For Plane.

click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane and click the top end point of the model line (tick mark). then move the cursor to the left and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. 542 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 185 In the Type Selector. Next. dimension the bottom half of the left model line. The top half of the model line (tick mark) is dimensioned. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Linear is selected. NOTE You must click the reference plane first to dimension this model line. 188 Using the same method. length is approximate. 187 On the left end of the fitting. and then clicking an endpoint of the model line (tick mark).Again. you dimension each side of the 2 tick marks. 189 Using the same method. 186 On the Options Bar. The 2 tick marks are drawn. dimension both halves of the right model line (tick mark) by clicking the diagonal model line first. 184 On the Design Bar. verify that (Aligned) is selected.

You cannot select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter. 193 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The dimension are as shown. Next. select CplRad This associates that dimension to the CplRad family parameter. 195 Click the diagonal model line and then click the right model line tick mark. 197 Select the angular dimension.You place 2 dimensions for the right model line. move the cursor down and click to place the dimension. you create an angular dimension between the diagonal model line and the right model line tick mark. 192 Using the same method. for Label. 191 Select the lower dimension for the left model line. NOTE You must associate each dimension separately. associate the other 3 model line dimensions to the CplRad parameter. click (Angular). You may need to zoom out to locate the lock. 198 Relocate the dimension annotations. 194 On the Options Bar. and modify the witness lines as shown. click Dimension. 190 Click Modify. 196 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and lock it to 90 degrees. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 543 .

click Family Types. and click Apply. 200 Press CTRL+S to save the family. and for NomRad enter 1 1/2". The elbow fitting flexes into a 90 degree elbow that has a 3 inch diameter. for Ang.199 On the View Control Bar.Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ . Flex the part 201 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 202 In the Family Types dialog. 544 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 90.

select Lines (Pipe Fittings). you specify the 2-line geometry for the Fine detail level setting. This specifies that the single-line fitting geometry will display when only the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are selected. click (Filter Selection). You created the detail level geometry for the elbow fitting and flexed this geometry to validate it. on the Options Bar. clear Fine.csv lookup table file for the valid pipe diameters or add new pipe diameters based on the manufacturers’ specifications. verify that Coarse and Medium are selected. Only model lines are selected. the NomRad value that you specified required a pipe diameter that is not included in the lookup table file. NOTE If errors occur while flexing the fitting. 205 On the Options Bar. 204 In the drawing area. Next. you set object visibility. you specify this single line geometry to a detail level setting. 206 In the Filter dialog. click Visibility. and click OK. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing.203 Continue to flex the fitting by changing the Ang and NomRad parameter values. Next. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 545 . 208 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. You may want to refer to the Threaded Generic Elbow. click Check None. Next. 207 With the model lines selected. and click OK. Specify object visibility You specify object visibility to determine the type of elbow fitting geometry that displays for each detail level setting.

click (Filter Selection). 218 In the Filter dialog. click None. 216 In the drawing area. 546 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click to place the primary connector. verify that Fine is selected. clear Coarse and Medium. The 2-line fitting geometry will display only when the Fine detail level setting is selected. 214 Press CTRL+S. 217 On the Options Bar. 222 On the Options Bar. You begin by placing the primary connector. select Fitting from the system type list. on the Options Bar. Next. and click OK. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. Only the 3 sweeps are selected. click (Filter Selection). you add connectors to the elbow fitting family. click None. 219 On the View Control Bar. 210 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Other. (Place on 223 Place the cursor on the edge of the right face of the fitting. Add connectors 215 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 221 On the Design Bar. click Visibility. 212 With the sweeps selected. click Pipe Connector. The fitting displays. select Dimensions. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active.209 In the drawing area. and after the edge highlights. and verify that Face) is selected. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 211 In the Filter dialog. 213 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 220 Spin the model to view the faces at the ends of the fitting.

Unexpected behavior can result if the primary connector is not properly placed relative to the other connectors. Notice that crosshairs display indicating that this is the primary connector. the primary connector must be placed on the face that is on the X-axis. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 547 . and that if all connectors are not properly rotated and linked. place a connector on the left face of the fitting. NOTE When you place fitting connectors.The primary connector is placed. You can verify this by viewing the face in a floor plan view. 224 Using the same method. You place the primary connector on the right face because this face is on the X-axis.

226 Select the primary connector (indicated by crosshairs). Although the connectors are round. click OK. Notice that the connectors are oriented horizontally. The 2 connectors are linked. In the Element Properties dialog. you specify connector properties. 548 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . For Angle. click . select the 2 connectors.225 Click Modify. 228 In the drawing area. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. It also allows the fitting angle to change as a result of modifications to the pipe layout. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 229 On the Options Bar. click Link Connector. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. The 2 selected connectors display in red. under Instance Parameters. select NomRad. click . ■ ■ For Radius. verify that Fitting is selected. The connector angle constraint and radius dimension are now associated to parameters. and that these parameters cannot be edited in the Element Properties dialog. select ■ . This allows the fitting radius to change after you specify a pipe diameter or perform pipe sizing. 227 On the Options Bar. you rotate the connectors. Notice that values are assigned to both associated parameters. and click the other connector. you link both connectors. ■ The connector radii change. do the following: For System Type. select Ang. 230 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Next. it is the recommended that you rotate them so that they are oriented vertically. Rotate connectors 231 In the 3D view. Next. Next. and click OK.

234 Move the cursor over the model line and to the left of the connector arrow. 235 Move the cursor clockwise 90 degrees. 233 Select the connector. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 549 . the rectangular duct fitting will be inserted improperly. If rectangular connectors are not rotated properly. where the part geometry is clearly visible. click to specify the rotation start point. You may find it easier to rotate connectors in a 3D view. creating an unexpected result. The height is not on these axes. 232 Spin the fitting to view the entire primary connector. it is extremely important for rectangular connectors such as those on rectangular duct fittings. Although this is not as important for round connectors. click (Rotate).IMPORTANT Connector rotation is a critical part of connector placement. Remember that for rectangular connectors. the rectangular connector must be oriented so that the width is assigned to the face that is on the X and Y axes. and after the intersection snap displays. and on the Options Bar. The connector orientation determines the correct orientation of the objects that are automatically inserted on the part. and click to specify the rotation end point.

This also flips the connector arrow. You will learn more about connector arrows in the next section. you verify the connector arrow direction.NOTE Do not use the flip arrows to flip the connector with respect to its reference plane. The primary connector is rotated and now has a vertical orientation. Next. rotate the secondary connector so that it has a vertical orientation. 550 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 237 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 236 Using the same method.

Under Create New. It does not indicate flow direction.Mech mechanical floor plan is the active view. 243 On the Design Bar. If more than one project is open. Because Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 551 . 239 Press CTRL+S. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Template file. you load the threaded elbow family into the new project. a connector arrow points outward away from the object to which the connector is associated. then click Browse. 244 In the Project Browser. click Load into Projects. verify that the 1 . This is the default view when a project. The Systems-Default template creates views for all system types allowing you to model different systems in one project. based on the systems default template. opens. Test the elbow fitting in a project 240 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. verify that the path points to the Systems-Default.Verify connector arrow direction 238 In the 3D view. and click OK. 242 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded Generic Elbow. TIP You can also set the project template file path for all new projects on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Options). Click OK. Otherwise. NOTE If you click on the Standard toolbar. IMPORTANT Connector arrows indicate the direction of a duct or pipe (extrusion) when it is being created to complete a connection.3D View to switch back to the threaded coupling family. Next. You can modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows. The elbow family is loaded into the new project and the new project becomes active. the duct or pipe when created will pass through the object geometry instead of away from it.rfa . 241 In the New Project dialog. In most instances. This template may not be the Systems-Default template. If the template file path does not point to the Systems-Default. a new project is created based on the current project template. verify that Project is selected. verify that each connector arrow indicates an outward direction from its connector as shown.rte template file.rte template. and locate this template file. The 1 . select the project that you just created from the Load into Projects dialog.Mech view is located under Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.

it is associated with the mechanical discipline, both ducts and pipe can be created in the 1 - Mech view. 245 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. Next, you assign the new threaded generic elbow fitting to a pipe type. 246 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. 247 On the Options Bar, click .

248 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 249 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Elbow, select Threaded – Generic Elbow: Threaded – Generic Elbow, and click OK twice. 250 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter) select 3”. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Verify that the Offset elevation is specified at 9' 0"

251 In the drawing area, draw some piping, using various angles and offset elevations. NOTE Remember that if errors occur during fitting insertion, it is usually because the specified pipe diameter was not in the Threaded Generic Elbow lookup table file. 252 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse, Medium, and Fine to see how the new elbow fitting geometry displays in both the floor pan and the 3D views.

You have verified that the threaded elbow fitting was correctly inserted, that the pipe was created in the correct direction away from the elbow, and that the detail level geometry displayed properly. Next, you check connectivity. Check connectivity 253 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab to check connectivity. The piping highlights indicating that it is connected. 254 Click Modify. Hide shape handles 255 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Mech view to make it the active view. 256 In the drawing area, select an elbow from your test piping layout.

552 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

257 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow. Notice that triangular and dot shape handles display on the elbow along with the 2 connectors.

258 Drag the upper triangular shape handle upward as shown.

Notice that this shape handle modified the fitting geometry.

Other shape handles can modify aspects of the fitting such as location. These modifications can violate the design intent of the elbow fitting.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 553

IMPORTANT Shape handles are not used for Revit MEP system families but they display by default when you create a new family. If shape handles are not hidden and they are inadvertently dragged during your modeling session, the geometry or placement of the family will be adversely affected. This can create unexpected results, especially for duct fittings. This is because, unlike pipe fittings, duct fittings use formulae that reside in the family rather than in an external lookup table file to determine size. It is highly recommended that you hide all shape handles for Revit MEP families before using them in a project. To hide the shape handles in a system family, you need to open the family in the Family Editor and specify the Is Reference instance parameter as Not a Reference for all reference lines and all reference planes that are used for that family. 259 Press CTRL+Z to undo the modification. 260 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded - Generic Elbow.rfa - Floor Plan: Ref. Level to switch to the elbow family floor plan view. 261 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing, including reference planes.

262 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

263 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Reference Planes, and click OK. Only the reference planes are selected. 264 On the Options Bar, click .

265 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK. 266 Using the same method, specify Not a Reference for all reference lines. 267 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 268 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. If more than one project is open, in the Load into Projects dialog, select the test project in which you tested the elbow fitting, and click OK. 269 After a message informs you to overwrite the existing version of the threaded generic elbow, click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. The test project becomes active. 270 In the 1 - Mech floor plan view, zoom in and select an elbow from your piping layout. Notice that all shape handles are hidden.

554 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

The threaded elbow is ready to be used in a project. RELATED Although the physical geometry of this fitting is accurate, it is inconsistent with a real-world threaded elbow in that the connectors on this elbow fitting are on the outer face of the threaded portion of the fitting. This prevents the pipe from engaging the fitting. You can use the Hidden Line model graphics style to verify this. If the part were modeled so that the pipe engaged the fitting, proper performance of Revit MEP would be impacted due to the way hidden lines are calculated and drawn.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family
It is likely that you will need to create annotation symbols that are not part of a building model. For example, a common symbol in MEP drawings is a New to Existing Connection callout. In this exercise, you create such an annotation. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the New dialog, select Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open. 3 Maximize the window, and in the drawing area, zoom in to view the note (located near the intersection of the reference planes). This note contains key points to remember when creating an annotation family. 4 Select the note and delete it. 5 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the intersection of the 2 reference planes. Draw lines 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 8 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Clear Chain.

(Draw), and

(Line) are selected.

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

9 Click the intersection of the 2 reference planes to specify the line start point, move the mouse to the right, and after listening dimensions appear, enter 0 1/8, and press Enter. This creates a 1/8" line to the right of the intersection. The line is over the reference line. 10 Using the same method, draw 3 more 1/8" lines located above, below, and to the left of the intersection as shown.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 555

TIP You can also mirror the opposite lines instead of drawing them. 11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select the 2 reference planes. 12 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left under the drawing area), click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. This hides the reference planes allowing you to better view the lines.

Next, you create the filled regions. Create filled regions

13 On the toolbar, click

(Fine Lines).

14 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design, verify that Lines is selected. 16 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 17 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Select

(Draw) is selected.

(Arc from center and endpoints). and, select this sketching option from the list.

You may need to click

Click Radius, and enter 3/32".

18 Zoom the view, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the arc.

556 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

19 Move the cursor directly up and over the end of the upper vertical line, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the start point of the arc.

20 Move the cursor over the right horizontal line, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the end point of the arc.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 557

An arced line is drawn.

21 With the Lines tool active, on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Click

(Draw) and Chain are selected.

(Line).

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

22 In the drawing area, click the upper end point of the arced line, then click the intersection of the 4 lines, and finally click the lower end point of the arced line.

558 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

A chain of 2 lines is drawn. 23 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. This filled region is created.

24 Using the same method, draw a filled region on the opposite lower-left quadrant.

Next, you draw a circle around the 2 filled regions. 25 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 26 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Click

(Draw) is selected.

(Circle).

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 559

■ ■

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Click Radius, and verify that 0' 3/32" is specified.

27 In the drawing area, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the circle. 28 Click Modify.

29 Click File ➤ Save, and save the family as New to Existing.rfa Test the annotation symbol in a project 30 Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. 32 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.rvt. 33 Click Window menu ➤ New to Existing.rfa - Drawing Sheet to switch to the new annotation symbol family. 34 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 35 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 36 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Symbol. 37 In the Type Selector, verify that New to Existing is selected. 38 On the Options Bar, click .

39 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 40 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow Filled 15 Degree, and click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 42 In the drawing area, zoom in, and click to place the annotation symbol in the project. 43 Press ESC twice. Next, you modify the symbol leader. 44 Select the leader to display shape handles.

560 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

45 Drag the middle shape handle up to modify the middle of the leader.

46 Drag the end shape handle to modify the annotation symbol as shown.

47 Select the symbol, and drag the cross-arrows to relocate the symbol. 48 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not need to save the project.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts
A defining feature of Revit MEP content is the concept of connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP content to participate in specific systems and facilitate calculations for a variety of parameters.

Connectors
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.

Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm systems and others.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts | 561

Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.

The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.

Connector Properties
The discipline assigned to a connector determines the connector’s properties. The following tables show the different connector parameters, by property group, for each discipline and a brief description of their functionality.
Electrical Constraints Edge loop centered Graphics Size on screen Electrical - Loads True Load Phase 3 Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 3) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 2) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 1) x (Power Factor). Percentage of power attributed to this connector. Active only when Power is specified as System Type. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 3). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >2. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 2). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >1. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor. Connector placement method (read only).

True Load Phase 2

True Load Phase 1

Power Factor

Apparent Load Phase 3

Apparent Load Phase 2

562 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Apparent Load Phase 1

Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 1). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current). Active only when Balanced Load is True and System Type is Power. The voltage specified on the connector. Active only when the System Type is Power. Possible values are: Data, Power - Balanced, Power - Unbalanced, Telephone, Security, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Controls, Communication. Possible values are: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. Possible values are: Lagging, Leading. Possible values are: 1, 2, or 3.

Apparent Load

Voltage

System Type

Load Classification Power Factor State Number of Poles Identity Data Index Primary Connector

A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s electrical data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. A description of the connector

Connector Description

Mechanical (HVAC) Constraints Edge loop centered Angle Connector placement method (read only) Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Flow Factor Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

Connectors | 563

Loss Coefficient Flow Configuration Flow Direction System Type

Active only when the Loss Method is Coefficient. Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Possible values are: Supply, Return, Exhaust, Other, Undefined. Possible values are: Not Defined, Coefficient, Specific Loss.

Loss Method Mechanical - Airflow Pressure Drop Flow Dimensions Shape Height

Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss. The amount of air flowing at this connector.

Possible values are: Rectangular or Round. The height of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The width of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The radius of the connector when the Shape is defined to be round.

Width

Radius

Identity Data Index Primary Connector A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s HVAC data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only) A description of the connector

Link Connector Index Connector Description

Mechanical (Piping) Constraints Edge loop centered Connector placement method (read only).

564 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Angle

Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Fixture Units Active only when the System Type is Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, or Domestic Cold Water and the Flow Configuration is Fixture Units. K Coefficient (K Factor) is only editable if Loss Method is specified as “K Coefficient”. Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Volumetric flow rate of fluid through connector. Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Bidirectional is active only when the Flow Configuration is Calculated. Possible values are: Not Defined, K Coefficient from Table, K Coefficient, Specific Loss. Possible values are: Checked or unchecked. Possible values are: Undefined, Hydronic Supply, Hydronic Return, Sanitary, Domestic Cold Water, Domestic Hot Water, Fire Protection, Other. Possible values are: Bell Mouth Inlet or Reducer, Inward Projecting Pipe, Outlet, Square Edged Inlet. Active only when the Loss Method is K Coefficient from Table. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

K Coefficient

Flow Factor

Flow Pressure Drop Flow Configuration Flow Direction

Loss Method

Allow Slope Adjustments System Type

K Coefficient Table

Dimensions Radius Identity Data Index A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). The nominal size of the connector.

Connectors | 565

Primary Connector

Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s piping data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only). A description of the connector.

Link Connector Index Connector Description

System Types
When a Revit MEP component that is not a member in a system is selected in a building model, the Options Bar displays create system buttons. The specific buttons depend on the component and the type(s) of connectors in the family. If there are multiple connectors of the same type and you want to connect to a specific connector, you can right-click on the connector control to create the appropriate type.

Electrical
When a component with an electrical connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Power, Data, Telephone, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Communication.

Duct
When a component with an Duct connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific HVAC system (from left to right: Air Supply, Air Return, Exhaust).

Pipe Connector
Pipe connectors are used with hydronic systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems. When a component with a hydronic pipe connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific hydronic piping system (from left to right: Supply, Return, Other.

When a component with a plumbing (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Cold Water, Other).

When a component with a fire protection (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Wet Sprinkler, Dry Sprinkler, Other).

566 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Load Classifications
Revit MEP maintains information about loads associated with the rooms in a project. As devices and equipment are placed in rooms, Revit MEP keeps track of the loads based on load type: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. The loads associated with the room can be view in the Element Properties for each room, and displayed in schedules.

Connector Placement
Connector placement options allow you to specify two basic connector placement methods:

Place on Face This option (Edge loop centered=true) will maintain its point at the center of the edge loop. In most cases this is the preferable method for placing a connector. Typically the Place on Face option is easier to use, and is suitable for most cases. Place on Work Plane This option allows placement of the connector on a selected plane. For many cases it would be possible to imitate the place on face option by specifying a plane and using dimensions to constrain the connector to the desired location. However, this method generally requires additional parameters and constraints to be used effectively.

Connectors | 567

NOTE Fittings (pipe and duct fittings) expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the connectors. In most cases for fittings, there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors (if extended into the fitting) will collide. Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersection of the Center (Front / Back), Center (Left / Right), and Reference Level work planes. For this reason, it is good practice to pin these reference planes before beginning to build the family. Do this by selecting the reference plane(s) and clicking the Pin icon on the Edit toolbar.

Hosts
Objects that are placed in a model are often hosted by other components. Hosting components include ceilings, floors, roofs, and walls, as well as lines, and faces. Even components that are not hosted by one of these components are still hosted by the level on which they reside. When creating a family from a template, it is important that you consider what type of hosting behavior you want for the family. For example, you may intuitively think that a new light fixture should be ceiling hosted. However, there may be cases where you want to use that family in a wall mount configuration, or even freely suspended. You cannot change the hosting of a family after it is created; the hosting setting is hard-set based on the template from which the family originated. Plane hosting provides the ability for the family to be hosted by walls, floors, or ceilings, and provides a high level of flexibility. Plane hosted elements will even move with their hosting elements through linked models. Non-hosted families are actually hosted by the level they are inserted on and provide the ability for the element to be placed anywhere. Their height is defined relative to their level, but there is no association established with elements, linked models or otherwise. When using linked files, only face-hosted families will be able to be hosted by the linked file’s geometry.

Templates
As described above, the hosting of an element is defined based on the template that is used when the family is originally created. Templates also determine the type of family as an annotation family, model family, titleblock family, or a profile family. In some cases, the template also defines particular characteristics of how the family works, such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. NOTE You cannot change these characteristics once you have created the family. For example, you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture, or redefine an annotation symbol to be a model element. You must start the family with the appropriate template.

Lookup Tables
Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Revit MEP provides a text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.csv) file. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file. The syntax for the text_file_lookup function uses the following format:
result=text_file_lookup(LookupTableName, LookupColumn, DefaultIfNotFound, LookupValue) Where: Is:

568 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

result LookupTableName LookupColumn

the returned value. the name of the CSV file to lookup. the name of the column from which the result value is to be returned. the value that will be returned if LookupValue is not found. the value to find in the first column of the table.

DefaultIfNotFound LookupValue

CSV File Structure
The first row of values in the CSV file is for header information, to describe the contents of subsequent columns. The headers are of the format ParameterName##ParameterType##ParameterUnits Acceptable parameter types are: NUMBER, LENGTH, AREA, VOLUME, ANGLE, and OTHER For example, a column may have the following header: TotalArea##AREA##INCHES to represent the total area in square inches. The first column in the file contains a description. The Lookup Function processes the information in the file starting with column 2.

Parameter Mapping
Many properties for objects, such as the depth of an extrusion and the voltage of a connector, can be mapped (associated) to a family parameter or to a shared parameter to provide flexibility to the family. The associated parameter can be defined as an instance parameter or a type parameter. Parameters are mapped by clicking (small button) in the column in the Element Properties dialog for the object. When an object’s parameter is mapped to another parameter, its Value column cannot be edited. The example below shows that the Power Factor and Number of Poles parameters are currently not mapped to a parameter. Their values can be edited directly in the Value column. The Apparent Load Phase 1 and Voltage parameters are mapped to other parameters, and their values assume the values specified for the parameters to which they have been mapped.

Parameter Mapping | 569

Category
Revit MEP components fall into general categories (pipe fittings, lighting fixtures, and so on). The Family Category specified when a family is created determines which Family Parameters are activated. The settings for these family parameters affect the behavior for the part and identifies the type of component. In Family Editor, the Family Category and Parameters settings are found in the Settings menu. Depending on the Family Category and the type of template that the family was derived from (host-based, generic model, detail component, generic tag, and so on), different Family Parameters apply. The following table lists each Family Category, and indicates the applicable Family Parameters. Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver- Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation Shared

Air Terminals Communications Devices Data Devices Duct Accessories Duct Fittings Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Fire Alarm Devices Generic Models Lighting Devices Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipment Nurse Call Devices Pipe Accessories Pipe Fittings Plumbing Fixtures Security Devices

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X

X

X X X X X X

X X

X X

570 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Duct Accessories. create a nested family. line. Maintain Annotation Orientation: Use this option when the family has a nested annotation family. Generally the Type Selector allows you to replace a family of one category with any other family of the same category. spot. So there is a level of filtering built into the Type Selector for Revit MEP. You can also define photometric characteristics. and Initial Color Control. Entry.Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver. Pipe Accessories. circle).Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation X X X Shared Sprinklers Telephone Devices X X X X X X Family Parameters ■ ■ ■ Light Source: See Light Source on page 571. Junction. or photometric web). For example. Duct Fittings. Elbow. However. Transition. To accurately look up the correct fitting in the database. you can specify the shape of the light element (point. you can adjust the position and brightness of each light source to achieve the desired lighting effects. Initial Intensity. Light Source A light source is the part of a lighting fixture that emits light (such as a light bulb). and determines the behavior for the parts in the family. Fan and System Interaction. such as Light Loss Factor. The ASHRAE Duct Fitting database is integrated with Revit MEP. Obstruction. Equipment. Pipe Fittings. Undefined. for fittings it would not be valid to replace a cross with a transition. In general. rectangle. and the light distribution (spherical. there are times when this is not appropriate. the part type must be defined. To determine the part type family. To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources (such as a chandelier or a set of track lights). The following table shows which part types apply to which family categories: Family Categories Air Terminals. Mechanical Equipment. The part type serves 2 functions: ■ To only allow replacing a particular part with a similar part in a building project. Duct Mounted Equipment. In a project. Exit. ■ If a family category provides a Part Type parameter. Valve Light Source | 571 . the Part Type values available depends on the family category. Part Types The Part Type parameter provides additional subclassification of a family category. Plumbing Fixture Part Types Damper. When light source is selected in the Family Category and Parameters dialog. hemispherical. Hood. This allows calculating fitting losses based on a loss table. each lighting fixture family has one light source. Part Type: See Part Types on page 571. as is the case with receptacles and switches.

Duct Mounted Equipment: Smoke detectors. grates Exit: Point at which fluid leaves the system Equipment: Generic equipment Fan and System Interaction AHUs. Normal: Devices such as receptacles. and light fixtures. Switch Junction Box ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Damper: Used to control flow volume. Transformer. Data Panel. As indicated in the image. Lighting Devices. Security. Panelboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. Panelboard. Fire Alarm Devices. Telephone Devices Part Types Normal. Electrical Fixtures. Electrical Equipment. Telephone. As indicated in the image. the automatically generated wiring branches to the switch. and Communication. Lighting Fixtures. Data Devices. Security Devices. Fire Alarm. Junction Box: Wire management devices through which wiring is generally drawn through the device. such as an inline filter Transition: Shape or size change Undefined: No specific functionality Valve: Valves and similar accessories Data Panel: Panels used to connect devices with connectors of System Type Data. cross. Switchboard. fire alarm components. Nurse Call. grills. lab or other exhaust hoods Junction: Intersection of 3 or more segments (tee. Controls. inline fans Hood: Kitchen. Nurse Call Devices.Family Categories Communication Devices. ■ ■ ■ ■ 572 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Switch: Control device such as a switch where wiring is typically not drawn through the devices. steam generators Elbow: A bend or elbow type fitting Entry: Point at which fluid enters the system: louvers. wye) Obstruction: Anything that causes a pressure drop. the automatically generated wiring branches through the junction box.

■ Part Types | 573 .■ Switchboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. Transformer: Used to interconnect Panelboards and/or Switchboards of differing voltages.

574 .

575 . BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. slight modifications to the building design have been made.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. exterior fire stairs. balconies. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2009. NOTE For training purposes. lofty ceilings. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. and a roof garden. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District.

576 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. including plan. You learn how to create new views from existing views. section. elevation.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 10 In this tutorial. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. 577 . and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. how to create section and elevation views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you learn how to create views from a building model. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 578 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt.

4 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Level 2. and click OK. Duplicating Plan Views | 579 . enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser.

13 In the Project Browser. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. 580 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 11 Under Floor Plans.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Vicinity Plan.

and click 1''= 80'-0''. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Duplicating Plan Views | 581 . Next.14 On the View Control Bar. click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.

582 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.16 Right-click. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. double-click Level 1. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. under Floor Plans. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 583 . click Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1/8''=1'-0''. for Scale.

7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. 584 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

10 In the Rename View dialog. click Section. expand Floor Plans. 14 In the Type Selector. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. and double-click Level 1. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 15 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 585 . under Views (all). enter South East. and click OK. for Scale. ■ Move the cursor down. select 1/8''=1'-0''. select Section: Building Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.

and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 586 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Split Segment. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 587 .19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line.

click Modify. and double-click Section 1. 23 On the View Control Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F.21 On the Design Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 588 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. using the blue circular drag grip.

click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 589 . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. To create each view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.

5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. click Callout. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 590 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. select Floor Plan.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. double-click Level 1.Resulting callout view .

■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and select the callout boundary. Creating Callout Views | 591 . 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. click Modify.

9 In the Rename View dialog. 592 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify.■ Select the middle grip. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 7 On the Design Bar. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. and click OK. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.

for Scale.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. double-click Section 1. click Callout. 13 In the Type Selector. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 14 On the Options Bar. select Detail View: Detail. under Sections (Building Sections). Creating Callout Views | 593 . 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

594 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. under Detail Views (Details).16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. expand Detail Views (Details). double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail. 18 In the Rename View dialog.

you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. the elevation markers. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 595 . and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

Filled. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Head . select Custom-Section Head. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK twice. enter Section Head – Custom. click Edit/New. 8 In the Name dialog. 12 For Section Tag. under Floor Plans. and click Open. . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select the section line. for Section Head. and click OK.rvt. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. double-click Level 1. click Load into Project. click Training Files. and can be applied to the section line. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. clear any others. 4 On the Design Bar. Section Tail . select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 10 On the floor plan. and click OK. select the current project. 596 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Duplicate. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rfa. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog.Custom. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. Section Tail – Filled. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project.

rfa. scroll to Section Line. select 3/4'' Circle. click the Annotation Objects tab. enter 3/4'' Circle. Click OK. and click Open. 19 Click OK. enter 3/4''. select Custom-Callout Head. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 22 In the Name dialog. and select 3. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. For Line Weight. for Elevation Tag. click Duplicate. and on the Options Bar. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Circle. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 17 Under Category. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 27 Click OK twice. scroll to Section Marks. 15 Under Category. On the floor plan. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 597 . Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit/New. and select 2. click Training Files.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. On the floor plan. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select 3. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. notice the circular elevation markers that display. .

click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. clear all others. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog.30 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click the Annotation Objects tab. 43 Under Category. for Callout Tag. and select 7. select the callout. 39 Click OK twice. 598 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 40 Press ESC. and click OK. click Duplicate. enter 1/4''. 36 In the drawing. 34 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load into Project. select the current project. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. scroll down to Callout Boundary. . 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. For Corner Radius.

rvt.45 For Line Pattern. 46 Under Category. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 599 . 47 Select Callout Leader Line. view regions. and select 4. masking regions. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. expand Callout Boundary. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and visual overrides. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. select Dash. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 49 Click OK. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. click Training Files. filters. Creating a View Template In this exercise. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and apply it to multiple elevation views. You learn to create view templates. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. To accomplish this.

4 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Entourage. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. click Zoom to Fit. click (Hide Crop Region). under Elevations. 600 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 5 On the View Toolbar. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. The crop region displays as red. under Visibility. and double-click East.

double-click North. 13 In the Project Browser. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 14 In the New View Template dialog. under Elevations. and click OK. right-click East. 12 On the View Control bar. levels. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. elevation markers. 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a View Template | 601 . grids. click OK.10 Under Visibility. under Elevations. and click Create View Template From View. Callouts. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 15 In the View Templates dialog.

you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. and click Apply View Template. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.17 In the Project Browser. click Apply. and click OK. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. edit the crop region as before. double-click Penthouse. right-click North. under Floor Plans. 19 Using the same method. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. 602 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

right-click. and click Properties. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. for Bottom. View Range and Plan Regions | 603 .2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. for Level. double-click Roof Plan. for View Range. click Edit. select Level Below (Level 4). under Extents. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Penthouse. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Level Below (Level 4).

click Edit. 10 On the Design Bar. select Roof Plan. Click OK twice. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. for Bottom. and click Properties. click Plan Region. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Level. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar.6 In the Project Browser. under Extents. for View Range. select Level 4. click Lines. select Level 4. Under View Depth. 604 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

11 On the Options Bar. for Bottom. Move you cursor diagonally. under Extents. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. in this case. 17 On the Design Bar. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 605 . click Modify. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. Under View Depth. 16 On the Design Bar. for Level. for View Range. click Region Properties. In the left corner of the building. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 13 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Unlimited. select Unlimited. click Finish Sketch. click Edit. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.

select Solid Fill. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Filters tab. 11 Select Rated Walls. enter Rated Walls. for Rated Walls. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 12 On the Filter tab. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. and click OK. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. Enter Hr. for Color. under Categories. 9 Click OK. select the red color. 16 Click OK. select Walls. and double-click Level 1. click Override under Patterns. After you apply the filter. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Views (all). under Projection/Surface. for Pattern. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 14 In the Color dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Using the same method. 10 On the Filter tab. and apply a color. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. expand Floor Plans. click Edit/New.rating of the walls. click (New).rvt. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Select contains. click Add. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 606 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 In the Filters dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. under Filters. 5 In the Filters dialog. click <No Override>. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. select Fire Rating. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Basic colors. and click OK.

click Remove. To accomplish this. and click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View | 607 . 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click OK. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog.

4 On the View Control Bar. right-click. 5 On the View menu. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. as shown. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. click Show Crop Region. 608 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 Select Copy of Level 1. and click Rename. and click OK.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

7 On the View menu. 9 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). select Invisible lines. click Masking Region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. Masking Portions of a View | 609 . 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 11 In the Type Selector. 8 Select the crop region.

Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. right-click Unit 18 Plan .14 On the Design Bar. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 610 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.Level 1. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan.

under Visibility. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. under Pattern Overrides. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click Rename. and click OK. click in the Patterns field. select Walls. 7 Under Cut. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. select Solid fill. click black. 11 Click OK twice. Working with Visual Overrides | 611 . and click OK. and click 1/4''=1'0''. click the current scale. right-click. right-click. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Override. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. for Color. for Pattern. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar.

Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 16 Under Visibility. 18 Right-click. clear Floors. clear Grids. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. click Modify. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 612 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility.

By using the previous method to make the selection. 21 Under Projection/Surface. Working with Visual Overrides | 613 . 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Pattern. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. 25 Click OK twice. select Dash 1/16''. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. under Lines. 23 In the Color dialog. click a purple color. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override. and click OK. click <No Override> to apply a color. 20 Right-click. for Color.

Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 614 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Projection Lines. and click OK twice. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click . 28 For Color. select a bright green color. select the sofa. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 29 In the Color dialog. right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 30 On the Design Bar. click By Category Override. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog.

click . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 615 . you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. 33 On the View Control Bar. how to add views to the sheets. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. right-click.32 Select one of the lamps. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.

click Sheet.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and click OK. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 616 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets. right-click. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. click Training Files. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. enter A101. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. click Modify. expand Sheets (all).Unnamed. 7 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. Creating Drawing Sheets | 617 . Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). on the Options Bar. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. For Sheet Number. Click OK. 5 When the title block highlights. For Sheet Name. and select the title block. enter Site Plan. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . click Modify.

MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter 2009-1. 618 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Project Status. enter Freighthouse Flats. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. under Other. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter For Approval. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 14 Click OK. Smith. For Client Name. enter J. 2009. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. For Project Name. click Edit. For Project Number. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. for Project Address.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter 15 May.

Elevations A106 . 17 In the Project Browser.Stairs In the following exercise. for Name. Adding Views to Sheets | 619 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. you add views to these sheets. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . and click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Sections A108 . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. select the new sheet name.rvt. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. enter Floor Plan.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.rvt. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click Save. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Elevations A105 .Elevations A107 . and click Rename. and click OK. right-click.Layout Plan A104 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.

select Level 1.Elevations. under Sheets (all). and click to place the view.Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.Floor Plan. double-click A104 . Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Floor Plans. double-click A102 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). The red border around the view no longer displays. and drag it to the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 620 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. click Modify. 4 On the Design Bar.

8 On the Design Bar. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.Sections. double-click A107 . 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. under Sheets (all).7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). click Modify. and click to place it. Adding Views to Sheets | 621 . and click to place it. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. align it with the East elevation.

and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. move the cursor over it. and click OK. zoom in to the grip. 622 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Stairs.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 18 Under Floor Plans. and press TAB until it highlights. and click to place it. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. under Sheets (all). 19 On the Design Bar. 16 Select title bar. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Scale. . Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. double-click A108 . drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''.

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 623 . double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. you must first activate the view on the sheet.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. and then make changes and deactivate the view. In order to do this. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.

and press ENTER. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. under Sheets (all). Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A107 . click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 2 Select the building section view. enter 54'. 624 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. and click Activate View. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click.Sections.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View. double-click North. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 625 . Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.6 Right-click.

For Sheet Name. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. and click OK. right-click.rvt. 626 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create a title sheet for your drawing set. click Camera.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Properties. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. After you create the sheet. The camera view displays. enter T. Click OK. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 7 Place the camera as shown. 3 In the Project Browser. You modify the view to hide the view title. select the new sheet name.

click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 5'. enter 60'. Under Camera. Under Extents. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 627 .8 On the Options Bar. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Target Elevation. select Far Clip Active. 12 On the View Control Bar. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. For Far Clip Offset. Click OK. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter 420'. for Eye Elevation.

double-click T . 14 Under 3D Views. click Size. Click Apply. for Height. on the Options Bar. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. Under Model Crop Size. enter 25''.13 In the Project Browser. and then click OK.Title Sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. under Sheets (all). drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 628 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Scale (locked proportions). 15 With the view selected.

The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. for Show title. enter Viewport/no title mark. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Name dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 Select the view on the sheet.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. select No. under Graphics. and click OK. and close the exercise file. 24 Click OK twice. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 629 . click Edit/New. .

630 .

Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Because of the open style floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. You also learn to create different types of schedules. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP.Tagging and Scheduling 11 In this tutorial.rvt.Level 1. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. click Training Files. Tagging Objects In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. in your Revit MEP 2009 projects. 631 . such as room and window schedules. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. such as doors and windows.

click Room Separation. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. move the cursor to the right. and click Room and Area. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 632 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. as shown: 5 Using the same method. right-click in the Design Bar.

6 Using the same method. click Modify. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 633 . 9 In the Tags dialog. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 7 On the Design Bar. click Load.

Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 634 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Training Files. 16 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag. type U18-1. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and click to place the room and tag. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. 11 In the Tags dialog. click Room.rfa. click OK. and press ENTER. 14 For Offset. and the rectangle contains the room tag. click it. The room tag number displays in blue. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and select the room tag. type 8'. click Modify. indicating that it can be edited.

type Kitchen. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 635 . Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 22 Click the room text label. 23 Using the same method.18 Click the room text label. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. place rooms and tags. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. click Room. Sequential letters are also supported. type Entry. and press ENTER. click Modify. Dining. Click to place the new room and tag. and press ENTER. 19 On the Design Bar.

Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify.Level 2. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). clear Room Separation. 27 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. and moving clockwise. 636 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . The rooms are already placed. on the Model Categories tab. click Room Tag. but they need to be tagged. double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. clear Leader. 3 On the Options Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Level 1. in the Project Browser. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 637 . expand Floor Plans. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Tag ➤ By Category. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.rvt.

NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. type U18-1. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. click Modify. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. type U18-2. and press ENTER. under Identify Data. click Properties). 638 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . for Mark.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 639 .9 Using one of the methods you just learned. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

and double-click Level 1. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. 640 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 22 In the Tags dialog. 15 Under Category. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Load. expand Floor Plans. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Window Tags. and click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. verify that All objects in current view is selected. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 13 On the Design Bar. select Door Tags.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag.Level 2. click Tag All Not Tagged. click OK. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files.

select the edge to which the leader connects. select Leader. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. tag all untagged windows.rvt. 26 Under Floor Plans. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. 28 Using the same method. double-click Level 2. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 5 At the confirmation prompt. 3 On the Options Bar. and modify the tag placement and display. click Yes to load a tag. Tagging Other Objects | 641 . 29 Save the file. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to tag furniture objects. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise.rfa. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 4 Select a dining room chair.Level 1.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. click Training Files. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans.

Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. and drag it above the chair tag. and on the Options Bar. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 9 Click Modify.8 Select the furniture in the living room. clear Leader. 12 Click the elbow control. 642 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 Select the tag for the table. 14 Click Modify. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 13 Optionally.

and on the Design Bar. and click OK. double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 2. Tagging Other Objects | 643 . Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Furniture Tag : Standard. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. click Tag All Not Tagged. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

click (Filter Selection). you learn to add schedules. click Check None. 22 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. select Furniture Tags. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 21 In the Filter dialog.20 On the Options Bar. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. 644 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Modify. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. 23 Save the file.

in which windows are listed by window type. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 645 . Finally.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. that is. Next. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a schedule that lists every window in the building. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule.

rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. 4 For Name. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. expand Floor Plans. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Windows. 646 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and double-click Level 1. 9 Click OK. click the Fields tab. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. and click OK. and click View. type Building Window Schedule. 7 Using the same method. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. under Category. 6 Under Available fields. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Comments and click Add. right-click in the Design Bar.

expand Schedules/Quantities. and click View Properties. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. in large building models with many views. However. If no open view shows the selected element. click Close. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. this can be a time-consuming process. you are prompted to open one that does. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. 13 In the Project Browser. click Show. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. NOTE By clicking Show. Creating a Window Schedule | 647 . and on the Options Bar. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. right-click the schedule.

for Sorting/Grouping. 648 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit.15 In the Element Properties dialog. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. sorted by type mark. 23 Click OK twice. and press ENTER. under Other. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. click Edit. for Sorting/Grouping. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. under Other. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sort by. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. clear Itemize every instance. The window schedule is displayed. The window type schedule is displayed. and click View Properties.

jamb. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. unlike shared parameters.rvt. double-click Level 2. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In this case. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and double-click Building Window Schedule. you cannot use them to tag objects. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. and sill conditions for a window can be found. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. expand Schedules/Quantities. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 649 . and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

6 Using the same method. Under Parameter Data. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. right-click Building Window Schedule. 12 Click OK twice. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. for Fields. select the following fields. type Head Detail. For Group parameter under. select Construction. 650 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . for Name. Select Type. under Other. 5 Click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. so that they are listed before Comments. under Available fields. click OK. and click Properties. click Edit. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. click Add to create the new parameter.3 In the Project Parameters dialog.

View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. 14 On the Options Bar. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. and without releasing the left mouse button. under Type Mark A.Door Schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Level 1. type Unit 18 . Jamb Detail. for Jamb Detail. type 2/A107. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. select Head Detail.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. type Window Details. 17 Save the file. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. type 1/A107. and for Sill Detail. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. for Head Detail. click in the Head Detail header. click Group. select Doors. Under Name. type 3/A107. and Sill Detail. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. You then hide the column used for the filter. expand Floor Plans. For example. TIP To select all 3 headers. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 651 .

652 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only.Unit 18. select Hidden field. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Select contains in the second field. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. verify that New Construction is selected. 11 Under Field formatting. click the Fields tab. select Family and Type. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. select the following fields. 4 Click OK. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. but is not included as a column in the schedule. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). and click OK. select Mark.■ For Phase. expand Sheets (all). 10 Under Fields. Type U18 in the third field. and double-click A102 . 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 6 Under Available fields.

and drag it to the sheet.Door Schedule. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 653 . click Unit 18 . 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet.13 In the Project Browser.

select Bold. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. under Floor Plans. under Category. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 8 Click OK. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Under Text. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. under Available fields. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. right-click in the Design Bar. to the right of Header text. 654 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 5 Using the same method. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Number.20 Save the file. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Rooms.rvt. and click OK. and click View. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. double-click Level 1. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise.

and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. click New. add 5 more rooms. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. type Building Entry. type Corridor. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. select Corridor. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. select Storage. For 106. for room 101. For 105. The room Number is U17-46. type Stair. and press ENTER. For 104. and press ENTER. type Storage. Creating a Room Schedule | 655 . 11 Using the same method.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. For 103. for Name. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. next to Rows. 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 102. 101-106.

you add room separation lines. under Projection/Surface.13 Save the file. place rooms from a program list. click Override. 656 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. click the bright green swatch.rvt. For Weight. and click OK. select 9. expand Lines. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. draw the horizontal line. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. For Room Separation. and modify room names. 4 Click OK twice. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click Level 1. Under Custom colors. First. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. under Visibility. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. click the Lines field. click Room Separation. In the Lines field. In the Line Graphics dialog. click the Color field. under Floor Plans.

Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Room.8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 9 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 657 . click Modify.

12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 14 For Offset.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 13 On the Options Bar. for Room. select 101 Building Entry. 658 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . type 8'. for Room. 11 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage.

double-click Room Schedule. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). click Modify. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). double-click Level 1. 19 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Design Bar. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 20 While pressing CTRL. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 659 . 16 Using the same method. and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. place the following rooms. under Floor Plans. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry.

22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. (Element Properties). clear Room Bounding. under Category. 27 Select Schedule keys. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. type Units. 30 On the Options Bar. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar.21 On the Options Bar. select Base Finish. and click OK. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and Wall Finish. type As Selected. 660 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 26 In the New Schedule dialog. under Constraints. click New. click Modify. and for all 3 finishes. 31 For Key Name. for Rows. and click Add. click 23 On the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. 24 Open the Room Schedule. under Available fields. and click OK. while pressing CTRL. Floor Finish. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule.

select Units. 44 On the Options Bar. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click OK. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click (Element Properties). 33 In the Project Browser. and click Add. for Available fields. select Rooms. 37 Open the Room Schedule. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 661 . click Edit. for Fields. 43 In the Filter dialog.32 Using the same method. under Identity Data. click Check None. for Room Style. double-click Level 1. right-click Room Schedule. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. and click Properties. 36 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 On the Options Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. for Room Style. under Other. select Room Style. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 38 Under U17-8. click (Filter Selection). The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. select Units.

and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. click the Color Scheme field. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. at the warning prompt. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click OK. and apply it to the Level 1 view. under Views (all). For rooms 102 and 105. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Name. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. for Color. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 662 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). and 106.46 Open the Room Schedule. type Room Type. and double-click Level 1. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. select Service. 48 Save the file. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. select Public. under Graphics. 104.rvt. click 5 For Title. (Duplicate). Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. type Room Type. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Room Style. right-click Level 1. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 103.

11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). select Room Type. under Visibility. and click OK. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 17 On the Design Bar. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the color legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 663 . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Lines. and clear Room Separation. click Edit Color Scheme. under Schemes. 19 On the Options Bar. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. clear Visible. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 14 Click OK twice. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click Modify. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. click Edit. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click the value in the Color column.

and select Show Title. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. (Element Properties). under Graphics. 28 Under Title Text. 24 Click OK. 664 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . on the Options Bar. for Size. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Using the same method. and click OK. click Edit/New. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar.22 In the Color dialog. respectively. type 1''. 29 Click OK twice. click Modify. type 1/4''. select blue. under Custom color. for Swatch Width.

under Sections.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. select Room Type. click Edit. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 665 . Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. under Sections. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. under Graphics. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Building Section. for Color Scheme. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. double-click Building Section. under Visibility. and click OK. select Rooms. click Color Scheme Legend. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 35 Click OK twice. and select Properties. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. As you move the cursor over the drawing area.

under Identity Data.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. and click OK. 42 In the Filter dialog. 666 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click . select Units. select all the rooms in the stairwell. for Room Style. click Check None. 46 Click . 41 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. under Identity Data. (Filter Selection). 45 While pressing CTRL. select Public. and click OK. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. and click OK.

Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. double-click Room Style Schedule. under Key Name for the new row. for Rows. and click OK. type Suites. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 54 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 667 . select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. select Service. excluding the stairwell spaces. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. 51 On the Options Bar. click New. for Room Style. under Schedules/Quantities. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. and click .

select Suites. select Areas and Volumes. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.55 Click . 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. The color fill extends to the roof. but not beyond it. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 668 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Identity Data. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. under Volume Computations. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. for Room Style. verify that At wall finish is selected. The color fill will extend to the roof. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 59 Under Room Area Computation. and click OK. and click OK.

Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. under Constraints. 68 Click . 70 For Limit Offset. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 669 . select Level 2. select the stairwell room. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 On the first level. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 72 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. 71 Click OK. select Loft. and click 65 For Limit Offset. the dining room. 66 Click OK. and the living room. . for Upper Limit. click Modify. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. type 0’ 0” . type -10”.

73 Save the file. under 3D Views.rvt. double-click {3D}. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. 670 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.

6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. click Family and Type.EPDM. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. Creating a Material Takeoff | 671 . select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .Insulation on Plywood Deck . For Then by. select Family and Type. 9 Using the same method. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Add. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. and click OK. Select Grand totals. under Category. under Available fields. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Roofs. click Modify. select Material: Description. 3 While pressing CTRL. Clear Itemize every instance.

select Calculate totals. for Name. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. for Fields. and under Fields.25 4. 17 Click Calculated Value. for Material: Cost. under Other. 19 For Type. type Estimated Cost. select Calculate totals. click Estimated Cost. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Currency. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). click Edit. and click Properties. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. Under Field formatting. select Material: Area. under Available fields. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. click the Formatting tab. select Material: Cost. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click Add. 12 Click OK. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 23 For Field formatting.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. and click OK twice. 20 For Formula. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.75 672 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 Click OK.50 1.

29 Select Use digit grouping.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. for Currency. You draw a travel path line. either within family components or within the project template. you create a shared parameter file. These shared parameters can be added to any family. for Rounding.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. select $. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 673 . Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. you create an exiting plan for the building. In this lesson. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. 27 In the Format dialog. click the Format value. The cost fields are formatted correctly. which inserts commas after every three digits. ensuring consistency across families and projects. tag the line. and schedule the total distance of each path. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. 30 Click OK twice. adding the shared parameters to a family. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. 26 In the Project Units dialog. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. creating a generic tag to tag the family. 31 Save the file. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 28 For Unit symbol. can be used for any number-based parameter. and are defined and stored in an external file. and reporting the shared parameters. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. regardless of category. Digit grouping. not just for currency.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click Save. for Type of Parameter. type Travel Distance.txt. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. for File name. 9 Under Parameters. click New. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. select Length. click Training Files. for Name.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. click New. and click OK. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. for Name. under Groups.rvt. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 11 Click OK twice. click New. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 7 Under Parameters. for Name. type Path ID. under Floor Plans. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. type OfficeStandardsParameters. type Exiting. 674 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Create.

you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. and click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Click Training Files. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 675 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Group parameter under. for Travel Distance Formula. in the Load into Projects dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. following the equals symbol (=). 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Add. type Length. select Shared parameter. under Parameter Data. 12 In the Family Types dialog. click Add.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 15 If necessary. 14 On the Design Bar. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. select Constraints. under Parameters. under Parameters. 9 In the Family Types dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project. and select Instance.rvt. 13 Click Apply. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. group it under Dimensions. 10 Using the same method. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. If you have multiple projects open. under Parameter Type. 11 Click OK.rvt. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. and click OK. and click OK. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. click Load into Projects.rfa. under Dimensions. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and click Select. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. 8 Select Instance.

click parameter(s) to label). select Travel Distance.rft. and click OK. click Label. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag. under Parameters. 24 Click OK twice. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Add Parameter). 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 676 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click Label. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Category Parameters. select Travel Distance. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. click Select. click Training Files. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 21 In the Edit Label dialog.Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol.

28 On the Design Bar. type Travel Distance Tag. 29 In the drawing window. 32 In the Save As dialog. and press DELETE. select Path ID. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. click Load into Projects. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.rvt is selected. for File Name. 33 On the Design Bar. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 677 . verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 35 Save the file. and move it down. click Modify. and click Save. 31 Click File ➤ Save As.rfa. and click OK.

2 Zoom in to the corridor. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Exiting Plan . 4 On the Options Bar. select Chain.Level 1.Tagging.Placing. 678 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click in the center of the corridor. click Component. under Floor Plans. After the lines are tagged. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. above the exterior door as shown. 6 Move the cursor to the right.

17 On the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). under Floor Plans. through the door. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. under Constraints. click Tag ➤ By Category. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. click Component. double click Exiting Plan . move the cursor near the right corner. 8 On the Design Bar.Level 2. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that Chain is selected. and click OK. Placing. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. clear Leader. type 1-1. click Modify. for Path ID. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. click Modify. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 679 . 10 On the Options Bar.7 Move the cursor down. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click outside of the building.Tagging. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 13 While pressing CTRL.

20 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair. move the cursor to the left. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. and click above the door to the stair. 23 Move the cursor down.19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Component. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. and click. 680 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .

25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Placing. under Constraints. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 33 For Name. 30 Using the same method. type Level 1 Exit Distance. . Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 681 . click Modify.Tagging. click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog.24 On the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. type 2-1. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Category. for Path ID.

682 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Filter by. in the second field. in the first field. select Path ID. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. under Other. under Available fields. select Path ID. 43 In the Project Browser. 49 Click OK twice. select Path ID and Travel Distance. select contains. under Schedules/Quantities. 46 In the Project Browser. 38 For Sort by. type Level 2 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. type 2-. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Travel Distance. 50 Save the file. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and in the third field. in the third field. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. for Filter. 36 For Filter by. and click Properties. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 35 Click the Filter tab. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Calculate totals. click Training Files.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. while pressing CTRL. type 1-. 42 Click OK. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Add. 41 Under Fields.rvt. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. click Edit. and under Field formatting. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click Rename.

Partitions . 9 Click OK twice. 4 Under Available fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.Interiors ➤ C10 . and click OK. right-click Generic . and click Properties.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. and click View. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. and click .Fixed Partitions. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 683 .6''. select the following fields. 10 In the schedule. right-click the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. expand C . under Identity Data. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. under Categories. and select C1010145 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . click the Value field. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. click the Fields tab. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. for Assembly Code. select Walls.

click OK. 11 Click OK 3 times. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. and click Next. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Create. 684 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 3 Click New. click Training Files.mdb). for Database Name. 8 In the New Database dialog. and click OK to create the database. type Revit_Project. the database display may be different than that shown. click the File Data Source tab. under Database.rvt. 1 On the File menu. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. select a location for the database file.mdb.11 Close the exercise file. 6 Click Finish. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 9 Under Directories. and click Next. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.

Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Additionally. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 685 . In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. For example. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. 13 Close the exercise file. in addition to the Id column. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables.

686 .

or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'.Annotating and Dimensioning 12 In this tutorial. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 687 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2009 projects.

After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. 688 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise.

In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated.rvt. click Training Files. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.Shared Elevation. select Shared. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. and click OK. click (Element Properties). 6 Click OK twice. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Constraints. 8 Select the Level 1 line. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. If you did that now. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. and double-click South. Relocating a Project | 689 . 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. expand Views (all). to better demonstrate how shared levels work. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. click Edit/New. In the Name dialog. The levels in the project are not shared. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. However. type 1/4'' Head . for Elevation Base.

type 325'. you specify the new location of the project. click Modify. The base elevation now reads 325'. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. By typing 325' in this step.Shared Elevation. 12 In the Type Selector. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project.By selecting the Level 1 line. 13 On the Design Bar. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. select Level : 1/4'' Head . and press ENTER. The south elevation is displayed. 10 On the View menu. 690 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .

select Levels 2-4. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. the Penthouse level. as well as other views of the building model. double-click North.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. Relocating a Project | 691 . and the Roof Plan level. under Elevations. 14 In the Project Browser. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.

Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. radial. click File menu ➤ Save As. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. In Revit MEP. In this case. and save the exercise file with a unique name. multi-segmented. Dimensioning In this lesson. You place linear. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 16 If you want to save your changes.■ ■ In the Type Selector. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.Shared Elevation. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. and angular dimensions. permanent dimensions are created automatically. 692 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Level : 1/4'' Head . On the Design Bar. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. click Modify. Dimensioning on page 692.

Creating Dimensions | 693 .rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select it. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. and are created by selecting individual reference points. By default. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. snap to wall centerlines. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and double-click Level 1. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall. click Dimension. dimensions are aligned. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. expand Views (all).

and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. 694 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. select it. 5 Move the cursor above the view.

10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked. and select it. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. click Dimension. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating Dimensions | 695 . 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step.

select the right side of the curtain wall. for Prefer. and select its left exterior face. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 16 Move the cursor up. above the plan view of the building. 696 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .11 Using the same method. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 12 On the Options Bar. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. but below the first dimension that you placed. select the right endpoint of the planter. 14 Move the cursor to the right. select Wall Faces.

23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. select Baseline. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.3/32" Arial . and click OK.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. and on the Options Bar. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string.3/32" Arial . enter Linear . enter Linear . 18 On the Basics tab. 21 In the Type Properties dialog.Ordinate. select Ordinate. and click OK. Creating Dimensions | 697 . for Dimension String Type. . 27 Click OK twice. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. 22 In the Name dialog. 25 In the Name dialog.Baseline. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. for Dimension String Type. click Edit/New.

select Linear . verify that Use Actual Value is selected. enter Planter. below. for Below. select Linear . or to the right of a permanent dimension value. for example Text dialog displays. to the left. . 30 In the Type Selector.3/32" Arial . 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. 33 Under Text Fields. 698 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .Baseline. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above.29 Select the dimension string.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. 34 Click OK. and in the Type Selector. under Dimension Value. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog.

40 Move the cursor outside the wall. click Dimension. click Modify. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to place the dimension. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). select Wall faces. Creating Dimensions | 699 . click Modify. 37 On the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. For Prefer. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. and select it. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

for Suffix. and click OK. click Modify. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. 700 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 45 In the Dimension Text dialog. 46 On the Basics tab. click the dimension text.. type Typ. 44 With the dimension still selected.42 Select the radial dimension.

50 Select the horizontal line. Creating Dimensions | 701 . verify that Wall faces is selected. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Prefer. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular).Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter. click Dimension.

You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. 53 On the Basics tab. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. you select only the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 702. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. 702 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. expand Views (all). Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and click to place the dimension. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. and double-click Level 3. Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Modify. When you dimension the wall. expand Floor Plans.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 703 . and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. Click Options. Click OK. select Wall centerlines. For Pick. select Entire Walls. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. click Dimension. select Openings. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. and select Widths.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the automatic dimension string.

and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. in some cases. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions. For example. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. However. for a multi-segmented dimension. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. expand Floor Plans. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. click Modify. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. Controlling Witness Lines on page 704.7 On the Basics tab. 704 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .

click Dimension. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify Wall centerlines is selected. select Individual References. Controlling Witness Lines | 705 . and select it. For Pick. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer.

select the right edge of the planter. move the cursor down. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. and click to place the dimension. and select it.7 Using the same method. select the bottom right endpoint. 10 Using the same method. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 706 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .

14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. Controlling Witness Lines | 707 . 13 On the Options Bar. for Prefer.11 Move the cursor down. select Wall centerlines. click Dimension. and when the wall centerline highlights. and specify a point to place the dimension. select it. Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab.

and click to place the dimension.15 Moving the cursor to the right. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. 16 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. and drag the dimension down the wall. 18 While pressing SHIFT. 708 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. 19 Release SHIFT.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 709 . and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. text font. and using the same methods. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. click Modify. After you create the new family type. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 709.20 Click the blue middle grip. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. you change the dimension tick mark. 22 On the Basics tab. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. drag it to the right.

click Edit/New. 710 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Arrow 30 Degree. 2 Click (Element Properties).Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the Name dialog. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. type Office Standard. and click OK. for Tick Mark. and select the lower dimension. click Duplicate.

■ Click OK twice. for Text Size. and select the bottom dimension. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. click Modify. 10 On the Basics tab. 9 In the Type Selector. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. select another font. For Text Font. click Modify.■ ■ Under Text. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 711 . 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 7 On the Basics tab. select CityBlueprint. type 1/8”.

you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. Creating Text Annotation on page 712. and how to add leaders to the text notes. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes.11 Using the same method. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. 712 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the angular dimension on the planter. create a new angular dimension type. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan.

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. and click and drag to create a text box.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. click (None). Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. zoom to the planter near grid line 5.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Leader. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 713 . you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. but below the upper dimension string. click Text.

8 In the Element Properties dialog box.5 In the text box. and click . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog box. type EXISTING BUILDING. and click OK. and click OK. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. and click OK. 714 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the text box. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. click Modify. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. for Text Size. type 1/4''. If so. select Arc Leaders. 11 Under Text. under Graphics.

Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 15 On the Design Bar. click Text. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 715 . click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. and type Planting Bed. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

716 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select CityBlueprint. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 20 On the Design Bar. type Standard Notes. and click OK. for Leader Arrowhead. click Modify. Click Rename. In the Rename dialog. click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. for Text Font. click Edit/New.19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. Under Text. for New. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Graphics. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Click OK twice.

27 On the Options Bar. click (Arc). Wall. and click Modify. 26 In the Type Selector. click Text. over the Planting Bed text. 31 Click in the text box. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. for Leader. and type 18'' Conc. click to place the text box. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. select Text: Standard Notes. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 717 .

click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 718 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.32 If you want to save your changes.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. 719 . and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. These components display at the required scale. like a standard door header condition. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and metal studs. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. plywood. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2009. In order to detail from the building model.Detailing 13 In this tutorial. add detail components. In the callout view. you trace over the building model geometry.

click Yes to load a Detail Items family. and click Open. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Exact location is not important.rvt. click Detail Component. click Training Files. 5 In the alert dialog. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. as well as detail lines. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. region objects. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 720 | Chapter 13 Detailing . navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. They are also view specific.rfa. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select As underlay.Detailing the View In this exercise. and insulation objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. which means that all detail components. After you add components. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and click OK. double-click the detail callout head. The roof overhang detail displays. click Training Files. 7 In the drawing area. you detail the view of the roof edge. You load detail components. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.

Detailing the View | 721 . 13 In the Name dialog. 17 In the drawing area. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 16 Click OK twice.8 Delete the component. 15 For Spacing. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. and click OK. select Corrugated Metal. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. enter 1' 4". click Repeating Detail. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Duplicate. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click Edit/New.

and on the Edit toolbar.19 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. click (Move). 722 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.rfa. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. ■ ■ Click Modify. click Training Files. and click Open. 24 In the Type Selector. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Detail Component. click Modify. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.

28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 31 To properly orient the component. click OK. Detailing the View | 723 . click Detail Component. click Training Files. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 33 In the Type Selector.rvt. 29 On the Design Bar. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. you load them as a group from a single file. and click Open.Because you still have several components to load. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. and place it in the detail view as shown. 30 In the Type Selector.

select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8". select Chain. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 35 On the Options Bar. 724 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 38 Select the horizontal segment.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 37 Click Modify. and click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.

as shown. select to near side. click Insulation. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. 42 Click Modify. (Move). 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. For Offset. enter 5 1/2". Detailing the View | 725 .

select Plywood-Section : 3/4". Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. and lock the component. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. 51 Click Modify. select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component. 47 In the Type Selector.■ Click Modify. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 45 In the Type Selector. 726 | Chapter 13 Detailing . as shown.

you add lines to your detail. Like detail components. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. For Offset. Adding Detail Lines | 727 . 4 Click Modify. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. Adding Detail Lines on page 727. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. click Detail Lines. 2 In the Type Selector. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Type Selector. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. as shown.rvt. enter 1/4". click Detail Lines. meaning they display only in this view.52 Proceed to the next exercise. they are view specific. and press ENTER. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select Thin Lines.

select Chain. select Medium Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. 728 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click (Draw). and press ENTER. and clear Chain. 16 On the Options Bar.10 On the Design Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. as shown. enter 1/4". 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. click Detail Lines. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. as shown.

What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 18 In the Type Selector. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. right-click. select Do not display. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. Adding Detail Lines | 729 . 22 In the Project Browser.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. When you turn the display model off. 24 On the View Control Bar. and click Properties. select the Penthouse level line. select Thin Lines. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. draw the detail lines as shown. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

and press ENTER. press SPACEBAR as necessary. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. click Detail Lines.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. For Offset. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. enter 1/2". select Break Line. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 29 On the Design Bar. select Vapor Barrier. 26 In the Type Selector. 30 In the Type Selector. 730 | Chapter 13 Detailing .

4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. Enter the text. you add text notes to complete the detail. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Dimension. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. click Text. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.32 Click Modify. Adding Text Notes | 731 .rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Adding Text Notes on page 731. 3 On the Options Bar. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. and click OK. 732 | Chapter 13 Detailing . for Suffix. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.Keynotes. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. click Select All Instances. 8 Select the dimension line. (Filter Selection). Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. under Text Fields. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area.7 Click Modify. and click Rename. click 6 In the Filter dialog.rvt. right-click. and click OK. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. right-click. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click the dimension text. select a text note. enter Typ. and save the exercise file. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click Roof Overhang Detail. and press DELETE. enter Roof Overhang Detail . Creating Detail Components on page 732. and click OK.. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.

15 Use a window to select all linework. 14 Click Modify.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and selecting the chain. and click Open. while pressing CTRL.rft. in the Type Selector. 7 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. 16 Click Modify. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. click Training Files. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. Creating Detail Components | 733 . pressing TAB. select all the coping linework.

28 On the Options Bar. While pressing SHIFT. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 734 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. and click Save. navigate to your preferred location. enter Roof Edge. 18 In the Save As dialog. 21 To place the component. 30 In the drawing area. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 In the Filter dialog. for File name. 31 Using the same method used previously. and the component can be placed in the detail. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. Adding Keynotes on page 735.Keynotes view is not the open view. click Load.rfa. 22 Click Modify. clear Detail Items. 27 On the Design Bar. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. select the coping. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 26 Press DELETE.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Open. The original linework remains selected. double-click it in the Project Browser. delete the underlying linework. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 23 Using a window. click Load into Projects. click Detail Component. click Training Files. 24 On the Options Bar. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click . The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail.

rvt. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. use keynote 07645. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag.C1. and click Open. use keynote 06160. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Roof Edge4. 2 In the alert dialog. For the metal coping. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. click Keynote ➤ Element.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. Click to place the leader arm.rfa. and click OK. you place keynotes on objects. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.D11. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.B5. click Training Files. In the Keynotes dialog. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. Adding Keynotes | 735 . 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 3/4" Plywood.

F1. For the 2x12. use keynote 06110. navigate to 07645. use keynote 06160.F1. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click Keynote ➤ Element. click in the Value column. For the 2x6. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. use keynote 06110. 7/8" Corrugated Steel . click Detail Component. click Edit/New.A8. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.I1. For the 2x8. 11 Click OK 3 times. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.D1. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. use keynote 09250.6 Click Modify. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. You do this in order to keynote the component.20 Ga. FasciaProfile_1. 12 On the Design Bar. using keynote 07460.G1. 736 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. and click . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. use keynote 06110. 15 In the Type Selector. 17 Keynote the component. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 737. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. select Corrugated Metal.D11. 18 Save the file. select the metal fascia with drip edge.

17 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Modify. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 8 In the Save As dialog. click Lines. click Detail Component. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. 5 In the drawing area. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 737 . 4 In the Type Selector. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 19 In the Name dialog. select Medium Line Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location.rvt. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. and select the right end point. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. for File name. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. 16 Select the component. select the left end point of the reference line. 22 On the Options Bar. and click Open.rft. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. select Medium Lines. click Load into Projects. 9 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. 6 Lock the line. click Load. click Training Files. 15 Click Modify.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. and click Save. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 11 Press DELETE. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. and click (Element Properties). click Duplicate.

44 On the Design Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Training Files. click Detail Component. on the Edit toolbar. 37 Click OK 3 times. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. and click the lower end at the break line. and click . 31 Select the component. and click OK. 25 Next. and click . click Duplicate.A1. 48 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. and click . enter EPDM Membrane. select i_Light Line Detail Component. and assign it keynote 06110. invisible. i_Invisible Line Detail Component. and click . 34 In the Name dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the drawing area. 40 Click Modify. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Selector. 46 Click Modify. and assign it keynote 07260. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 27 On the Design Bar.A5. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. 49 With the component selected. 47 Select the component. 24 While pressing CTRL. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 41 Select the component just added. click Detail Component. and i_Light Line Detail Component.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open. 30 Click Modify. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang.G1. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 738 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 42 Using the same method used previously. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. name the component Air Barrier. 38 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column. against the 3/4" plywood. click Edit/New. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. (Move). Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. and hidden) used in the view.

52 In the Type Selector. 55 Click Modify. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. and click . Creating Line-based Detail Components | 739 . leaving the detail component lines. click Detail Component. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 53 On the Options Bar. select Chain. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier.

64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. and Vapor Barrier. select Invisible Lines. 68 In the drawing area. select the component. 740 | Chapter 13 Detailing . draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.58 Using the method used previously. click Keynote ➤ Element. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component.rfa. click Detail Component. 61 In the drawing area.A4. click Load into Projects. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 63 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. Air Barrier. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component.rfa. and assign it keynote 07260. 60 On the Design Bar. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. name the component Vapor Barrier. 2 x 8 Framing. 67 In the Type Selector.

you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 9 In the drawing area. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. navigate to 07463.A4. select all the keynotes. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog.69 Select the component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. In the Type Selector. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 741 . click Browse. and close the text editor. and press TAB. 71 In the drawing area.txt. and click Open. 70 Using the method used previously. under Keynote Table. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. click File menu ➤ Save. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. name the component Batt Insul. and click . click Keynote ➤ Element. Enter 07463. and click to place the note. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. click to place the leader. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. and assign it keynote 07210. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 741. and click OK. and click OK. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and press TAB. and press ENTER. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 3 In the text editor. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. 11 Click Modify.txt. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.rvt. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. The database file opens in a text editor..A1. 72 Save the file. select Absolute. under Path Type. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes.A1.A9. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Enter 07460. add a keynote for the component.

Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.rvt. For Positioning. select Black and White. 13 Click Modify. you learn how to create a drafted detail. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that Auto .■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 742 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. and click OK. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. 14 Save the file.dwg. for Scale. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library.Center to Center is selected. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. click Training Files. These details do not update with changes to the building model. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. select 3" = 1'-0". After you create a drafting view. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Colors. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

■ Click Open. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 6 In the Project Browser. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 6 Select the callout. select Reference other view. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 5 Click Modify. and click OK. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Creating a Reference Callout on page 743. right-click Drafting 1. click Callout. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating a Reference Callout | 743 . double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). The callout is updated with the sheet information. click Modify. and click Properties. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 744 | Chapter 13 Detailing . right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 10 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.No Reference). 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. delete the existing value. 12 Click OK twice. enter Detail .Elev.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser./Sect. for New. and double-click the callout./Details. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. double-click A105 .No Reference.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 745 . and click OK. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 745 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter Header @ Sliding Door. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar.rvt.18 Save the file. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. for Name. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component.

15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 While pressing CTRL. 11 In the Name dialog. select Gypsum-Plaster. click Finish Sketch. Board. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 19 In the Type Selector. 14 Click OK 3 times. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. 16 Select the left edge of the region. click Region Properties.5 In the Type Selector. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. and click OK. enter Gyp. click Duplicate. Draw a rectangle as shown. for Name. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click . and enter 5/8". 20 On the Design Bar. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 746 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. select the width dimension. click Filled Region. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. On the Options Bar. 17 Click Modify. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.

click 22 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the mirrored region. (Draw). and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 747 . Move the cursor up. and click above the top of the region as the end point. Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point.Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and on the Edit toolbar. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror).

30 In the Name dialog. in the Type Selector. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. click Region Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region.Finish.Finish. verify that the thickness is 3/4". click Duplicate. and click OK. click (Rectangle). select Wood . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Edit/New. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 748 | Chapter 13 Detailing .25 Click Modify. click (Align). 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Draw a rectangle as shown. and select the right edge of the wood region. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 33 Click OK 3 times. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter Wood . for Name. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . 31 In the Type Properties dialog. On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines.

and press ENTER. enter 1/4". click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. sketch the new region as shown. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 38 On the Design Bar. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. For Offset. click Finish Sketch. click Ref Plane. verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. click . 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.37 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 749 . 42 On the Design Bar.

47 Click the reference plane. and click to select the point. (Align). 750 | Chapter 13 Detailing . enter 3/8". 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor down 1'. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. For Offset. 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Select Chain. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and press ENTER. and click to select the point. For Offset. Move the cursor left 1". Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor right 1". click Filled Region. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).46 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select the point. click 48 Click Modify. enter 0. and press ENTER.

58 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. 56 On the Design Bar. and select the bottom horizontal line. For Offset. top. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 751 . Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines.54 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). select Medium Lines. 60 Select the left. click Finish Sketch. enter 1/8". and right edges of the door panel region.

navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Component. 68 Click Modify.61 Click Modify. click Load. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. enter 3". TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 69 Select the bolt. and press ENTER.rfa. and click Open. 65 On the Options Bar. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 62 Select the left detail line. 752 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Training Files. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. select the height dimension.

click Load. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 753 . select Thin Lines. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. click Training Files. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 79 In the Type Selector.70 On the Design Bar.rfa. click . 80 On the Options Bar. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 71 On the Options Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. and click Open. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. click Detail Component. use the images as a guide. 78 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 76 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. select Wide Lines.

click Detail Lines. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click . 85 On the Options Bar. 754 | Chapter 13 Detailing . drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 87 Click Modify. (Mirror).82 Select the rectangle. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. and on the Edit toolbar.

92 Select the line. click (Mirror). 90 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.89 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 755 . Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 97 On the Options Bar. 101 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 95 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. select the length dimension. 756 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 99 Click Modify. 102 In the Type Selector. select Break Line. click .94 Select the mirrored line on the right. and click to place the arc as shown. 103 Add two break lines as shown. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. enter 1/8".

106 Click to place the dimension.3/32" Arial. 113 Click OK 3 times. 109 In the Type Properties dialog. Select Suppress 0 Feet. 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. . and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. the new style displays only inches. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 757 . For Rounding. click Dimension. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. select To the nearest 1/16". for Text ➤ Units Format. enter Detail Linear . click Edit/New. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click in the Value column. 114 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. The dimension display is updated. click Dimension. 110 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. and click OK. 107 Select the dimension line. and on the Options Bar. 105 In the drawing area. 111 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Dimension. enter See Schedule. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. and enter Varies. 758 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. under Dimension Value. 121 Click OK. and then click the dimension text.3/32”Arial. and click Modify.115 In the Type Selector. 120 Under Text Fields. select Replace With Text. 117 Select the dimension line. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . using the Drag Text grip. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. drag the text for the smaller dimension. for Below. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial.

127 In the Dimension Text dialog. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B.125 Select Modify to end the command. and click the dimension text. 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. under Dimension Value. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 759 . Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 128 Click OK. select Replace With Text. 130 Click OK. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A.

139 Save the file. 760 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click to create an arced leader. 138 On the Design Bar. and click to place the text. and on the Options Bar. 135 Select the note. click Text. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Board. 133 In the drawing area. 132 In the Options Bar. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 134 Enter Gyp. click Modify to end the command. select the gypsum board region on the left. and click Modify.Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar.

761 . click Training Files. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text.Finishing the Sheets 14 In this tutorial. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.

for Number of Leaders. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Training Files. 762 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. click Symbol. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 8 Select the keynote. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa.Hexagon. type 1.

12 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Note Block | 763 . under Identity Data. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). type Seal existing doors and insulate. 13 Select the tag.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click OK. click (Copy). and click above the tag to place the copy. on the Options Bar. for Text.

764 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.14 With the copy selected. 18 Using the same method. (Mirror). type Repair existing door surround. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. click Copy. and click. click (Element Properties). clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 17 Click OK. 16 For Tag. 19 With the tag selected. on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. type B. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. on the Edit toolbar. 15 For Text.

21 On the Design Bar. Repair as required. Tuckpoint as required. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean exterior brick wall. Repair existing door surround. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 22 Optionally. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 765 . and moving counter-clockwise. click Modify. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean existing concrete loading dock. using the table as a reference. Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.

On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Center. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. expand Schedules/Quantities. for the value. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. select Tag. On the Formatting tab. and for Alignment. and click Add. On the Appearance tab. expand Sheets (all). Select Text. Create. type Mark. for Note block name. for Sort by. format. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and double-click A103 . 29 In the Project Browser.Elevations. select Tag. for Heading. type 1/4''. for Header text. 766 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . under Available fields.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 26 Click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. type Description. and drag it to the sheet. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Add. verify that Arial is selected. and select Bold. 27 In the column header (text). type Exterior Construction Notes. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. Clean cut and repair wall as required. select Exterior Construction Notes. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet.

Title Sheet.31 On the Design Bar.rvt. under Sheets (all). Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.rvt. Using Drawing Lists | 767 . click Modify. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.

The drawing list displays. and click Add. for Sort by. under Sheets (all). 6 In the Project Browser. select does not equal. ■ 4 Click OK. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. select Sheet Number. expand Schedules/Quantities. 768 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 7 In the Project Browser. 5 In the list title field. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. under Available fields. On the Filter tab. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. for Filter by. double-click T . in the first field. Select Sheet Name. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and in the third field. and drag it to the sheet. select Sheet Number.Title Sheet. in the second field. type T. select Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. and click Add.

9 On the Design Bar. For the text. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. and so on). door frame schedule. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model. doors. windows. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Finally. Training File Using Legends | 769 . Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. 11 Save the file. On construction documents. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. click Modify. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. and door frames. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. On construction documents.

and click OK twice. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Arial.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 10 For Text Size.rvt. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. type Typical Symbol Legend. 770 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .Open Level Head . and click OK. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Duplicate. for Name. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click . click Symbol. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 9 For Text Font. 6 On the Options Bar. click Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. type 1/8''. you create a text type with the necessary size. click Edit/New. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . type Legend Text. and click OK.

and double-click A101 . 14 Working from the top down. click Typical Symbol Legend. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and for Leader. verify that is selected. expand Sheets (all).Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 16 In the Project Browser. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note.Site Plan/Floor Plan. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. and click to place it. Creating a Symbol Legend | 771 . expand Legends.

20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. double-click A102 .Unit 18. 18 On the Design Bar. under Sheets. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. and click to place it.17 In the Type Selector. 21 In the Type Selector. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 22 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 23 Save the file. click Modify. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 772 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .

You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. Creating a Component Legend | 773 . select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. for Name. type 4th Floor Wall Types. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Family.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. click Legend Component. and click OK. 9 Select the second wall. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. type 3'. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click Modify. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 3 For Scale. 8 On the Design Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. and on the Options Bar. select Section. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. For Host length.rvt. and press ENTER. For View. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component.

12 On the Options Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. for Leader. 11 In the Type Selector.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 774 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. click to add text without a leader. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.

and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 18 Type the following text. 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. The text note with leader is added to the legend. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. click to add text with a single-segment leader. Creating a Component Legend | 775 .

Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 776 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 22 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. select Level 4. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Legends. 24 In the Project Browser. drag it onto the sheet. under Floor Plans. and drag it to the new sheet. right-click Sheets (all). select 4th Floor Wall Types. click OK to accept the default titleblock.

under Floor Plans. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types.25 On the Design Bar. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click Modify to end the command. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. select the Wall Type 2 component. The open drawings are both visible. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. click (Match Type). Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Creating a Component Legend | 777 . The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 28 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.

The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 33 Select the patio divider wall. select Detail Level: Medium. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 34 On the View Control Bar.32 In the floor plan view. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 778 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .

you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. These changes can be due to owner requests. Using the table. Using Revision Tracking | 779 .rvt. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. or changes in building material availability. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You can create a sequence of revisions. contractor inquiries. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4. click 36 Save the file. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. In this exercise. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract.35 Optionally. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions.

any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. In general. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revision is locked and issued to the field. verify that Per Project is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. 7 Under Show. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. When you use this option. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. if the active revision is number 1. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. In most instances. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. When Issued is selected. for Numbering. If you select Per Sheet. type a date. If Visible is not selected. yet as concise as possible. 780 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 5 For Description. For example. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date.

3 Select the divider. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. including revision number and revision date. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. click (Move).rvt. Revision clouds have read-only properties. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. move the cursor up. 9 Save the file. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.8 Click OK. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. double-click Level 4. Sketching Revision Clouds | 781 . 5 Select the divider. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. you make changes to the project floor plan.

click near the partition you moved. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. select Snaps Off. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 782 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Revision Cloud. 8 In the drawing area. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. and click OK. In the Snaps dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

16 Click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. for Line Weight. you load a revision tag into the project. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. click the Annotation Objects tab. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 783 . 17 Save the file. select 6. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing.

11 Click to place the tag. double-click Level 4. scroll down to Revision Clouds. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view.rvt. 8 In the Tags dialog. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. 12 Save the file. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. click OK. you create additional revisions in the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Working with Revisions In this exercise. Training File 784 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. you need to add one. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. and because the revision is the first in the project. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. under Floor Plans.rfa. 10 In the drawing area. You then issue a revision. 4 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. click Tags. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 6 Click Load. 5 In the Tags dialog. Because you chose to number by project. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Leader. the cloud is tagged as number 1.

and click OK. 9 Click OK. you can no longer modify it. You can continue to add revisions. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. select Issued. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. double-click A107 . 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. type Modify Paving Area. 8 Add another revision row. NOTE After you issue a revision.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. under Sheets. and enter a date for the revision. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. click Add.Unnamed. You do this by issuing the revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Working with Revisions | 785 . with the description Relocate Door. you prevent further changes to the revision.rvt. and enter a date. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 7 For Description.

10 In the Project Browser. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 13 Click Finish Sketch. select Tag ➤ By Category. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 2 . 12 In the drawing area. click to add a revision clouds. apply Seq. 15 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 11 On the Drafting tab. 19 To add tags.Unnamed. 20 On the Project Browser. 17 Using the same method learned previously. for Revision.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. in the drawing area. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. double-click A107 . 3 . double-click Level 4. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. under Floor Plans.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. select the revision cloud. 786 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Revision Cloud.Modify Paving Area. select Seq.

Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. You do this so that the revision can be changed. Click Options. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. 26 In the drawing area. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. you edit the titleblock family. select the titleblock. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. For each revision. select Alphabetic. height. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. for Sequence. and rotation) to the revision schedule. 25 Click OK twice. beginning with "D". Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. clear Issued. delete the first 3 characters. for Numbering. Working with Revisions | 787 .

click Yes. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. click Edit Family. right-click Revision Schedule. click Modify. Select Outline. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Clear Blank row before data. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. click Load into Projects. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. and press DELETE. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. for Build Schedule. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. and drag it above the schedule area. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. and click Properties. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. select Bottom-up. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Grid lines. under Other. 33 Select the schedule header.27 On the Options Bar. 788 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Yes. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 28 In the alert dialog. 34 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. for Appearance. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area.

select 90° Counterclockwise. for Formatting. right-click Revision Schedule. With a user-defined height. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. and click Properties. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. for Rotation on Sheet. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. 45 On the Appearance tab. click Edit. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. enter Rev. and on the Options Bar.. for Heading. select the revision schedule. Working with Revisions | 789 . 40 Select the revision schedule header. open the titleblock family for editing. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. When the height property is variable.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. select User defined. 46 Click OK twice. for Height. under Other. and the most current revisions display in the available rows.

text. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. click Load into Projects. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. 790 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 50 In the Reload Family dialog. you learn to import information (such as images. 51 Save the file.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Yes.

and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click T . 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.JPG. and place it on a sheet. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 5 On the Design Bar.Importing Image Files In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. click Text.Title Sheet. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet.rvt. click to add text without a leader. click Modify. double-click T . Importing Image Files | 791 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets. for Leader.

you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. Training File 792 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 9 On the Design Bar. with the new text box still selected. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. click Modify. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit MEP. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 6 Select the text.doc text file in another window. 11 Save the file. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.

you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 12 Save the file. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 Click OK. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.mdi. 3 In Microsoft Excel. for File name. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. This process may vary from system to system. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. and click Save. for Name.JPG. under Sheets. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. select the document writer. 7 In the Revit MEP window. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click File menu ➤ Print. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 1 In the Project Browser.JPG. double-click A102 . 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. click Training Files. click Desktop. 10 On the Design Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Unit 18. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click Modify.rvt. 4 Under Printer. This exercise demonstrates a common method.xls. This step has been completed for you. type Fixture Schedule. Importing Spreadsheets | 793 .

794 .

Using Dependent Views 15 In this tutorial. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. 795 . or footprint. called dependent views. The large floor plan. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project. you break up the plan into sections. as well as a large lab building.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 796 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views .

and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 797 . you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area, select the crop region. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

798 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

9 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 799

10 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

800 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:

Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.)

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 801

■ ■ ■ ■

Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 16', and click.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

802 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline, for Line Weight, select 9. 28 For Line Pattern, select Double Dash 5/8'', and click OK.

Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 31 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets, right-click A101 - Unnamed, and click Rename. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 Aviary, and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click Level 2 - Aviary, and drag it onto the sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 803

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet, rename the sheet Level 2 Labs, and place the Level 2 - Labs dependent view on the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

804 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

44 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 805

46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2 - Aviary. 47 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Crop Region).

48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

806 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

51 On the View Control Bar, click Apply dependent view settings to other plans

(Hide Crop Region).

52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 807

57 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
In this exercise, you
■ ■ ■ ■

Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

808 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK. 5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the view to the aviary.

7 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping the view to the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 809

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

810 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 811

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

812 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

Using Advanced Features

813

814

Grouping

16

Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.

Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units, hotel rooms, and typical office layouts. After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.

Creating and Placing a Group
In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise, you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You mirror one instance of the group, and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

815

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click First Floor.

2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

816 | Chapter 16 Grouping

3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. enter Typical Kitchen. click (Group). and click OK. Creating and Placing a Group | 817 . The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 4 On the Edit toolbar.

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin. 818 | Chapter 16 Grouping .Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar.

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. Creating and Placing a Group | 819 . click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Typical Kitchen. under Groups. expand Model. and click Create Instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. click (Mirror). clear Copy. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.14 On the Edit toolbar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 820 | Chapter 16 Grouping .

and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate). Creating and Placing a Group | 821 . 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 822 | Chapter 16 Grouping . one mirrored. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. and one rotated. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. as shown.

and click Save. click Save As.rvt. you make changes to an instance of a group. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click to select it. When you finish editing. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Modifying a Group | 823 . 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. press TAB to highlight the wall. Modifying a Group In this exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

). press TAB. select the element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 824 | Chapter 16 Grouping . press TAB.3 Click (Group Member. 7 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door.).). and click member to group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. and click to select the door. NOTE To display an excluded element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.

move the cursor to the left. clear Tag on Placement. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. Modifying a Group | 825 . click Wall. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Door. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar.

All other elements in the model are grayed out. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. move the cursor up. click Modify. 826 | Chapter 16 Grouping . and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 20 On the Options Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group.16 On the Design Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. In edit group mode. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Edit Group. 22 In the drawing area.

When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. Nesting Groups | 827 . click Modify. you add the Typical Kitchen group. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Finish. for Unconnected Height. click 27 For Base Offset. Nesting Groups In this exercise. created in an earlier lesson. (Element Properties). and the wall and folding doors for the closet. under Constraints. which acts as the host. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. enter 7'. 28 On the group editor toolbar. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. and click OK.24 On the Design Bar. 25 Select the opening. enter 3' 4''.

Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. select the Typical Kitchen group. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. 5 In the drawing area. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 828 | Chapter 16 Grouping .Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the group editor toolbar.rvt. double-click First Floor. click (Add to Group). i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. under Floor Plans. in the Project Browser.

double-click Second Floor. Nesting Groups | 829 . 8 In the Project Browser.6 Press TAB. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. and each of the bifold doors. under Floor Plans. click Finish. select the wall between the folding doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar.

You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you add door tags to a group. such as text. under Floor Plans. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. such as door and window tags. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and filled regions. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. In the next exercise. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 830 | Chapter 16 Grouping . you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects.10 Click File menu ➤ Save.

6 Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Detail Group | 831 . click to draw a rectangular region. click Filled Region. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch.

and on the Design Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. and click OK. click (Group). click to add an arc leader. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 16 In the drawing area.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. 832 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click Text. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click Modify. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 12 Enter Tile.

Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. 21 In the drawing area. and click Create Instance. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. under Groups.18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 833 . double-click Second Floor. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. Because the detail group contains variables. click Modify. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. expand Detail.

5 On the Design Bar. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 834 | Chapter 16 Grouping .rvt.manner that a drawing component can be added. as shown. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. double-click First Floor. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit.

enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 9 On the Edit toolbar. for Attached Detail Group Name. 8 In the Filter dialog. double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. select Door Tags. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. click (Group). click Check None.7 On the Options Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 835 .

This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. and click OK. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. therefore. When you load the group from the library into a new project. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Training File 836 | Chapter 16 Grouping . the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. click Place Detail. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project.

Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. A warning dialog displays. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt. 3 For File name. verify that Same as group name is selected. and click OK. under Groups\Model. click Modify. click Desktop. for Create new. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. expand Groups. In this case. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 5 In the New Project dialog. browse to the Desktop. select 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Save. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and click Open. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. click OK.rvt. verify that Project is selected. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Save Group. and click Create Instance. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. and expand Model. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. Saving and Loading Groups | 837 . 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. accept the default template file.

click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. and the link is removed. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. verify that Attached Details is selected only. click OK. When a group is converted to a link. expand Revit Links. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. click Remove Link. and click OK. 24 In the message dialog. click Use Existing. click Link. and on the Options Bar. click Bind. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. select the linked Revit model.rvt file is added as a link to the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. click Modify.rvt. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 17 On the Design Bar. 838 | Chapter 16 Grouping . The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 In the Project Browser. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.

you specify an active workset. After the project is shared. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. floors. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. they cannot make changes to it. use Element Borrowing. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. The first time you activate worksets within a project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. such as walls. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. go to the Worksets dialog. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. doors. you must first enable Worksharing. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit MEP 2009. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. however. All other team members can view this workset. To make a workset editable. In this tutorial. Working in a shared project In a shared project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. called Worksharing. Elements specific to a view. stairs. such as annotations and dimensions. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. and so on. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset.Sharing Projects 17 When working with large building projects. Using Worksharing. and click Editable. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. select the desired workset. A workset is a collection of building elements. 839 . You can enable Worksharing for any project. When you are working on a shared project.

you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. In a multi-story structure. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. When setting up Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Team size 840 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects .Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. After learning the fundamentals. In the next exercise. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit MEP by opening only those worksets required for your work. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. such as a tenant interior. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. In the lessons and exercises that follow. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Instead.

not including the Project Standards. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. When creating the new worksets. You should have at least one workset for each person. with each assigned a specific functional task. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. This allows Revit MEP to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. When you create a new workset. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. As new members create worksets for their own use. designers work in teams. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and View worksets. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 841 . Experience has shown that. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Team member roles Typically. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Regardless of the default setting. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. On this tab. for a typical project. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Shared Levels and Grids. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. In most projects. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you control workset visibility on a per view basis.

it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. When finished or at regular intervals. When you save to the central file. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can select which workset is active. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. On the Options Bar. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. This makes them available to other team members. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. your changes are saved. within the local file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Therefore. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you should then save to your local file. This is called “Selective Open.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. As you work. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. However. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. For example. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. When you save to the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. After saving to the central file.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. you make that workset editable by you. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. proceeds as usual. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. however. 842 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Generally. your changes propagate to the entire team. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. When you save locally (to your local file). if a workset named Interior was created. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. the file is saved as the central file.

make any required worksets editable. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you work no differently then you would in the office. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. reload the latest changes from the central file. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. using VPN. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit MEP. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. Alternatively. When working remotely. and then save the local file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. for instance. In this conceptual exercise. and make that workset editable. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. save to the central file. To do this. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. In this instance. if you know who checked out the required workset. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you should check out the Materials workset. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. In this situation. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 843 . The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team.

3 In the Worksets dialog. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 844 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . click Worksets. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Your username displays as the present owner. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. and open Common\c_Worksets. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. under Show. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. The Worksets dialog displays. and notice all are editable by you. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names.rvt.In the next exercise. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise.

and double-click Level 1. Therefore. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. click New. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. type the name Exterior Shell. For training purposes. clear Families. select any of the exterior walls of the building model.When you enable worksharing. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Revit MEP creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Project Standards. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. you can rename the default workset. Only User-Created worksets should display. You do. currently named Workset1. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. 11 In the Worksets dialog. click OK. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. In this case. expand Floor Plans. 13 In the Rename dialog. 8 Click OK. and Views. it is better to make them visible by default. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. In this simple training project. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. In this training file. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. imagine four users including yourself. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. and click OK. When you initially activate Worksharing. select Workset1. Because the interior walls appear in many views. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 845 . 14 In the Worksets dialog. a small number of team members are working on the building model. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. clear Visible by default in all views. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. 9 Click New. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". another is assigned the interior layout. 12 Click Rename. ■ 5 Under Show. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. however. expand Views (all). you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. 16 In the drawing area. For example. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset.

click Visibility/Graphics. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 23 Select all of the interior elements. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View menu. and walls. under Identity Data. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Worksets tab. including the interior doors. 21 On the Options Bar. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. click .17 On the Options Bar. stairs. 19 Click OK. 20 Select one of the interior walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. 846 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. click . Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Identity Data. 29 Click OK. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click .

36 In the Element Properties dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. 30 On the View menu. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. click . under Floor Plans. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. click the Worksets tab. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. 32 Select Interior Layout. double-click Level 2. 39 Click Save. select all of the interior elements of the building model. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 42 On the right side of the dialog. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. If any interior elements remain. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 34 In the drawing area. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 847 . 35 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 38 In the Save As dialog. 43 Click OK. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 33 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. Now that you have created the central file. click Save As. click Close. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Non Editable. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 44 On the File menu. 41 In the Worksets dialog. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. In this exercise. click Worksets. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. under Views (all).

Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. make modifications to the building model. In addition. select the central file. 15 In the Project Browser. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 844. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. click Save As. expand Floor Plans. 13 On the Window menu. and click OK. select all the User-Created worksets. Before working on the model. 848 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. please do so before continuing. and click Save. click Open. and select Specify. If you have not yet completed the exercise. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. select Interior Layout for Name. select Interior Layout. 2 In the Open dialog. click Worksets. 6 On the File menu. 4 Click Open. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. expand Views (all). check out worksets. Next. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 7 In the Save As dialog. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. and double-click Level 1. 11 In the Worksets dialog. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 12 Click OK. In this case. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you create your local file. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset.

24 Click OK. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. In the Worksets dialog. however. click . notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 22 Click OK. under Identity Data. 23 On the File menu. click Modify. 20 Under Constraints. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. click . The upper exterior wall should still be selected. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. If it was owned by another user. On the Options Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 21 On the Options Bar. Verify that it is cleared. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. and click OK. click Worksets. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Because this element is not owned by another user. In this case. Revit MEP borrows it for you and applies your changes. 18 On the Options Bar. you can still edit this wall. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. If this is selected. notice the Editable Only option. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Working Individually with Worksets | 849 . a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable.

The precise location is not important. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously.126mm Partition (2-hr). 850 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 29 In the Type Selector. click Wall. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 33 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. click Modify. 28 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. select Basic Wall: Interior . add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 26 Delete the door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 31 On the Design Bar. click Door. 34 In the Type Selector.

Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 851 . add two door openings into the rooms you created. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. which matches the information in the Status Bar. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. and save locally immediately afterward. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. When working in your local file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and reload the latest changes. In addition. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Throughout the process. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. you should perform regular saves. In this particular case. By default. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. displays the workset as well as the element type. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. checked out worksets. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. you created your local file. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. leave this file open in its current state. At the end of a work session. click Save to Central. Borrowed Elements is selected. two users access the central file through a network connection. each user must check out worksets. In this exercise. it is recommended. Whenever you save. You modified the building model. make elements editable. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. For training purposes. please do so before continuing.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. save to central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. you should relinquish all worksets. a tooltip.

and click Save. and reset the Username to your computer login name. In addition. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. under Username. return to the Settings dialog. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 4 Click the General Tab and. select all the User-Created worksets. 15 On the File menu. User 2: Create a local file. click Worksets. 2 Start a new Revit MEP session by double-clicking the Revit MEP icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 12 In the Save As dialog. consider that person to be User 1. enter User 2. and proceed to Creating a local copy. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. For training purposes. and select Yes for Editable. click Open. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. 852 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 11 On the File menu. and click OK. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. 9 Click Open. instructions are staggered. click Save As. and click OK. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. skip the following section. one user has already created a local file. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 7 In the Open dialog. and select Specify. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. click Options. Using a second Revit MEP session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit MEP window. In the following section of this exercise. click Options. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. Regardless of which central file you choose to use.rvt. and click OK.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This file is for your use only. select the central file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 3 On the Settings menu. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. This is a system setting. specifically sequenced. You now have a local copy of the project.

25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. modify the building model.You are now the owner of that workset. If it is not open.” 29 Click OK. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 27 On the File menu. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. click Worksets. 23 Click OK. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 19 On the File menu. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 853 . User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. it becomes the active workset. select the lower exterior wall. expand Floor Plans. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 17 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. expand Views (all). open it now. click Save to Central. expand Views (all). select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 24 In the Project Browser. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. If you only have one workset checked out. User 1: Check out worksets.

under Floor Plans. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. you should create a furniture plan view. and click OK. under Views (all). you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 44 In the Project Browser. 43 In the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Floor Plans. click Save to Central. When you save to central. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. However. User 1: Reload latest worksets.” 35 Click OK.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 41 On the File menu. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. click Reload Latest. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click Rename. and click OK. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. click Worksets. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 46 In the Project Browser. Click Yes. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 42 Select Furniture Layout. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. click Save to Central. right-click Copy of Level 1. 37 On the File menu. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. select Yes for Editable. right-click Level 1. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 33 On the File menu.” 39 Click OK. under Floor Plans. 854 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Before adding any furniture.

select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. and click OK.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. click the Worksets tab. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. click Reload Latest. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 62 On the File menu. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created.200mm. the Visible by default option was not selected. choose any desk. click Rename. click Save to Central.” 55 Click OK. 60 In the Rename dialog. 66 On the File menu. 61 Click OK 2 times. select Project Standards. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. rather than Families. and click inside any room. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. under Show. and click OK. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. such as Wall Types. 50 On the View menu. click Component. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 53 On the File menu. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 65 Click OK. click Save to Central. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. are placed under Project Standards. click Visibility/Graphics. Therefore. 49 On the Design Bar. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. click Modify. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 855 . NOTE System families. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Edit/New. 48 In the Type Selector. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. enter Exterior Wall . click Worksets. and click Element Properties.

and save 69 On the File menu. finished the previous workset exercises. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. leave this file open in its current state. There are specific instructions for each user. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. This exercise requires two users and. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. you save the training file as a central file. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and published their changes back to the central file. At the appropriate point in this exercise.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. select Save to Central. select the following. Checking out worksets. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. modified the building model. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. select Reload Latest. Each user must have network access to the central file. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. As each of you work. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). click Options. 3 In the Save As dialog. In the final exercise of this tutorial. 856 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. In subsequent steps. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you need to set up your central and local files. throughout this training. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. and still have your local files open. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2.rvt. click Save As. and click OK. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). User 1: Reload latest. leave this file open in its current state. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 856. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and these problems are rectified. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Each user checked out worksets. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. 70 On the File menu.

and click Save. This is a system setting. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and click Save. and reset the Username to your computer login name. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. and click OK. 5 Click Save. Next. click Open. and click OK. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Options. 17 On the File menu. In addition. select Make this a Central File after save. 8 In the Save As dialog. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 13 In the Open dialog. This is the local file for User 1. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and select Specify. click Save As. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. click Options. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 6 On the File menu. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ This Revit MEP session is now set up for User 2. On the Settings menu. 12 On the File menu. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 18 In the Save As dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit MEP by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 857 . Set the Username to User 2. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Save As. select the central file.4 In the File Save Options dialog. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. return to the Settings dialog. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. The central file should still be open. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 15 Click Open. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.

select Exterior Shell. if any User-Created worksets are not open. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. double-click Level 1. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. You are now the owner of that workset. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. click Worksets. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. and click Editing Requests. 30 On the left exterior wall. and select Yes for Editable. 24 Under Active Workset. select the second window from the top. under Floor Plans. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. select the Interior Layout workset. After you submit the request. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. At this point. select Interior Layout. click Worksets. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. and click Open. and select Yes for Editable. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and then click OK. Afterwards. and then click OK. 29 On the Options Bar. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. select them. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. You are now the owner of that workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. click the File menu. 26 In the Worksets dialog. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 27 Under Active Workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 858 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 22 In the Worksets dialog.

you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. click Close. 38 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. click Check Now. 36 Click Close. and click OK. select the following. select Save to Central. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. to Local. and notice the window is in the new location. 35 Click Grant. In this multi-user exercise. select the request submitted by User 2.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 859 . In this case. and close 39 On the File menu. A message informs you that your request has been granted. and the other user granted it. you requested permission to edit the element.

860 .

861 . you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). At any time in the design process. and each option set can have multiple schemes. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. For example. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. In addition. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 18 When working with a building model. After you and the client agree on the final design. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have multiple sets of design options. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. Using design options. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. In this tutorial.

you set up multiple design option sets. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. the only available command is to create a new option set. With the second option. under Option Set. In the second exercise. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. you design each of the structural options. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. 862 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options .In this particular case. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. make your final design decision. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Training Files. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). 2 In the Design Options dialog. therefore. the roof and structure systems must work together. and delete the unwanted options from the project. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. click New. each with multiple design options.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can edit it. In the final exercise of this lesson. each is constructed for interchangeability. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. In the first exercise in this lesson. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. After you create a design option. TIP In this exercise. The client has asked you to create various options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option.

TIP To center the middle column. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 7 In the Type Selector. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 9 On the Design Bar. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. add three columns. click 12 On the Options Bar. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 4 In the Project Browser. In this case. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. By selecting Multiple. expand Views (all). either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it.3 Select Option 1 (primary). and the third column centered between the two. click Modify. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. In the following illustration. 11 On the Edit toolbar. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. click Edit Selected. 5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. expand Floor Plans. or add a dimension string between the columns. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. click Column. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. Creating the Structural Design Options | 863 . and click Close. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. select: ■ ■ ■ .

Because of the size of the columns. 18 On the View toolbar. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. click . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 17 Zoom out and. When you are finished. A copy of the three selected columns is added. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. using the same technique. they are difficult to see in this view. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 864 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options .TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process.

24 Select the Beam you added previously. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. click Beam. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. click Modify. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The second click specifies the end of the beam. double-click TOP OF CORE. 23 On the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 865 . select Round Bar : 2".Notice the 12 columns that you added. In it. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 21 In the Type Selector. Adding a beam is a two-click process. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Zoom in on the upper right column. The first click specifies the beam start point. you add the beams that span the columns. Next. Use the following illustration as a guide. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns.

28 Zoom out. and select the center of the column to add a copy. and click the center point. zoom into the left column.25 On the Edit toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 30 On the View toolbar. 866 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 26 On the Options Bar. click . move down to the next set of columns.

click Rename. click Rename. enter Structure for New. 37 Select Option 2 and. 41 Under Option Set. 33 Click Finish Editing. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click New. click New. under Option. 36 In the Rename dialog. click New. click Rename. under Option. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 46 Under Option. 40 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. Creating the Structural Design Options | 867 . 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. There should now be two roofing design options.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 38 In the Rename dialog. 45 Under Roofing. enter Beam for New. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. enter Brackets for New. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. under Option. not a new option set. enter Roofing for New. and click OK. name the option Louvers. under Option Set. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. and click OK. 32 In the Design Options dialog. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. and click OK. under Option Set. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. click Rename. 43 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. select Option 1 (primary).

This allows you to more easily manage the project.47 Under Roofing. select Edit Selected. When finished. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 52 Click Close. select Beam. double-click ROOF TERRACE. under Floor Plans. under Structure. click Rename. 53 In the Project Browser. select Option 2. 51 Under Edit. 48 Under Option. you create the second design option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. Under Now Editing. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. name the option Sunscreen. and click OK. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. it will resemble the following illustration. 868 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options .

click Component. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. select Roof Beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 56 In the Type Selector. 58 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 869 . click Align.

61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point. The first click sets the move start point. 870 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 62 Select the beam and. on the Edit toolbar. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click Modify.60 After aligning the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. i_Urban_House-in progress. you need this file in its current state. click Finish Editing. and click Save. 68 In the Design Options dialog. name the file. 66 On the View toolbar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 871 . click Design Options ➤ Design Options.rvt. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 70 On the File menu. click Save As. which is visible by default. click . Notice that even before you close the dialog. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. 69 Click Close. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 67 On the Tools menu.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.

Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 5 Click Close. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. click Edit Selected. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. the other for beams. Sunscreen.rvt. a Louver system. 8 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all). each with multiple design options to pick from. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. Under Now Editing. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. expand Floor Plans. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 4 Under Edit. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. select Rafter 2 x 10. 872 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . you design each of the roofing options. 2 On the Tools menu. and double-click TOP OF CORE. you set up multiple design option sets. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span.In this exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 3 In the Design Options dialog. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. The second roofing system. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. open it now. With the second option. In the next exercise. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. click Component. delete them after the rafter is in place. select Louvers (primary). If you need to add dimensions. do so now. under Roofing. The first option. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. 10 Referring to the following illustration.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 15 On the Edit menu. 16 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. click Modify. click Array. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Select 2nd for Move To. under Other. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 873 . 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click . You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. enter 38' 6" for Length. Enter 5 for Number.

and press ENTER. For example.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. The space separates feet and inches. enter 3' 3". rather than entering 3' 3". you can enter 3 3. TIP When entering a dimension value. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. 874 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . when the listening dimension displays. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers.

Creating the Roof System Design Options | 875 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and. click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. when the listening dimension displays. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 25 With the louver still selected. 27 For the array starting point. click the Edit menu. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Constrain. Enter 34 for Number. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. under Other. 20 In the Type Selector. enter 1’. select Louver 2 x 6. Select 2nd for Move To. and click Array. 26 On the Options Bar. and select the louver you just placed. and click OK. click Component. click . 23 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system.

click Finish Editing. 876 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 29 On the View toolbar. 30 On the Tools menu. click . 31 In the Design Options dialog.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. The louver roof system is complete. under Edit.

NOTE As you sketch the arcs. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 34 In the Project Browser. the top of the next column on the right. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. and click OK. Therefore. 41 Select the top of the left column. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. Click OK. click Lines. In this case. and the third point defines the arc. select Sunscreen. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 40 On the Options Bar. and double-click West. The first two points define the ends of the line. 39 On the Design Bar.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. under Roofing. and then click Close. click Properties. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 877 . 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 43 On the Design Bar. 33 Under Editing. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click . try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. You will fix this in a later step. click Edit Selected. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. expand Elevations. then you can modify it through the dimension.

Select the right arc. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Sunscreen. then the center arc. you designed each of the roofing options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.44 In the Element Properties dialog. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 45 Click OK. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 46 On the Tools menu. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. The second roofing system. 878 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 51 In the Design Options dialog. 50 On the Tools menu. In this exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. you need this file in its current state. click Trim/Extend. The louver roof system is complete. Under Constraints. click Finish Sketch. The first option. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. click . 52 On the File menu. and then click Close. under Edit. a Louver system. Under Constraints. click Finish Editing. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. The arcs should connect. 49 On the View toolbar. 48 On the Design Bar. click Save. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise.

10 In the Project Browser. 5 Right-click each of the copies. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. 7 On the View menu. under 3D Views. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. under 3D Views. secondary. click the Design Options tab. double-click Secondary Option. do so now. under Views (all). tertiary. and delete the discarded design options. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 11 On the View menu. Managing Design Options | 879 . double-click Primary Option. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Click OK. make it part of the building model. under Views (all). right-click the 3D View Primary Option. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. under 3D Views. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. under Views (all). After exploring the combinations. and click Rename. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 4 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click {3D}.Managing Design Options In this exercise. expand 3D Views. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. enter Primary Option. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under Views (all). and click Duplicate. and last options. you select a design.

18 In the Project Browser.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 15 On the View menu. 14 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. double-click Tertiary Option. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. under Views (all). 880 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . under 3D Views. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 19 On the View menu. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). and click OK.

27 In the alert dialog. 24 Under Option. In this case. 31 In the alert dialog. 33 In the Design Options dialog. In your design options. The set is deleted. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. select Make Primary. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Accept Primary. click Yes. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 26 Under Option Set. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. the beam option becomes part of the model. since you no longer need them. the current primaries are no longer options. Because the client has selected the design option. click Yes. Managing Design Options | 881 . click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 22 On the Tools menu. 29 Select Roofing. 23 In the Design Options dialog. double-click Primary Option.At this point. click Delete. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. under Structure. 25 Select Structure. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. select Beam. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. An alert is displayed. This was the client choice for structural. 30 Under Option Set. click Close.

882 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . In this exercise. and deleted the discarded design options. 35 On the File menu. click Save. After exploring the combinations.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. you selected a design. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. made it part of the building model.

In the lesson and exercises that follow. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. demolish existing walls and doors. complete with schedules. and then add new building model elements. For the client. then add new walls and doors in a different location. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. demolish existing construction. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. 883 . you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases.Project Phasing 19 In any project. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. In the second exercise. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. In the second exercise. This changes room definition and total building model area. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase.

they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. If you wish to do so. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. When you create a new project. and open Common\c_Phasing. under Phasing. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. you do not need to change the project units to metric. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. and double-click Level 1.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. 7 Click Cancel. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. click Modify. and click OK. This means that all building model elements. click Project Units. click Training Files. 6 On the Options Bar. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. go to the Settings menu. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. regardless of phase. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. As you add new elements to the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. During the demolition and renovation process. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. expand Floor Plans. click (Element Properties). 5 Select any of the exterior walls. 4 Click Cancel. 884 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. define the units. are visible in this view. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. In the Element Properties dialog.

under Phasing. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. for Phase Created.Existing. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. After you release the mouse button. 20 In the Rename dialog. and click Rename. 14 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. all of the building model elements. TIP If this were a multi-story building. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser.Demo. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.Existing. click Modify. and click Rename. are highlighted in red. under Floor Plans. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Because this is a phase-specific view. select Existing. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 17 Click No. right-click Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. After you create the views. clear Door Tags. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 19 In the Project Browser. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. right-click Level 1 . 11 In the Filter dialog. 16 In the Rename dialog. Because this is a renovation project. including the door tags. enter Level 1 . right-click Copy of Level 1 . and click OK.Existing. click . Phasing Your Model | 885 . click (Filter Selection). you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 . 12 On the Options Bar.

enter Composite Plan. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. In this case. under Floor Plans. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. 29 For Composite Plan. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.Existing.Demo. click the Phase Filters tab. There are five default phase filters. and Temporary. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. Next. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. however. select Existing. Because of this time relationship. 886 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . under Floor Plans. and click OK. On a logical time line. new construction occurs after existing construction. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. Later in this exercise. 26 In the Phasing dialog. to which all the building model elements belong.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Phase status is time-dependent. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. double-click Level 1 . 27 Click New. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. select Overridden. under New. 28 Under Filter Name. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. 24 In the Project Browser. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. under Phasing. for Phase. you modify these settings. double-click Level 1 . Demolished. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. Existing. 21 In the Project Browser. You may need to zoom in to see this.

There are two ways to demolish an element. 34 In the Color dialog. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. under Floor Plans. you begin demolition. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 36 Using the same method.31 Under Phase Status. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. When you demolish the host. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. its display changes to a red dashed line. double-click Level 1 . Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. under Cut ➤ Lines. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 39 In the Phasing dialog. or you can use the demolish tool. click the value for Color. select the line style. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements.Existing. under Floor Plans. As you click each wall. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. 32 In the Demolished row. select Demolished. Phasing Your Model | 887 . double-click Level 1 . you demolish all elements hosted by it. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. select the interior walls one at a time. select red.Demo. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. select a lighter blue. click OK. 35 Click OK twice. 42 In the Project Browser. click (Demolish). Next. The cursor is displayed as a hammer.

click Door. select Basic Wall: Interior . 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Show Previous + New. 49 On the Design Bar. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 50 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 52 Open Level 1 . 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 53 Open Level 1 .Existing. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 46 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 51 Add a door leading into each room.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Phase Filter. and click OK. for Phase Filter. under Phasing. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 888 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . add a long horizontal wall. 47 In the Type Selector. click Wall. The demolished walls no longer display. under Phasing. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr).Demo. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall.

New. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. All elements are displayed in this view. new is shown in blue. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 60 On the View toolbar. Phasing Your Model | 889 . 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 59 Open Level 1 . Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. click (Default 3D View).Demo.New. 62 If necessary. 61 On the View Control Bar. The renovated building model plan is displayed. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). which are displayed as red. right-click Level 1 . regardless of phase. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and existing shows as half-tone. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 57 In the Project Browser. because the phase filter is set to Show All.

Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser.Demo. If you wish to save this file.rvt. 63 Close the file. sizes. click Project Units.Existing. In the next exercise. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase.New. you can do so at this time. and new construction. and click OK. define the units. As the renovation process continues. In this view. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. demolition. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. 890 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . go to the Settings menu. expand Floor Plans. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. 3 Open Level 1 . and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. expand Views (all). NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. therefore. You can also see that the room quantities. Notice that this view is the original building model. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. you can see the new walls added to the building model. and double-click Level 1 . They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. All room boundaries are phase-specific. In this view. 2 Open Level 1 . the rooms change in both definition and size.

click Room.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 13 Open Level 1 . click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 11 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. 6 Open Level 1 . Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 891 . click Modify. 10 Open Level 1 . Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Room Tag. click Room.Demo. and maximize the view. Use the following illustration as a guide. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.New. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click in each room as you move to the right. In the Phasing dialog. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. yet they have different room numbers.Existing. 9 On the Design Bar.

That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. 19 On the Window menu. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. expand Schedules/Quantities. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 892 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . click Tile. In addition. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. The two schedule views tile.Existing. 16 In the Project Browser. click Close Hidden Windows. and double-click Room Schedule . room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 20 Close the file. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases.New Construction. In this exercise. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 18 Open Room Schedule . View phase-specific room schedules. In this case. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. 17 On the Window menu. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction.

Comparison of alternatives on a site. You position the building models on the site plan. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In this tutorial. performance. and manage the links throughout the project. 893 . In these situations. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. In the final lesson. modify their visibility. This maximizes efficiency. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.

894 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You link two building models to the project. modify their visibility. and the other is a townhouse. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise.Linking Building Models In this lesson. One building model is a condominium. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed.Center to Center: Revit MEP places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit MEP 2009 to automatically place it. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. You position the building models on the site. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . NOTE The center of a Revit MEP model is the center of the model geometry. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.

use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. ■ ■ Manual . This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used.■ Auto . this system is not exposed to the user. RELATED See the lesson. c_Condo_Complex. 8 Clear Read-only. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . click Close. and open Common\c_Site. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. and click Properties.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. NOTE Revit MEP projects have an internal coordinate system. 4 On the File menu. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder.rvt. Manual . Otherwise. and click OK. right-click. click Open. with write permission. however. This option is grayed out. 5 On the File menu.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 911. All three files now reside. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit MEP Files. this option will place the link at a predefined location. click Save As. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 895 . Select c_Site. and save the file there. select the three files. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. click Open. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. c_Townhouse. click Training Files.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 2 On the File menu. Auto .Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit MEP model. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can do so.

The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model